YASKAWA Varispeed f7 User Manual
Annonce
Annonce
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
F7 Drive
User Manual
Model: CIMR-F7U Document Number: TM.F7.01
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Warnings and Cautions
This Section provides warnings and cautions pertinent to this product, that if not heeded, may result in personal injury, fatality, or equipment damage. Yaskawa is not responsible for consequences of ignoring these instructions.
WARNING
YASKAWA manufactures component parts that can be used in a wide variety of industrial applications. The selection and application of YASKAWA products remain the responsibility of the equipment designer or end user. YASKAWA accepts no responsibility for the way its products are incorporated into the final system design. Under no circumstances should any
YASKAWA product be incorporated into any product or design as the exclusive or sole safety control. Without exception, all controls should be designed to detect faults dynamically and fail safely under all circumstances. All products designed to incorporate a component part manufactured by YASKAWA must be supplied to the end user with appropriate warnings and instructions as to that part’s safe use and operation. Any warnings provided by YASKAWA must be promptly provided to the end user. YASKAWA offers an express warranty only as to the quality of its products in conforming to standards and specifications published in the YASKAWA manual. NO OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IS OFFERED.
YASKAWA assumes no liability for any personal injury, property damage, losses, or claims arising from misapplication of its products.
WARNING
• Read and understand this manual before installing, operating, or servicing this Drive. All warnings, cautions, and instructions must be followed. All activity must be performed by qualified personnel. The Drive must be installed according to this manual and local codes.
• Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on. Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on. Do not remove or insert the digital operator while power is on.
• Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50Vdc. To prevent electric shock, wait at least five minutes after all indicators are OFF and measure DC bus voltage level to confirm safe level.
• Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the unit. This equipment uses sensitive devices and may be damaged by high voltage.
WARNING
• The Drive is suitable for circuits capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical Amperes, 240Vac maximum (200V Class) and 480Vac maximum (400V Class). Install adequate branch circuit short circuit protection per applicable codes. Failure to do so may result in equipment damage and/or personal injury. Refer to Appendix E for further details.
• Do not connect unapproved LC or RC interference suppression filters, capacitors, or overvoltage protection devices to the output of the Drive. These devices may generate peak currents that exceed Drive specifications.
i
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
• To avoid unnecessary fault displays caused by contactors or output switches placed between Drive and motor, auxiliary contacts must be properly integrated into the control logic circuit.
• YASKAWA is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user; doing so will void the warranty. This product must not be modified.
• Verify that the rated voltage of the Drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying power.
• To meet CE directives, proper line filters and proper installation are required.
• Some drawings in this manual may be shown with protective covers or shields removed, to describe details. These must be replaced before operation.
• Observe electrostatic discharge procedures when handling circuit boards to prevent ESD damage.
• The equipment may start unexpectedly upon application of power. Clear all personnel from the Drive, motor, and machine area before applying power. Secure covers, couplings, shaft keys, and machine loads before energizing the Drive.
• Please do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts. The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings in this manual.
Intended Use
Drives are intended for installation in electrical systems or machinery.
The Drives are designed and manufactured in accordance with applicable UL and cUL standards, and CE directives.
For use in the European Union, the installation in machinery and systems must conform to the following product standards of the Low Voltage Directive:
EN 50178: 1997-10, Electronic Equipment for Use in Power Installations
EN 60201-1: 1997-12 Machine Safety and Equipping with Electrical Devices
Part 1: General Requirements (IEC 60204-1:1997)
EN 61010: 1997-11 Safety Requirements for Information Technology Equipment
(IEC 950:1991 + A1:1992 + A2:1993 + A3:1995 + A4:1996, modified)
The F7 series Drives comply with the provisions of the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC as amended by 93/68/EEC. These
Drives conform to the following standard: EN 50178: 1997-10.
Your supplier or Yaskawa representative must be contacted when using leakage current circuit breaker in conjunction with frequency inverters.
In certain systems it may be necessary to use additional monitoring and safety devices in compliance with the relevant safety and accident prevention regulations. The frequency inverter hardware must not be modified.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 ii
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Introduction
This section describes the applicability of the manual.
This manual is applicable to F7 Drives defined by model numbers of CIMR-F7 U F F F F . This manual reflects the Software
Version 3020.
The F7 Drive is a Pulse Width Modulated Drive for AC 3-Phase induction motors. This type of Drive is also known as an
Adjustable Frequency Drive, Variable Frequency Drive, AC Drive, AFD, ASD, VFD, VSD, and Inverter. In this manual, the
F7 Drive will be referred to as the “Drive”.
The LCD keypad/operator is equipped with local/remote functions, copy feature, 7 language choices, and 5 lines of display with 16 characters per line. User parameter settings can be recovered at any time via “user initialization” when enabled.
Optional Drive Wizard software allows upload/download, as well as graphing and monitoring of Drive parameters from a PC for ease of Drive management.
This manual may describe trademarked equipment, which is the property of other companies, who are the registered owners.
Other Documents and Manuals are available to support special use or installation of this product. These documents may be provided with the product or upon request. Contact Yaskawa Electric America, Inc. as required. Documents may include the following:
TM.F7.01…Manual included on CD ROM with product
TM.F7.02…Programming Manual included on CD ROM with product
DriveWizard...Software and Manual…Included on CD ROM with product
Option Instructions… Included on CD ROM with product
This manual is subject to change as product improvements occur. The latest version of the manual can be obtained from the
Yaskawa website: www.yaskawa.com. The date shown on the rear cover is changed when revisions are made. The latest version of Drive software is also shown.
The Drive’s capacity is categorized based on two types of load characteristics: Heavy Duty and Normal Duty. See Table i.1 below for the differences between Heavy Duty and Normal Duty.
Table i.1 Drive Duty Selection
Parameter
C6-01
0: Heavy Duty
(default)
Rated Output
Current
Standard rating
(varies by model*)
Overload
Capacity
150% for 1 min.
Current Limit
150%
Carrier
Frequency
Low
(2kHz**)
Maximum Output
Frequency
300Hz
2: Normal Duty
Extended rating
(varies by model*)
Approx. 110% for 1 min.
(varies by model*)
120%
High
(varies by model*)
400Hz
* See Drive Specifications
** Software version VSF103021 and higher allows the carrier frequency to be increased while in HD (C6-01=0). The continuous current and overload are automatically reduced to the levels indicated in Table 5.1.
This manual references the various Drive capacities according to its model number CIMR-F7 U F F F F . See Drive
Output Specifications Table i.2 and Table i.3 on the following pages for rated capacities and Drive specifications.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
iii
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
Drive Output Specifications
The standard Drive specifications are listed in the following tables.
Email: [email protected]
208-240Vac
Table i.2 208-240Vac Drive Specifications
208-240Vac 208-230Vac
Model Number CIMR-F7U 20P4 20P7 21P5 22P2 23P7 25P5 27P5 2011 2015 2018 2022 2030 2037 2045 2055 2075 2090 2110 *5
Rated output capacity (kVA)
Horsepower *2
1.2
0.5/0.75
1.6
1
2.7
2
3.7
3
5.7
5
8.8
7.5
12.0
10
17.0
15
22.0
20
27.0 32.0 44.0
25 30 40
55.0
50
69.0
60
82.0
75
110.0
100
130.0 140.0
125 150
Rated output current (A)
Overload capacity
*3
(% of rated output current for 60 sec.)
Current limit (% of rated output current)
Carrier frequency
*4
Maximum output frequency
Rated output capacity (kVA)
3.2
1.4
4.2
1.8
7.0
3.0
9.6
4.1
15.2
6.4
23.0
8.8
31.0
12.0
45.0
18.0
58.0
150
150
23.0
71
2kHz
300.0Hz
85.0 115.0 145.0 180.0
29.0 34.0 44.0
62.0
73.0
215
82.0
283.0
120.0
346.0 360.0
138
138
*3
*3
140.0 160.0
Horsepower
*2
Rated output current (A)
Overload capacity
*3
(% of rated output current for 60 sec.)
Current limit (% of rated output current)
Carrier frequency
(kHz)
*5
0.5/0.75
3.6
107
10
1
4.6
107
10
2
7.8
108
10
3
10.8
107
8
5
16.8
107
10
7.5
23.0
120
15
10
31.0
120
15
15
46.2
117
8
20
59.4
117
10
25 30 40 50/60 75
74.8 88.0 115.0 162.0 192.0
120
114
10
116
10
120
10
107
5
113
5
75
215
120
8
100/125
312.0
109
2
150 150
360.0 415.0
115
2
120
2
Maximum output frequency
400.0Hz
Maximum output voltage
3-phase; 200, 208, 220, 230, or 240Vac
(Proportional to input voltage)
*1 The difference between Heavy Duty ratings and the Normal Duty ratings for the Drive are the rated input and output current, overload capacity, carrier frequency, current limit, and maximum output frequency. Parameter C6-01 must be set to value of “0” for Heavy Duty ratings and “2” for Normal Duty ratings. Factory default is Heavy Duty (C6-01=0).
*2 Horsepower ratings are based on 230V or 460V NEC Table 430.150. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole motor. When selecting the actual motor and Drive, be sure that the Drive's rated output current is appropriate for the motor's rated current.
*3 Model 2110 has an overload rating of 138% of rated output current for 60 seconds and a current limit rating of 138%. Models 4220 and 4300 have an overload rating of 150% of rated output current for 45 seconds and a current limit rating of 150%.
*4 When setting the carrier frequency above the factory default, the Drive must be derated.
*5 Heavy Duty ratings for models 2110, 4220 and 4300 are effective in software version VSF103021 and higher.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 iv
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
480Vac
Table i.3 480Vac Drive Specifications
Model Number CIMR-F7U 40P4 40P7 41P5 42P2 43P7 44P0 45P5 47P5 4011 4015 4018 4022
Rated output capacity (kVA)
Horsepower
*2
Rated output current (A)
Overload capacity
*3
(% of rated output current for 60 sec.)
Current limit (% of rated output current)
Carrier frequency
*4
Maximum output frequency
Rated output capacity (kVA)
Horsepower
*2
Rated output current (A)
Overload capacity
*3
(% of rated output current for 60 sec.)
Current limit (% of rated output current)
Carrier frequency (kHz)
*5
Maximum output frequency
Maximum output voltage
1.4
0.5/0.75
1.8
1.4
0.5/0.75
1.8
120
15
1.6
1
2.1
1.6
1
2.1
120
15
2.8
1.5/2
3.7
2.8
1.5/2
3.7
120
15
4.0
3
5.3
4.0
3
5.3
120
15
5.8
5
7.6
5.8
5
7.6
120
15
6.6
-
8.7
6.6
-
8.7
300.0Hz
120
15
150
150
2kHz
120
400.0Hz
9.5
7.5
12.5
9.5
7.5
12.5
120
15
13.0
10
17.0
13.0
10
17.0
120
15
18.0
15
24.0
21.0
15/20
27.0
107
8
24.0
20
31.0
26.0
25
34.0
109
10
3-phase; 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480Vac (Proportional to input voltage)
30.0
25
39.0
30.0
30
40.0
117
10
34.0
30
45.0
38.0
30
50.4
107
10
Model Number CIMR-F7U 4030 4037 4045 4055 4075 4090 4110 4132 4160 4185 4220 4300
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Horsepower
*2
Rated output current (A)
46.0
40
60.0
57.0
50
75.0
69.0
60
91.0
85.0
75
112.0
110.0
100
150.0
140.0
125/150
180.0
160.0
-
216.0
200.0
200
260.0
230.0
250
304.0
280.0
300
370.0
315.0
350
414.0
450.0
500
590.0
Overload capacity
*3
(% of rated output current for 60 sec.)
Current limit (% of rated output current)
Carrier frequency *4
Maximum output frequency
Rated output capacity (kVA) 51.0
Horsepower *2 40/50
59.0
73.0
95.0
120.0
150
150
140.0
2kHz
300.0Hz
180.0
200.0
230.0
315.0
150
150
*3
*3
390.0
150
150
*3
*3
510.0
60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300/350 400/450 500+
Rated output current (A)
Overload capacity
*3
(% of rated output current for 60 sec.)
Current limit (% of rated output current)
Carrier frequency (kHz)
*5
Maximum output frequency
67.2
107
8
77.0
117
8
96.0
114
8
125.0
108
5
156.0
115
5
180.0
120
8
240.0
108
120
5
400.0Hz
260.0
120
5
304.0
120
5
414.0
107
2
515.0
118
2
675.0
120
2
Maximum output voltage 3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480Vac (Proportional to input voltage)
*1 The difference between Heavy Duty ratings and the Normal Duty ratings for the Drive are the rated input and output current, overload capacity, carrier frequency, current limit, and maximum output frequency. Parameter C6-01 must be set to value of “0” for Heavy Duty ratings and “2” for Normal Duty ratings. Factory default is Heavy Duty (C6-01=0).
*2 Horsepower ratings are based on 230V or 460V NEC Table 430.150. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole motor. When selecting the actual motor and Drive, be sure that the Drive's rated output current is appropriate for the motor's rated current.
*3 Model 2110 has an overload rating of 138% of rated output current for 60 seconds and a current limit rating of 138%. Models 4220 and 4300 have an overload rating of 150% of rated output current for 45 seconds and a current limit rating of 150%.
*4 When setting the carrier frequency above the factory default, the Drive must be derated.
*5 Heavy Duty ratings for models 2110, 4220 and 4300 are effective in software version VSF103021 and higher.
v
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Notes:
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 vi
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table of Contents
Warnings and Cautions..................................................................................... i
Introduction ..................................................................................................... iii
Table of Contents........................................................................................... vii
Chapter 1 - Physical Installation ...............................................................................1-1
F7 Model Number, Enclosure, Heat Loss, and Weight.................................1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery.........................................................................1-3
Component Names .......................................................................................1-5
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions ...............................................................1-7
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site ............................................1-11
Installation Orientation and Clearances ......................................................1-12
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover .............................................1-13
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover.........................1-14
Chapter 2 - Electrical Installation..............................................................................2-1
Terminal Block Configuration........................................................................2-2
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals .......................................................................2-3
Control Wiring .............................................................................................2-20
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) .........................................................2-26
Installing and Wiring Option Boards............................................................2-30
Chapter 3 - Digital Operator ......................................................................................3-1
Digital Operator Display ................................................................................3-2
Digital Operator Keys....................................................................................3-3
Drive Mode Indicators ...................................................................................3-4
Drive Main Menus .........................................................................................3-6
Quick Setting Menu (-QUICK-) ...................................................................3-11
Programming Menu (-ADV-) .......................................................................3-12
Example of Changing a Parameter.............................................................3-15
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Table of Contents vii
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Chapter 4 - Start-Up ................................................................................................... 4-1
Drive Start-Up Preparation ...........................................................................4-2
Drive Start-Up Procedures ...........................................................................4-5
Chapter 5 - Basic Programming ............................................................................... 5-1
Description of Parameter Tables ..................................................................5-2
Control Method .............................................................................................5-2
Speed Command Source .............................................................................5-3
Run Command Source .................................................................................5-4
Stopping Method ..........................................................................................5-5
Accel/Decel Time..........................................................................................5-8
Carrier Frequency.........................................................................................5-9
Preset Reference........................................................................................5-11
Input Voltage Setting ..................................................................................5-12
V/F Pattern .................................................................................................5-12
Motor Setup ................................................................................................5-20
PG Option...................................................................................................5-20
Analog Output Gain ....................................................................................5-21
Motor Overload Fault..................................................................................5-22
Stall Prevention ..........................................................................................5-23
Chapter 6 - Diagnostics & Troubleshooting ............................................................ 6-1
Fault Detection .............................................................................................6-2
Alarm Detection ..........................................................................................6-10
Operator Programming Errors (OPE) .........................................................6-15
Auto-Tuning Faults .....................................................................................6-17
Digital Operator COPY Function Faults......................................................6-19
Troubleshooting..........................................................................................6-20
Main Circuit Test Procedure .......................................................................6-28
Drive Date Stamp Information ................................................................... 6-31
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Table of Contents viii
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Chapter 7 - Maintenance............................................................................................7-1
Periodic Inspection........................................................................................7-2
Preventive Maintenance ...............................................................................7-3
Periodic Maintenance of Parts ......................................................................7-4
Heatsink Cooling Fan Replacement .............................................................7-5
Removing and Mounting the Terminal Card .................................................7-7
Appendix A - Parameters.......................................................................................... A-1
F7 Parameter List ........................................................................................ A-3
F7 Monitor List ........................................................................................... A-38
F7 Fault Trace List ..................................................................................... A-41
F7 Fault History List ................................................................................... A-41
Appendix B - Capacity Related Parameters............................................................ B-1
Drive Capacity Selection.............................................................................. B-2
Parameters Affected by Drive Capacity Setting........................................... B-3
Appendix C - Specifications..................................................................................... C-1
Standard Drive Specifications...................................................................... C-2
Appendix D - Communications ................................................................................ D-1
Using Modbus Communication .................................................................... D-2
Modbus Function Code Details.................................................................... D-8
Modbus Data Tables.................................................................................. D-10
Modbus Self-Diagnosis .............................................................................. D-18
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Table of Contents ix
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Appendix E - Peripheral Devices..............................................................................E-1
Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection .........................................................E-2
Branch Circuit Overload Protection ............................................................. E-5
Peripheral Devices .......................................................................................E-6
Appendix F - Spare Parts .......................................................................................... F-1
F7 Primary Spare Parts - 208/230/240Vac...................................................F-2
F7 Primary Spare Parts - 480Vac.................................................................F-3
Index...................................................................................................... Index-1
Support Services .................................................................... Inside rear cover
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Table of Contents x
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Chapter 1
Physical Installation
This chapter describes the requirements for receiving and installing the F7 Drive.
F7 Model Number, Enclosure, Heat Loss, and Weight ..... 1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery ............................................. 1-3
Component Names ........................................................... 1-5
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions ................................... 1-7
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site................. 1-11
Installation Orientation and Clearances .......................... 1-12
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover.................. 1-13
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover .............................................................. 1-14
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Physical Installation 1 - 1
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
F7 Model Number, Enclosure, Heat Loss, and Weight
Table 1.1 F7 Model Number and Enclosure Style
Input
Voltage
3-Phase
F7
Model Number
Enclosure Style
Weight lb (kg)
Heat Loss (watts)
Heatsink Internal Total
208-240Vac
208-230Vac
480 Vac
CIMR-F7U2090
CIMR-F7U2110
CIMR-F7U40P4
CIMR-F7U40P7
CIMR-F7U41P5
CIMR-F7U42P2
CIMR-F7U43P7
CIMR-F7U44P0
CIMR-F7U45P5
CIMR-F7U47P5
CIMR-F7U4011
CIMR-F7U4015
CIMR-F7U4018
CIMR-F7U4022
CIMR-F7U4030
CIMR-F7U4037
CIMR-F7U20P4
CIMR-F7U20P7
CIMR-F7U21P5
CIMR-F7U22P2
CIMR-F7U23P7
CIMR-F7U25P5
CIMR-F7U27P5
CIMR-F7U2011
CIMR-F7U2015
CIMR-F7U2018
CIMR-F7U2022
CIMR-F7U2030
CIMR-F7U2037
CIMR-F7U2045
CIMR-F7U2055
CIMR-F7U2075
CIMR-F7U4045
CIMR-F7U4055
CIMR-F7U4075
CIMR-F7U4090
CIMR-F7U4110
CIMR-F7U4132
CIMR-F7U4160
CIMR-F7U4185
CIMR-F7U4220
CIMR-F7U4300
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
Open Chassis (IP00)
Open Chassis (IP00)
Open Chassis (IP00)
Open Chassis (IP00)
Open Chassis (IP00)
Open Chassis (IP00)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
Open Chassis (IP00)
Open Chassis (IP00)
Open Chassis (IP00)
Open Chassis (IP00)
Open Chassis (IP00)
Open Chassis (IP00)
Open Chassis (IP00)
Open Chassis (IP00)
6.6 (3.0)
8.8 (4.0)
13.2 (6.0)
15.4 (7.0)
24.2 (11.0)
53 (24)
59 (27)
125 (57)
139 (63)
189 (86)
191 (87)
238 (108)
330 (150)
6.6 (3.0)
8.8 (4.0)
13.2 (6.0)
22 (10)
53 (24)
88 (40)
194 (88)
196 (89)
224 (102)
265 (120)
352 (160)
572 (259)
616 (279)
891 (404)
389
420
691
801
127
193
232
296
36
59
80
90
2194
2733
14
17
901
1204
1285
1614
1889
2388
2791
2636
3797
5838
416
472
583
883
1010
1228
1588
1956
110
164
219
357
19
26
48
68
201
233
298
332
81
114
158
169
48
56
68
70
964
1234
39
41
386
478
562
673
847
1005
1144
1328
1712
2482
421
499
619
844
182
208
252
333
74
84
113
168
39
42
50
59
208
307
390
465
590
653
989
1133
3158
3967
53
58
84
115
148
160
1287
1682
1847
2287
2736
3393
3935
3964
5509
8320
598
680
835
1216
1431
1727
2207
2800
184
248
332
525
58
68
98
127
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Physical Installation 1 - 2
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
Confirmations upon Delivery
Email: [email protected]
Receiving Checks
Check the following items as soon as the Drive is received.
Item
Has the correct model of Drive been delivered?
Is the Drive damaged in any way?
Are any screws or other components loose?
Table 1.2 Receiving Checks
Method
Check the model number on the nameplate on the right side of the Drive.
Reconcile with packing slip and/or order information.
Inspect the entire exterior of the Drive to see if there are any dents, scratches or other damage resulting from shipping.
Use a screwdriver or other tool to check for tightness.
If there are any irregularities in the above items, contact the shipping company, or the distributor / representative who sold the
Drive, or a Yaskawa office immediately.
Nameplate Information
A nameplate is attached to the right side of each Drive. The following nameplate is an example for a standard Drive.
Drive Model Number
Input Power Rating
Output Power Rating
Serial Number
UL File Number
Drive Spec Number
Weight
Software Number
Note: The Drive Model Number, Drive Spec Number, Software Number, and Serial Number are required to completely identify a Drive.
HD - Heavy Duty; ND - Normal Duty
Fig 1.1 F7 Drive Nameplate
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Physical Installation 1 - 3
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Drive Model Numbers
The model number on the nameplate indicates the design specification, voltage, and rating of the Drive in alphanumeric codes.
CIMR – F7 U 2 0 2 2
AC Drive
F7 Family
No.
U
Spec
UL Specification
Rating
No.
2
4
Voltage
3-phase, 208-240Vac
3-phase, 480Vac
Fig 1.2 Drive Model Number Structure
Drive Enclosure and Revision Code
The SPEC number on the nameplate indicates the voltage, Drive rating, enclosure type, and the revision code of the Drive in alphanumeric codes. The SPEC number for Drives that have custom features, i.e. CASE software, will have a SPEC number that indicates the custom features installed.
No.
2
4
Voltage
3-phase, 208 - 240Vac
3-phase, 480Vac
Rating
2 0 2 2 1 E
No.
0
1
Hardware Revision
Enclosure Type
Open chassis (IEC IP00)
NEMA Type 1 (IEC IP20)
Fig 1.3 SPEC Number Structure
TERMS
Open Chassis Type (IEC IP00)
Protected so that parts of the human body cannot reach electrically charged parts from the front when the
Drive is mounted in a control panel, also called protected chassis.
NEMA Type 1 (IEC IP20)
The Drive is shielded from the exterior, and can thus be mounted to the interior wall of a building
(not necessarily enclosed in a control panel). The protective structure conforms to the standards of NEMA 1 in the USA. All protective covers (Fig 1.4 and Fig 1.6) must be installed to conform with IEC IP20 and NEMA
Type 1 requirements.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Physical Installation 1 - 4
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Component Names
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Models CIMR-F7U20P4 thru 2018 and 40P4 thru 4018
The external appearance, component names, and terminal arrangement of the Drive are shown in Fig 1.4 and 1.5.
Top protective cover
[Required for NEMA Type 1 (IEC IP20)]
Front cover
Digital Operator
Terminal cover
Mounting hole
Die-cast Heat Sink
Nameplate
Bottom protective cover
Fig 1.4 Drive Appearance
{ Control circuit terminal
layout label
Cont rol circuit terminals
See Fig. 2.3 for actual terminal layout
Ground terminal
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
Fig 1.5 Terminal Arrangement (Terminal Cover Removed)
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Physical Installation 1 - 5
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Models CIMR-F7U2022 thru 2110 and 4030 thru 4300
The external appearance, component names, and terminal arrangement of the Drive are shown in Fig 1.6 and 1.7.
Fig 1.6 Drive Appearance
{ Control circuit terminal layout label
Control circuit terminals
See Fig. 2.3 for actual terminal layout
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
Fig 1.7 Terminal Arrangement (Terminal Cover Removed)
Ground terminal
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Physical Installation 1 - 6
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
DIMENSIONS: F7 (NEMA 1)
208-240V (F7U20P4-2018) 480V (F7U40P4-4018)
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Physical Installation 1 - 7
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Physical Installation 1 - 8
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Physical Installation 1 - 9
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Physical Installation 1 - 10
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site
Install the Drive as described below and maintain optimum conditions.
Installation Site
Install the Drive to a non-combustible surface under the following conditions in UL Pollution Degree 2 environments. This excludes wet locations where pollution may become conductive due to moisture, and locations containing conductive foreign matter.
Type
NEMA Type 1
Open Chassis
Table 1.3 Installation Site Specifications
Ambient Operating Temperature
14
°
F to 104
°
F (-10 to +40
°
C)
14
°
F to 113
°
F (-10 to +45
°
C)
95%
95% -
RH
RH -
or or -
-
Humidity less less -
(no
(no -
-
Plenum Rated condensation) Yes condensation) No
Protective covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Drive. It is recommended to remove the protective covers before operating a NEMA Type 1 Drive (Models CIMR-F7U2030/4055 and smaller) in a panel to obtain the 113
° (
45
°
C) ambient operating temperature.
Observe the following precautions when installing the Drive. Make sure to install:
• in a clean location which is free from oil mist and dust.
• in an environment where metal shavings, oil, water, or other foreign materials do not get into the Drive.
• in a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materials (e.g. wood).
• in a location free from harmful gases and liquids.
• in a location free from excessive vibration.
• in a location free from chlorides.
• in a location away from direct sunlight.
Controlling the Ambient Temperature
To enhance the reliability of operation, the Drive should be installed in an environment free from extreme temperature variation. If the Drive is installed in an enclosure, use a cooling fan or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 113
°
F (45
°
C
)
.
Protecting the Drive from Foreign Matter
During Drive installation and project construction, it is possible to have foreign matter such as metal shavings or wire clippings fall inside the Drive. To prevent foreign matter from falling into the Drive, place a temporary cover over the Drive.
Always remove the temporary cover from the Drive before start-up. Otherwise, ventilation will be reduced, causing the Drive to overheat.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Physical Installation 1 - 11
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Installation Orientation and Clearances
Install the Drive vertically so as not to reduce the cooling efficiency. When installing the Drive, always provide the following installation clearances to allow normal heat dissipation and air flow. Ensure that the heatsink is against a closed surface to avoid diverting cooling air around the heatsink.
1.97in *
1
(50mm) minimum
4.75in *
2
(120mm) minimum
Air
1.2in
(30.5mm) minimum
1.97in (50mm) minimum
1.2in
(30.5mm) minimum
4.75in (120mm) minimum
Air
Horizontal Clearance Vertical Clearance
*
1
For Drive models F7U2110, F7U4160, and F7U4220, this clearance dimension is 4.75in (120mm) minimum.
For Drive model F7U4300, this clearance dimension is 11.8in (300mm) minimum.
All other models require 1.97in (50mm) minimum.
*
2
For Drive model F7U4300, this clearance dimension is 11.8in (300mm) minimum. All other models require 4.75in (120mm) minimum.
Fig 1.8 Drive Installation Orientation and Clearance
IMPORTANT
1. The same clearance is required horizontally and vertically for both Open Chassis (IP00) and NEMA Type 1 Drives.
2. Always remove the top and bottom protection covers before installing a CIMR-F7U2018/
4018 and smaller Drive in a panel.
3. Always provide enough clearance for lifting eye bolts and the main circuit wiring when installing a CIMR-F7U2022/4030 and larger Drive in a panel.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Physical Installation 1 - 12
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover
Remove the terminal cover to connect cables to the control circuit and main circuit terminals.
Removing the Terminal Cover
Models CIMR-F7U20P4 thru 2018 and 40P4 thru 4018
Loosen the screw at the bottom of the terminal cover, press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the directions of arrows 1, and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.
1
2
1
Fig 1.9 Removing the Terminal Cover
Models CIMR-F7U2022 thru 2110 and 4030 thru 4300
Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover, pull down the terminal cover in the direction of arrow
1, and then lift up on the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 2.
1
2
Fig 1.10 Removing the Terminal Cover
Attaching the Terminal Cover
After wiring the terminal block, attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal procedure.
For Models CIMR-F7U2018/4018 and smaller, insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove on the Drive, and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it clicks into place.
For Drives CIMR-F7U2022/4030 and larger, insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove on the Drive, and secure the terminal cover by lifting it up toward the top of the Drive.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Physical Installation 1 - 13
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover
Models CIMR-F7U20P4 thru 2018 and 40P4 thru 4018
For Models CIMR-F7U2018/4018 and smaller, remove the terminal cover and then use the following procedures to remove the Digital Operator and front cover.
Removing the Digital Operator
Press on the side of the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock, then lift the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 to remove it as shown in Fig 1.11.
2
1
Fig 1.11 Removing the Digital Operator
Removing the Front Cover
Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the direction of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of cover in the direction of arrow
2 to remove it as shown in Fig 1.12.
1
2
1
Fig 1.12 Removing the Front Cover
Mounting the Front Cover
Mount the front cover to the Drive by performing the steps to remove the front cover in reverse order.
1. Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator attached as this may cause the Digital Operator to malfunction due to improper mating with its connector.
2. Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Drive and press the lower part of the front cover onto the Drive until it snaps into place.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Physical Installation 1 - 14
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Mounting the Digital Operator
After attaching the front cover, mount the Digital Operator onto the Drive using the following procedure:
1. Hook the Digital Operator at A (two locations) on the left side of the opening on the front cover by moving in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in the following illustration.
2. Press the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B (two locations).
1
2
A
B
Fig 1.13 Mounting the Digital Operator
IMPORTANT
1. Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator and do not mount or remove the front cover using methods other than those described above, or damage to the Digital Operator or Drive may occur.
2. Never attach the front cover to the Drive with the Digital Operator already attached. Damage to the Digital
Operator may occur. Always attach the front cover to the Drive first, and then attach the Digital Operator to the front cover.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Physical Installation 1 - 15
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Models CIMR-F7U2022 thru 2110 and 4030 thru 4300
For Models CIMR-F7U2022/4030 and larger, remove the terminal cover and then use the following procedures to remove the
Digital Operator and front cover.
Removing the Digital Operator
Use the same procedure for Models CIMR-F7U20P4 thru 2018 and 40P4 thru 4018.
Removing the Front Cover
Loosen all screws on the front cover. Lift up at the location labelled 1 at the top of the control circuit terminal card and move in the direction of arrow 2.
2
1
Fig 1.14 Removing the Front Cover
Mounting the Front Cover
Attach the front cover by reversing the procedure to remove it.
1. Confirm that the Digital Operator is not mounted on the front cover. If the cover is attached while the Digital Operator is mounted to it, the Digital Operator may malfunction due to improper mating with its connector.
2. Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Drive and press in on the cover until it clicks into place on the
Drive.
Mounting the Digital Operator
Use the same procedure for Models CIMR-F7U20P4 thru 2018 and 40P4 thru 4018.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Physical Installation 1 - 16
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Chapter 2
Electrical Installation
This chapter describes wiring terminals, main circuit terminal connections, main circuit terminal wiring specifications, control circuit terminals, and control circuit wiring specifications.
Terminal Block Configuration ............................................ 2-2
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals ........................................... 2-3
Control Wiring ................................................................. 2-20
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ............................. 2-26
Installing and Wiring Option Boards................................ 2-30
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 1
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
Terminal Block Configuration
The wiring terminals are shown in Fig 2.1, Fig 2.2 and Fig 2.3.
Email: [email protected]
Control circuit terminal layout label
Control circuit terminals
See Fig. 2.3 below for actual terminal layout
Ground terminal
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal Ground terminal
Fig 2.1 Terminal Configuration for Models CIMR-F7U2018/4018 and Smaller
Control circuit terminal layout label
Control circuit terminals
See Fig. 2.3 below for actual terminal layout
Charge indicator
Main circuit terminals
Ground terminal
Fig 2.2 Terminal Configuration for Models CIMR-F7U2022/4022 and Larger
Ground terminal
E(G)
SN SC SP A1 A2 +V AC -V A3 MP AC RP R+ R-
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 FM AC AM IG S+ S-
M5 M6 MA MB MC
M3 M4 M1 M2
Fig 2.3 Control Circuit Terminal Layout
E(G)
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 2
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Email: [email protected]
Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from Table 2.1 and Table 2.2. Refer to instruction manual TOE-C726-2 for
Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit wire sizes.
Drive Model
CIMR-F7U
20P4
Table 2.1 208-240Vac Wire Sizes and Connector Specifications
Terminal Symbol
Terminal
Screws
Clamping
Torque lb. in.
(N•m)
Possible Wire
Sizes AWG
(mm
2
)
*1
Recommended
Wire Size AWG
(mm
2
)
*2
T/L3, , 1, 2, B2
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4
10.6 to 13.2
(1.2 to 1.5)
14 to 10
(2 to 5.5)
14
(2)
Wire
Type
T/L3, , 1, 2, B2
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 20P7 M4
10.6 to 13.2
(1.2 to 1.5)
14 to 10
(2 to 5.5)
14
(2)
T/L3, , 1, 2, B2
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 21P5 M4
10.6 to 13.2
(1.2 to 1.5)
14 to 10
(2 to 5.5)
14
(2)
T/L3, , 1, 2, B2
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 22P2 M4
10.6 to 13.2
(1.2 to 1.5)
14 to 10
(2 to 5.5)
14
(2)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 23P7 M4
10.6 to 13.2
(1.2 to 1.5)
12 to 10
(3.5 to 5.5)
12
(3.5)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 25P5 M4
10.6 to 13.2
(1.2 to 1.5)
12 to 10
(3.5 to 5.5)
10
(5.5)
27P5
2011
2015
2018
2022
2030
T/L3, , 1, 2, B2
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
T/L3, , 1, 2, B2
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M5
M5
21.99
(2.5)
21.99
(2.5)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
2
M6
35.2 to 43.99
(4.0 to 5.0)
B1, B2 M5
M6
21.99
(2.5)
35.2 to 43.99
(4.0 to 5.0)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
2
M8
79.2 to 87.97
(9.0 to 10.0)
B1, B2 M5
M6
21.99
(2.5)
35.2 to 43.99
(4.0 to 5.0)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M8
79.2 to 87.97
(9.0 to 10.0)
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
M6
M8
M8
M6
M8
35.2 to 43.99
(4.0 to 5.0)
79.2 to 87.97
(9.0 to 10.0)
79.2 to 87.97
(9.0 to 10.0)
35.2 to 43.99
(4.0 to 5.0)
79.2 to 87.97
(9.0 to 10.0)
Electrical Installation 2 - 3
8 to 6
(8 to 14)
6 to 4
(14 to 22)
4 to 2
(22 to 38)
8 to 6
(8 to 14)
4
(22)
3 to 2
(30 to 38)
8 to 6
(8 to 14)
4
(22)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
8
(8)
4
(22)
6
(14)
3
(30)
4
(22)
Application
Dependent
4
(22)
2
(38)
3
(30)
Application
Dependent
4
(22)
1
(50)
2
(38)
Application
Dependent
4
(22)
1/0
(60)
Application
Dependent
4
(22)
600Vac
UL Approved vinyl-sheathed
or equivalent
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table 2.1 208-240Vac Wire Sizes and Connector Specifications (Continued)
Drive Model
CIMR-F7U
Terminal Symbol
Terminal
Screws
Clamping
Torque lb. in.
(N•m)
Possible Wire
Sizes AWG
(mm
2
)
*1
Recommended
Wire Size AWG
(mm
2
)
*2
Wire
Type
2037
2045
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/
3 l
1, s
/ l
2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 r/
3 l
1, s
/ l
2
M10
M8
M10
M4
M10
M8
M10
M4
154.8 to 197.9
(17.6 to 22.5)
77.4 to 95.0
(8.8 to 10.8)
154.8 to 197.9
(17.6 to 22.5)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
154.8 to 197.9
(17.6 to 22.5)
77.4 to 95.0
(8.8 to 10.8)
154.8 to 197.9
(17.6 to 22.5)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
4/0
(100)
Application
Dependent
2
(38)
16
(1.25)
300
(150)
250
(125)
Application
Dependent
1
(50)
16
(1.25)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M10
154.8 to 197.9
(17.6 to 22.5)
N/A
1/0 X 2P
(60 X 2P)
2055
2075
2090
2110 r/
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 r/
, 1
3 l
1, s
/ l
2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 r/
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 r/
3 l
1, s
/ l
2
3 l
1, s
/ l
2
3 l
1, s
/ l
2
M8
M10
M4
M10
M12
M8
M12
M4
M12
M8
M12
M4
M12
M8
M12
M4
77.4 to 95.0
(8.8 to 10.8)
154.8 to 197.9
(17.6 to 22.5)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
154.8 to 197.9
(17.6 to 22.5)
276.2 to 344.8
(31.4 to 39.2)
77.4 to 95.0
(8.8 to 10.8)
276.2 to 344.8
(31.4 to 39.2)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
276.2 to 344.8
(31.4 to 39.2)
77.4 to 95.0
(8.8 to 10.8)
276.2 to 344.8
(31.4 to 39.2)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
276.2 to 344.8
(31.4 to 39.2)
77.4 to 95.0
(8.8 to 10.8)
276.2 to 344.8
(31.4 to 39.2)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
3/0
(80)
16
(1.25)
250 X 2P
(125 X 2P)
4/0 X 2P
(100 X 2P)
Application
Dependent
2/0 X 2P
(70 X 2P)
16
(1.25)
350 X 2P
(200 X 2P)
Application
Dependent
1/0
(60)
16
(1.25)
4/0 X 2P
(100 X 2P)
3/0 X 2P
(80 X 2P)
3/0 X 2P
(80 X 2P)
Application
Dependent
300 X 2P
(150 X 2P)
Application
Dependent
300 X 2P
(150 X 2P)
16
(1.25)
600Vac
UL Approved vinyl-sheathed
or equivalent
*1 Wire size range provided for Drives using insulated screw-type terminal blocks. All other models require the use of UL listed connectors. Refer to Table 2.3.
*2 Recommended wire sizes are based on the normal duty (ND) current ratings and NEC Article 310 Table 310.16, 75 degree Celsius copper or equivalent.
When sizing wiring based on the heavy duty (HD) current ratings, consult NEC Article 430 and any other applicable codes.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 4
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Drive Model
CIMR-F7U
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P7
44P0
45P5
47P5
4011
4015
4018
4022
Table 2.2 480Vac Wire Sizes and Connector Specifications
Terminal Symbol
Terminal
Screws
Clamping
Torque lb. in.
(N•m)
Possible Wire
Sizes AWG
(mm
2
)
*
1
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4
10.6 to 13.2
(1.2 to 1.5)
14 to 10
(2 to 5.5)
Recommended
Wire Size AWG
(mm
2
)
*2
14
(2)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
10.6 to 13.2
(1.2 to 1.5)
14 to 10
(2 to 5.5)
14
(2)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
10.6 to 13.2
(1.2 to 1.5)
14 to 10
(2 to 5.5)
14
(2)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4
10.6 to 13.2
(1.2 to 1.5)
14 to 10
(2 to 5.5)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
10.6 to 13.2
(1.2 to 1.5)
14 to 10
(2 to 5.5)
14
(2)
12
(3.5)
14
(2)
Wire Type
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
2,B1, B2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, ,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
1, 2
B1, B2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, R1/L11, S1/L21,
T1/L31
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
M4
M5
M6
M5
M6
M5
M5
M6
M6
M8
10.6 to 13.2
(1.2 to 1.5)
12 to 10
(3.5 to 5.5)
15.6
(1.8)
21.99
(2.5)
14 to 10
(2 to 5.5)
10
(5.5)
12 to 10
(3.5 to 5.5)
10 to 6
(5.5 to 14)
21.99
(2.5)
21.99
(2.5)
35.2 to 43.99
(4.0 to 5.0)
35.2 to 43.99
(4.0 to 5.0)
21.99
(2.5)
35.2 to 43.99
(4.0 to 5.0)
35.2 to 43.99
(4.0 to 5.0)
79.2 to 87.97
(9.0 to 10.0)
8 to 6
(8 to 14)
10 to 6
(5.5 to 14)
8 to 2
(8 to 38)
8
(8)
8 to 4
(8 to 22)
N/A
N/A
12
(3.5)
14
(2)
10
(5.5)
12
(3.5)
8
(8)
10
(5.5)
8
(8)
10
(5.5)
4
(22)
6
(14)
6
(14)
8
(8)
8
(8)
6
(14)
8
(8)
600Vac
UL Approved vinyl-sheathed
or equivalent
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 5
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Drive Model
CIMR-F7U
4030
4037
4045
4055
4075
4090
4110
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33 r/
Table 2.2 480Vac Wire Sizes and Connector Specifications (Continued)
Terminal Symbol
Terminal
Screws
Clamping
Torque lb. in.
(N•m)
Possible Wire
Sizes AWG
(mm
2
)
*
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 l
1, s
200/ l
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 l
1, s
200/ l
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 l
1, s
200/ l
T1/L31
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
200, s
400/ l
3
200, s
400/ l
3
200, s
400/ l
2
400
2
400
2
400
M6
M8
M8
M6
M8
M8
M6
M8
M8
M6
M8
M10
M8
M10
M4
M10
M8
M10
M4
M10
M8
M12
M4
35.2 to 43.99
(4.0 to 5.0)
79.2 to 87.97
(9.0 to 10.0)
79.2 to 87.97
(9.0 to 10.0)
35.2 to 43.99
(4.0 to 5.0)
79.2 to 87.97
(9.0 to 10.0)
79.2 to 87.97
(9.0 to 10.0)
35.2 to 43.99
(4.0 to 5.0)
79.2 to 87.97
(9.0 to 10.0)
79.2 to 87.97
(9.0 to 10.0)
35.2 to 43.99
(4.0 to 5.0)
79.2 to 87.97
(9.0 to 10.0)
154.8 to 197.5
(17.6 to 22.5)
77.4 to 95.0
(8.8 to 10.8)
154.8 to 197.5
(17.6 to 22.5)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
154.8 to 197.5
(17.6 to 22.5)
77.4 to 95.0
(8.8 to 10.8)
154.8 to 197.5
(17.6 to 22.5)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
154.8 to 197.5
(17.6 to 22.5)
77.4 to 95.0
(8.8 to 10.8)
276.2 to 344.8
(31.4 to 39.2)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Recommended
Wire Size AWG
(mm
2
)
*2
3
(30)
4
(22)
4
(22)
2
(38)
3
(30)
Application
Dependent
4
(22)
1/0
(60)
1
(50)
Application
Dependent
4
(22)
2/0
(70)
Application
Dependent
4
(22)
4/0
(100)
3/0
(80)
Application
Dependent
2
(38)
16
(1.25)
250
(125)
4/0
(100)
Application
Dependent
1
(50)
16
(1.25)
2/0
×
2P
(70
×
2P)
1/0
×
2P
(60
×
2P)
Application
Dependent
2/0
(70)
16
(1.25)
Wire Type
600Vac
UL Approved vinyl-sheathed
or equivalent
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 6
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table 2.2 480Vac Wire Sizes and Connector Specifications (Continued)
Drive Model
CIMR-F7U
4132
4160
4185
4220
4300
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33 r/
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33 r/
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33 r/
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33 r/
Terminal Symbol
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
3 l
1, s
200/ l
2
200, s
400/ l
2
400
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
3 l
1, s
200/ l
2
200, s
400/ l
2
400
, 1
3 l
1, s
200/ l
2
200, s
400/ l
2
400
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
, 1
3 l
1, s
200/ l
2
200, s
400/ l
2
400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
, 1
3
Terminal
Screws
M10
M8
M12
M4
M12
M8
M12
M4
M16
M4
M16
M4
M16
Clamping
Torque lb. in.
(N•m)
154.8 to 197.5
(17.6 to 22.5)
77.4 to 95.0
(8.8 to 10.8)
276.2 to 344.8
(31.4 to 39.2)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
276.2 to 344.8
(31.4 to 39.2)
77.4 to 95.0
(8.8 to 10.8)
276.2 to 344.8
(31.4 to 39.2)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
693.9 to 867.4
(78.4 to 98.0)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
693.9 to 867.4
(78.4 to 98.0)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
693.9 to 867.4
(78.4 to 98.0)
Possible Wire
Sizes AWG
(mm
2
)
*
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
300 x 2P
(150 x 2P)
600 X 2P
(325 X 2P)
Application
Dependent
3/0 x 2P
(80 x 2P)
16
(1.25)
500 x 2P
(325 x 2P)
400 x 2P
(200 x 2P)
250 X 4P
(125 X 4P)
Recommended
Wire Size AWG
(mm
2
)
*2
3/0
×
2P
(80
×
2P)
2/0
×
2P
(70
×
2P)
Application
Dependent
4/0
(100)
16
(1.25)
4/0
×
2P
(100
×
2P)
3/0
×
2P
(80
×
2P)
Application
Dependent
1/0
×
2P
(60
×
2P)
16
(1.25)
Application
Dependent
250 x 2P
(125 x 2P)
16
(1.25)
250 x 4P
(125 x 4P)
4/0 x 4P
(100 x 4P)
400 X 4P
(200 X 4P)
Application
Dependent
400 x 2P
(203 x 2P)
Wire Type
600Vac
UL Approved vinyl-sheathed
or equivalent r/ l
1, s
200/ l
2
200, s
400/ l
2
400 M4
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
N/A
16
(1.25)
*1 Wire size range provided for Drives using insulated screw-type terminal blocks. All other models require the use of UL listed connectors. Refer to Table 2.3.
*2 Recommended wire sizes are based on the normal duty (ND) current ratings and NEC Article 310 Table 310.16, 75 Degree Celsius copper or equivalent. When sizing wiring based on the heavy duty (HD) current ratings, consult NEC Article 430 and any other applicable codes.
IMPORTANT
Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated voltage. Line voltage drop is calculated as follows:
Line voltage drop (V) = 3 x wire resistance (
Ω
/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10
-3
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 7
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
The use of UL listed closed-loop connectors or CSA certified ring connectors sized for the selected wire gauge is recommended to maintain proper clearances when wiring the Drive. Install connectors per manufacturer recommendation using the correct crimp tool. Table 2.3 lists a suitable closed-loop connector manufactured by JST Corporation.
Table 2.3 Recommended Connectors for Terminal Connections
AWG
Wire Size * mm
2
Terminal Screw
20
18
16
14
12 / 10
8
6
4
3 / 2
1 / 1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
250 / 300MCM
400MCM
650MCM
0.5
0.75
1.25
2
3.5 / 5.5
8
14
22
30 / 38
50 / 60
70
80
100
125 / 150
200
325
* Wire sizes are based on 75 degrees Celsius copper wire.
** Equivalent connector can be used.
M8
M8
M10
M8
M5
M6
M8
M6
M8
M5
M6
M8
M6
M8
M5
M6
M4
M3.5
M4
M5
M6
M8
M4
M5
M3.5
M4
M3.5
M4
M3.5
M10
M10
M16
M10
M12
M16
M10
M12
M16
M12
M12 x 2
M16
Ring Tongue (R-Type) Closed-Loop Connectors (Lugs)
JST Corporation Part Numbers **
22 - 5
22 - 6
22 - 8
38 - 6
38 - 8
60 - 8
60 - 10
70 - 8
5.5 - 6
5.5 - 8
8 - 5
8 - 6
8 - 8
14 - 5
14 - 6
14 - 8
1.25 - 3.7
1.25 - 4
1.25 - 3.7
1.25 - 4
1.25 - 3.7
1.25 - 4
2 - 3.7
2 - 4
2 - 5
2 - 6
2 - 8
5.5 - 4
5.5 - 5
70 - 10
80 - 10
80 - 16
100 - 10
100 - 12
100 - 16
150 - 10
150 - 12
150 - 16
200 - 12
325 - 12
325 - 16
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 8
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in Table 2.4. Wire the terminals correctly for the desired purpose.
Purpose
Main circuit power input
Drive outputs
DC power input
Braking Resistor
Unit Connection
Braking Transistor
Unit Connection
DC link choke connection
Ground
Table 2.4 Main Circuit Terminal Functions (208-240Vac and 480Vac)
Model: CIMR-F7U FF F F
Terminal Designation
208-240Vac 480Vac
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
20P4 to 2110
2022 to 2110
20P4 to 2110
40P4 to 4300
4030 to 4300
40P4 to 4300
1,
20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300
B1, B2
3,
1, 2
20P4 to 2018
2022 to 2110
20P4 to 2018
20P4 to 2110
40P4 to 4018
4022 to 4300
40P4 to 4018
40P4 to 4300
Main Circuit Configurations 208-240Vac
The 208-240Vac main circuit configurations of the Drive are shown in Table 2.5.
Table 2.5 Drive Main Circuit Configurations
208-240Vac
CIMR-F7U20P4 to 2018 CIMR-F7U2022 and 2030
* 1
{
*1, 2
{
Power supply
Control circuits
Power supply
Control circuits
CIMR-F7U2037 to 2110
*1, 2
{
-
Power supply
Control circuits
*1 Input fuses or molded case circuit breakers are required for proper branch circuit protection for all Drives. Failure to use recommended fuses/circuit breakers (See Appendix E) may result in damage to the Drive and/or personal injury.
*2 Consult your Yaskawa representative before using 12-pulse rectification circuit configuration.
Electrical Installation 2 - 9
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Main Circuit Configurations 480Vac
The 480Vac main circuit configurations of the Drive are shown in Table 2.6.
Table 2.6 Drive Main Circuit Configurations
480Vac
CIMR-F7U40P4 to 4018 CIMR-F7U4022 to 4055
* 1
{
*1, 2
{
Power supply
Control circuits
Power supply
Control circuits
CIMR-F7U4075 to 4300
3
*1, 2
{
-
Power supply
Control circuits
*1 Input fuses or molded case circuit breakers are required for proper branch circuit protection for all Drives. Failure to use recommended fuses/circuit breakers (See Appendix E) may result in damage to the Drive and/or personal injury.
*2 Consult your Yaskawa representative before using 12-pulse rectification circuit configuration.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 10
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Cable Length between Drive and Motor
The F7 should be installed as close as possible to the motor to minimize the length of the load side power cable needed between the Drive and motor.
If the cable between the Drive and the motor is long, the high-frequency leakage current will increase, causing the Drive output current to increase as well. This may affect peripheral devices. To prevent this, reduce cable length, or if necessary, adjust the carrier frequency (set in parameter C6-02) as shown in Table 2.7.
The line side power cables, load side power cables and control wiring should be run in seperate conduit. Careful attention to this recommended design practice will avoid many potential motor and Drive related problems.
Motor Cable Length
Carrier Frequency
Table 2.7 Motor Cable Length vs. Carrier Frequency
164 ft. (50m) maximum 328 ft. (100m) maximum
15kHz maximum 10kHz maximum
More than 328 ft.(100m)
5kHz maximum
Ground Wiring
Observe the following precautions when connecting the ground wire:
1. 208-240Vac Drives should have a ground connection with resistance of less than 100
Ω
.
2. 480Vac Drives should have a ground connection with resistance of less than 10
Ω
.
3. Do not share the ground wire with other devices, such as welding machines or large-current electrical equipment.
4. Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire. Leakage current flows through the Drive. Therefore, if the distance between the ground rod and the ground terminal is too long, potential on the ground terminal of the Drive could develop.
5. When using more than one Drive, be careful not to loop the ground wire. See Fig 2.4.
OK NOT OK
Fig 2.4 Ground Wiring Examples
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 11
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Dynamic Braking Connections
General
Dynamic braking (DB) enables the motor to be brought to a smooth and rapid stop. This is achieved by dissipating the regenerative energy of the AC motor across the resistive components of the Dynamic Braking option. For further details on dynamic braking operation, see the instruction sheet shipped with dynamic braking components.
Drives F7U20P4 thru F7U2018 and F7U40P4 thru F7U4018 have an integral braking transistor and require the addition of a
Remote Mounted Resistor Unit or a Heat Sink Mount Resistor (ERF). All higher rated Drives require the use of a Braking
Transistor Unit (CDBR) and a Remote Mount Resistor Unit.
Remote Mount Resistor Units typically mount outside of the electrical enclosure. Braking Transistor Units mount inside of the electrical enclosure. Heat Sink Mount Resistors mount to the back of the Drive, attaching directly to the heat sink.
Drive
Rated
Input
Vac
Drive Model
No. F7U
208-240
480
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P7
Table 2.8 Heat Sink Mount Dynamic Braking Resistor - 3% Duty Cycle
Heat Sink Mount Resistor
Part No.
Qty.
Reqd.
Resistance
(Ohms)
Power
(Watts)
Approx.
Braking
Torque
(%)
R7505 1 200 150 220
R7505 1 200 150 125
Dimensions (Inches)
Height
7.16
7.16
Width
1.73
1.73
Depth
0.51
0.51
R7504 1 100 150 125 7.16
1.73
0.51
R7503
R7510
R7508
R7508
R7507
R7506
R7505
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
70
62
750
750
400
300
200
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
120
100
230
130
125
115
110
7.16
7.16
7.16
7.16
7.16
7.16
7.16
1.73
1.73
1.73
1.73
1.73
1.73
1.73
0.51
0.51
0.51
0.51
0.51
0.51
0.51
Installation
This option should only be installed by a technically qualified individual who is familiar with this type of equipment and the hazards involved.
WARNING
Hazardous voltages can cause severe injury or death. Lock all power sources feeding the Drive in the “OFF” position.
Failure to follow these installation steps may cause equipment damage or personal injury.
Preliminary Procedures
1. Disconnect all electrical power to the Drive.
2. Remove Drive front cover.
3. Use a voltmeter to verify that voltage is disconnected from incoming power terminals and that the DC bus has dissipated.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 12
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Heat Sink Mount Resistor Installation
1. Remove the Drive from its mounting for access to the rear of the heat sink.
2. Attach the Heat Sink Mount Resistor on the back of the Drive’s heat sink with screws M4 x 10mm (0.7mm pitch), as shown in figure below.
3. Remove the rubber plug and run the braking resistor wires into the hole that leads to the terminal block.
4. Reinstall the Drive in its mounting position.
5. Connect the leads from the Heat Sink Mount Resistor to the Drive terminals B1 and B2.
6. Proceed to “Adjustments” section on page 2-18.
Fig 2.5 Attaching Heat Sink Mount Resistor on Heat Sink
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 13
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Remote Mount Resistor Unit Installation Using Internal Braking Transistor
(for F7U20P4 thru F7U2018 and F7U40P4 thru F7U4018)
Since the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generates heat during dynamic braking operation, install it in a location away from other equipment.
1. Install the Remote Mount Resistor Unit to a noncombustible surface, maintaining a minimum 1.97 inches (50mm) clearance on each side and a minimum 7.87 inches (200mm) clearance on top.
2. Remove the Remote Mount Resistor Unit cover to access its terminal block. Connect the Remote Mount Resistor Unit to the Drive and to external control circuitry according to the figure below.
Table 2.9 Wire Size for Remote Mount Resistor Unit
B, P, R1, R2 Terminals 1, 2*
Wire Size (AWG)
Wire Type
Terminal Screw
12-10
600V Ethylene propylene rubber insulated, or equivalent
M4
18-14*
* Power Leads for the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generate high levels of electrical noise - these signal leads must be grouped separately.
S3 SN
‡
IM
3% DUTY CYCLE
RESISTOR ASSEM-
(R2)*
(R1)*
120 VAC
* Terminal markings in parentheses are for resistors manufactured by
Powerohm Resistors Inc.
‡ Applies when SC is jumpered to SP and S3 is programmed as External
Fault.
Fig 2.6 Wiring Remote Mount Resistor Unit (for F7U20P4 thru F7U2018 and F7U40P4 thru F7U4018)
3. Reinstall and secure Remote Mount Resistor Unit cover and Drive front cover.
4. Proceed to “Adjustments” section on Page 2-18.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 14
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Braking Transistor Unit(s) and Remote Mount Resistor Unit(s) Installation
(for F7U2022 thru F7U2110 and F7U4022 thru F7U4300)
Since the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generates heat during dynamic braking operation, install it to a noncombustible surface in a location away from other equipment.
Select mounting locations for Braking Transistor Unit(s) and Remote Mount Resistor Unit(s) so that wiring between the Drive and the Braking Transistor Unit is 16 feet (5m) or less, and the wiring between each Braking Transistor Unit and its associated
Remote Mount Resistor Unit, is less than 33 feet (10m).
1. Mount the Braking Transistor Unit(s) on a vertical surface. The Braking Transistor Unit requires a minimum of 1.18 inches
(30mm) clearance on each side and a minimum 3.94 inches (100mm) clearance top and bottom. Attach the Remote Mount
Resistor Unit maintaining a minimum 1.97 inches (50mm) clearance on each side and a minimum 7.87 inches (200mm) clearance on top.
2. In each Braking Transistor Unit, set the nominal line voltage jumper plug to the correct setting for the installation; this is factory set at the 220V/440V/575V position. To access jumper plugs, remove the plastic cover.
WARNING
• Be sure to set the nominal line voltage selection jumper to match the level of the AC supply being applied to the Drive.
• Failure to do so may result in improper operation.
3. If multiple Braking Transistor Units are being installed, the unit closest to the Drive should have the Slave/Master jumper plug set to the “Master” position (factory setting); all others must have this jumper plug set to the “Slave” position.
4. If a single Braking Transistor Unit and Remote Mount Resistor Unit are being installed, connect them to the Drive and external control circuitry according to the chart below and Fig 2.7.
5. Power leads for the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generate high levels of electrical noise - these power leads must be grouped separately from all other leads.
Name
Table 2.10 Wire Size for Remote Mount Resistor Unit and Braking Transistor Unit
Circuit Terminals Wire Size AWG (mm
2
) Wire Type
Braking Transistor Unit
(Models CDBR-2015B,
-2022B, -4030B, -4045B)
Braking Transistor Unit
(Model CDBR-2045, -4090)
Braking Transistor Unit
(Model CDBR-2110)
Main
Control
Main
Control
Main
Control
0
0
1 2 3
4 5 6
P, Po, N, B
1 2 3
4 5 6
P, Po, N, B
r
s
1 2 3
4 5 6
12-10 (3.5-5.5)
18-14 (0.75-2)
12-10 (3.5-5.5)
18-14 (0.75-2)
4 (22)
8-6 (8-14) *1
12-10 (3.5-5.5)
18-14 (0.75-2)
Braking Transistor Unit
(Model CDBR-4220)
Main
Control
P, Po, N, B
r
s
1 2 3
4 5 6
4 (22)
8-6 (8-14) *1
12-10 (3.5-5.5)
18-14 (0.75-2)
Braking Resistor Unit
(Model LKEBF )
Main B P 12-10 (3.5-5.5)
Control 1 2 18-14 (0.75-2)
*1 For wire size of 8-6 (8-14), use UL1283 heat-resistant vinyl-insulated wire or equivalent.
*2 M4 for Models LKEB-20P7 to -27P5 or -40P7 to -4015.
M5 for Models LKEB-2011 to -2022 or -4018 to -4045.
600V vinyl sheathed wire
or equivalent
600V vinyl sheathed wire
or equivalent
600V vinyl sheathed wire
or equivalent
600V vinyl sheathed wire
or equivalent
Terminal Screw
M4
M5
M4
M6
M4
M6
M4
600V vinyl sheathed wire
or equivalent
M4
(M5) *2
M4
Electrical Installation 2 - 15
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
IM
S3 SN
‡
0 0
R1 R2
REMOTE
MOUNT
RESISTOR
UNIT
‡
Applies when SC is jumpered to
SP and S3 is programmed as
External Fault.
Fig 2.7 Wiring Single Braking Transistor Unit and Remote Mount Resistor Unit to Drive
(F7U2022 thru F7U2110 and F7U4022 thru F7U4300)
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 16
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
6. If two or more Braking Transistor Units and Remote Mount Resistor Units are being installed, connect them to the Drive and to external circuitry according to Fig 2.8.
IM
S3 SN
‡
R1 R2
0
0
0 0
R2
0
R1
0
0
0
R1 R2
0
0
R1 R2
R1 R2
0
0
‡
Applies when SC is jumpered to SP and
S3 is programmed as External Fault.
Note: Connect only the number of braking transistor units and remote mount resistor units required for the application.
Fig 2.8 Wiring Multiple Braking Transistor Units and Remote Mount Resistor Units to Drive
(F7U2022 thru F7U2110 and F7U4022 thru F7U4300)
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 17
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Adjustments
7. All Drives: Program Parameter L3-04 to “0” or “3” to disable stall prevention during deceleration.
8. Heat Sink Mount Resistor Only: Program L8-01 to “1” to enable overheat protection for heat sink mount braking resistor.
Operation Check
9. During dynamic braking, verify that the “BRAKE” lamp inside the Braking Unit is lit. This lamp illuminates only when dynamic braking is activating (during quick deceleration).
10.During dynamic braking, ensure that the required deceleration characteristic is obtained. If not, contact Yaskawa for assistance.
11.Reinstall and secure covers on the Braking Transistor Units, Remote Mount Resistor Units, and the Drive.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 18
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Terminal Connections
Connections to Drive terminals are shown in Fig 2.9.
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Digital Inputs 1-2
24Vdc, 8mA
2-Wire
Control
Multi-function
Digital Inputs 3-8
24Vdc, 8mA
External Fault
Fault Reset
Multi-Step Ref 1
Multi-Step Ref 2
Jog Reference
Baseblock
3-Wire Control
Fig 2.9 Terminal Connections
SN
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 19
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Control Wiring
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Control Circuit Terminal Functions
The factory default functions of the control circuit terminals for 2-wire control are shown in Table 2.11.
Type
Digital
Input
Signals
Analog
Input
Signals
Digital
Output
Signals
No.
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
SN
SC
SP
+V
M4
M5
M6
MA
MB
MC
-V
A1
A2
A3
AC
E(G)
M1
M2
M3
Default Function
Table 2.11 Control Circuit Terminals
Description
Forward run/stop command
Reverse run/stop command
External fault input
Fault reset
Multi-step speed reference 1
(Master/auxiliary switch)
Forward run when CLOSED; stopped when OFF.
Reverse run when CLOSED; stopped when OFF.
Fault when CLOSED.
Reset when CLOSED.
Multi-step speed reference 2
Jog frequency reference
External baseblock N.O.
Auxiliary frequency reference when CLOSED.
Multi-step setting 2 when
CLOSED.
Jog frequency when CLOSED.
Shuts off Drive’s output when
CLOSED.
Multi-function digital inputs.
Functions set by
H1-01 to H1-06.
Digital input supply common
Digital input photocoupler
Digital input supply +24Vdc
Refer to Table 2.15 for connection details.
Signal Level
24Vdc, 8mA
Photocoupler isolation
+15Vdc power output
-15Vdc power output
Analog input or speed command
+15Vdc power supply for analog inputs or transmitters.
-15Vdc power supply for analog inputs or transmitters.
+15Vdc
(Max. current: 20mA)
-15Vdc
(Max. current: 20mA)
0 to +10V(20k
Ω
)
Add to terminal A1
Aux. frequency reference 1
0 to +10Vdc/100%
0 to +/-10Vdc / 100% (H3-01)
4 to 20mA/100%
0 to +10Vdc / 100% (H3-08)
Multi-function analog input 2.
Function set by
H3-09.
0 to +10Vdc/100%
0 to +/-10Vdc / 100% (H3-04)
Multi-function analog input 3.
Function set by
H3-05
–
4 to 20mA(250
0 to +/-10V(20k
0 to +/-10V(20k
–
Ω
Ω
Ω
)
)
)
Analog common
Shield wire, optional ground line connection point
– –
During run
(N.O. contact)
Zero Speed
(N.O. contact)
Frequency agree
(N.O. contact)
CLOSED during operation.
CLOSED when below minimum frequency.
CLOSED when set frequency matches output frequency.
Multi-function digital output.
Function set by
H2-01.
Multi-function digital output.
Function set by
H2-02.
Multi-function digital output.
Function set by
H2-03.
Form A
Dry contacts capacity:
1A max. at 250Vac
1A max. at 30Vdc
Fault output signal
(SPDT)
MA/MC: CLOSED during fault condition
MB/MC: OPEN during fault condition
Form C
Dry contacts capacity:
1A max. at 250Vac
1A max. at 30Vdc
Electrical Installation 2 - 20
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Type No.
FM
Analog
Output
Signals AM
AC
Pulse I/O
RP
RS-485/
422
MP
R+
R-
S+
S-
IG
Table 2.11 Control Circuit Terminals (Continued)
Default Function Description
Output frequency
0 to +10Vdc / 100% frequency
-10 to +10Vdc / 100% frequency
4 to 20mA / 100% frequency
Multi-function analog output 1.
Function set by
H4-01.
Output current
0 to +10Vdc / 100% Drive's rated output current
-10 to +10Vdc / 100% Drive's rated output current
4 to 20mA / 100% Drive's rated output current
Multi-function analog output 2.
Function set by
H4-04.
Analog common –
Pulse input
Pulse monitor
Modbus communication input
Modbus communication output
Signal common
Pulse input frequency reference
Pulse output frequency
Function set by
H6-01.
Function set by
H6-06.
For 2-wire RS-485, jumper R+ and S+ and
jumper R- and S-.
–
Signal Level
0 to +10Vdc
-10 to +10Vdc
(Max current 2mA)
4 to 20mA, 500
Ω
-
0 to 32kHz (3k
Ω
) ±5%
High level voltages
3.5 to 13.2
Low level voltages
0.0 to 0.8
Duty Cycle (on/off)
30% to 70%
0 to 32kHz
+5V output
(Load: 1.5k
Ω
)
Differential input,
PHC isolation
Differential output,
PHC isolation
–
Terminals
Table 2.12 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes (Same for all Drives)
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque lb-in
(N•m)
Possible
Wire Sizes
AWG (mm
2
)
Recommended
Wire Size AWG
(mm
2
)
Wire Type
S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, S8, SN,
SC, SP, +V, -V, A1, A2, A3, AC, RP,
M1, M2, M3, M4, M5, M6, MA, MB,
MC, FM, AC, AM, MP, R+, R-, S+,
S-, IG
Phoenix type
*3
4.2 to 5.3
(0.5 to 0.6)
Stranded wire:
26 to 16
(0.14 to 1.5)
18
(0.75)
E(G) M3.5
7.0 to 8.8
(0.8 to 1.0)
20 to 14
(0.5 to 2)
12
(1.25)
*1 Use shielded twisted-pair cables to wire an external speed command.
*2 Yaskawa recommends using straight solderless terminals on digital inputs to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
*3 Yaskawa recommends using a thin-slot screwdriver with a 3.5mm blade width.
• Shielded, twisted-pair wire
*1
• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl sheath cable
*2
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 21
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
DIP Switch S1 and Jumper CN15
S1 CN15
Email: [email protected]
Fig 2.10 DIP Switch S1 and Jumper CN15 Location
Dip Switch S1
DIP Switch S1 is described in this section. The functions of DIP switch S1 are shown in Table 2.13
.
S1
1
2
DIP Switch S1 located on terminal board.
Fig 2.11 DIP Switch S1 Function
ON/OFF position
Name
S1-1
S1-2
Function
Input method for analog input A2
Table 2.13 DIP Switch S1
RS-485 and RS-422 terminating resistance
Setting
OFF: No terminating resistance
ON: Terminating resistance of 110
Ω
Factory Default = OFF
OFF: 0 to 10Vdc or -10 to 10Vdc (internal resistance: 20K
Ω
)
ON: 4-20mA (internal resistance: 250
Ω
)
Factory Default = ON
Jumper CN15
Jumper CN15 is described in this section. The jumper position of CH1 and CH2 determines the signal level of the multi-function analog output FM and AM, respectively. The functions and positions of CN15 are shown in Table 2.14
.
Jumper CN15 Configuration
Table 2.14 Jumper CN15 Configuration Options
Analog Output Monitor Configuration
CH1
CH2
Voltage Output (0-10Vdc) for terminals FM-AC (CH1) and AM-AC (CH2)
CH1
CH2
Current Output (4-20mA) for terminals FM-AC (CH1) and AM-AC (CH2)
CH1
CH2
Voltage Output (0-10Vdc) for terminals FM-AC (CH1)
Current Output (4-20mA) for terminals AM-AC (CH2)
CH1
CH2
Current Output (4-20mA) for terminals FM-AC (CH1)
Voltage Output (0-10Vdc) for terminals AM-AC (CH2)
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 22
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Sinking/Sourcing Mode
The multi-function digital input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode (0Vdc common) and sourcing mode
(+24Vdc common) by using the terminals SN, SC, and SP. An external power supply can also be connected, providing more freedom in signal input methods.
Table 2.15 Sinking/Sourcing Mode and Input Signals
Internal Power Supply – Sinking Mode External Power Supply – Sinking Mode
IP24V (+24Vdc)
(Factory Default)
Internal Power Supply – Sourcing Mode
External +24Vdc
IP24V (+24Vdc)
External Power Supply – Sourcing Mode
IP24V (+24Vdc)
External +24Vdc
IP24V (+24Vdc)
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 23
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions
Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits:
1. Separate control wiring from power/motor wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, B1, B2, , 1, 2, and 3) and other high-power lines.
2. Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA, MB, MC, M1, M2, M3, M4, M5, and M6 (digital outputs) from wiring to other control circuit terminals.
3. If using an optional external power supply, ensure it is a UL Listed Class 2 power supply source.
4. Use twisted-pair or shielded twisted-pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults. Prepare cable ends as shown in Fig 2.12.
5. Connect the shield wire to terminal E(G).
6. Insulate the shield with tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment.
Shield sheath Insulation
Do not connect here.
Connect to shield sheath terminal E(G) at Drive
Insulate with tape
Fig 2.12 Preparing the Ends of Twisted-pair Cables
Control Circuit Wire Sizes
For remote operation, keep the length of the control wiring to 50m or less. Separate the control wiring from high-power lines
(input power, motor leads or relay sequence circuits) to reduce noise induction from peripheral devices.
When setting speed commands from an external speed potentiometer, use shielded twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to terminal E(G), as shown above . Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in Table 2.12.
Wiring Checks
After all wiring is completed, perform the following checks:
1. Is all wiring correct?
2. Have all wire clippings, screws or other foreign material been removed from the Drive enclosure?
3. Are all terminal screws tight?
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 24
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
Field Wiring Diagram
Use this diagram to document field wiring. It may be helpful to copy this page.
Email: [email protected]
Fig 2.13 Field Wiring Diagram
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 25
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Introduction
This section describes the measures necessary to comply with the EMC (Electro Magnetic Compatibility) Directive.
The manual's installation and wiring instructions must be followed for compliance.
Yaskawa products are tested by certified independent test laboratories for compliance toward the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC as amended by 91/263/EEC, 92/31/EEC, 93/68/EEC.
The F7 series Drives meet/conform to the following standards:
EN 61800-3: 1996, A11: 2000-01 EN 61000-4-5: 1995-03
EN55011: 2000-05
EN 61000-4-2: 1995-03
EN 61000-4-6: 1996-97
EN 61000-4-11: 1994
EN 61000-4-3: 1997
EN 61000-4-4: 1995-03
CISPR 11: 1997
VDE0847 Part 4-28: 1997
VDE0847 Part 4-13: 1996
IEC 61000-2-1: 1994
IEC 1000-4-27: 1997
Measures to Ensure Conformity of Installed Yaskawa Drives to EMC Directive
Yaskawa Drives are not required to be installed in an EMC compatible enclosure.
It is not possible to give detailed instructions for all possible types of installations; therefore, this manual provides general guidelines.
All electrical equipment produces radio and line-borne interference at various frequencies. The power leads pass this on to the surrounding environment like an antenna. Connecting an item of electrical equipment (e.g. Drive) to a supply without a line filter can allow High Frequency (HF) or Low Frequency (LF) interference to penetrate the power distribution system. The basic countermeasures are isolation of the wiring of control and power components, proper grounding, and shielding of cables.
A large contact area is necessary for low-impedance grounding of HF interference. The use of grounding straps, instead of cables, is therefore highly recommended.
Cable shields must be connected with ground clips.
CE certification for EMC can be achieved using the line filters specified in this manual and following the appropriate installation instructions.
Cable Installation
Measures against line-borne interference:
Use a power cable with a well-grounded shield. Use a shielded motor cable not exceeding 82 feet (25m) in length. Arrange all grounds to maximize the end of the lead area in contact with ground (e.g. metal plate).
Use a shielded cable with braided shield and ground the maximum possible area of the shield. It is advisable to ground the shield by connecting the cable to the ground plate with metal clips (see Fig 2.14).
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Ground clip
Ground plate
Fig 2.14 Grounding Surface Layout
Electrical Installation 2 - 26
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
The grounding surfaces must be highly conductive bare metal. Remove any varnish or paint from grounding surfaces. Be sure to ground the motor of the machine/application. Line filter and Drive must be mounted on the same metal plate. Mount the two components as close to each other as possible, with cables kept as short as possible, not exceeding 15.75” (see Fig 2.15). See
Table 2.16 for recommended filters.
Grounding (Remove varnish or paint)
Metal plate
F7 Drive
EMC Filter
Cable Max. Length: 15.75”
Motor Cable
Max. Length: 82 feet
Grounding
(Remove varnish or paint)
IM
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Fig 2.15 EMC Filter Layout
Electrical Installation 2 - 27
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P7
44P0
45P5
47P5
2015
2018
2022
2030
2037
2045
2055
2075
2090
2110
4011
4015
4018
4022
4030
Recommended EMC Filters
Drive Model
CIMR-F7U
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
25P5
27P5
Table 2.16 Recommended EMC Filters
EMC Filter
Model Number
EN
55011
Class*
Current
Rating
200Vac Class
Weight lb.
(kg)
FS5972-10-07
FS5972-18-07
FS5973-35-07
FS5973-60-07
B
B
B
B
10A
18A
35A
60A
2.43
(1.1)
2.87
(1.3)
3.09
(1.4)
6.61 (3)
2011
FS5973-60-07 or
FS5973-100-07
B
60A or
100A
FS5973-100-07
FS5973-130-35
FS5973-160-40
FS5973-240-37
FS5973-500-37
A
A
A
A
100A
130A
160A
240A
6.61 (3) or
10.8 (4.9)
10.8
(4.9)
9.48
(4.3)
13.23
(6)
24.25
(11)
42.99
(19.5)
FS5972-10-07
FS5972-10-07 or
FS5972-18-07
FS5972-18-07
FS5972-21-07 or
FS5972-35-07
FS5972-35-07
FS5972-60-07
FS5972-70-52
A 500A
400Vac Class
10A
B
10A or
18A
B
B
B
18A
21A or
35A
35A
B 60A
B 70A
2.43
(1.1)
2.43 (1.1) or
2.87 (1.3)
2.87
(1.3)
3.97 (1.8) or
4.63 (2.1)
4.63
(2.1)
8.82
(4)
7.5
(3.4)
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 28
Aotewell
Dimensions inches
(mm)
5.500 x 13 x 1.875
(141 x 330 x 46)
5.50 x 13 x 1.875
(141 x 330 x 46)
8.11 x 13.98 x 1.97
(206 x 355 x 50)
8.11 x 13.98 x 1.97
(206 x 355 x 50)
9.250 x 16 x 2.50
(236 x 408 x 65)
3 x 13 x 7.250
(80 x 329 x 185) http://www.aotewell.com
5.500 x 13 x 1.875
(141 x 330 x 46)
5.500 x 13 x 1.875
(141 x 330 x 46)
5.500 x 13 x 1.875
(141 x 330 x 46)
8 x 14 x 2.375
(206 x 355 x 60)
8 x 14 x 2.375
(206 x 355 x 60) or
9.3125 x 16 x 3.125
(236 x 408 x 80)
9.3125 x 16 x 3.125
(236 x 408 x 80)
3.5315 x 14.40625 x 7
(90 x 366 x 180)
4.750 x 17.750 x 6.6875
(120 x 451 x 170)
5.125 x 24 x 9.4375
(130 x 610 x 240)
11.81 x 22.20 x 6.30
(300 x 564 x 160)
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table 2.16 Recommended EMC Filters (Continued)
EMC Filter
Drive Model
CIMR-F7U
Model Number
EN
55011
Class*
Current
Rating
Weight lb.
(kg)
Dimensions inches
(mm)
4037
4045
4055
4075
4090
4110
4132
4160
FS5972-100-35 or
FS5972-130-35
FS5972-130-35
FS5972-170-40
FS5972-250-37 or
FS3359-250-28
FS5972-400-99 or
FS3359-400-99
B
B
B
A
A
100A or
130A
130A
170A
250A
400A
9.92 (4.5) or
10.36 (4.7)
10.36
(4.7)
13.23
(6)
24.25 (11) or
15.43 (7)
23.15 (10.5) or
40.78 (18.5)
3.54 x 12.83 x 5.9
(90 x 326 x 150) or
3.54 x 14.375 x 7
(90 x 366 x 180)
3.54 x 14.375 x 7
(90 x 366 x 180)
4.75 x 17.75 x 6.6675
(120 x 451 x 170)
5.125 x 24 x 9.475
(130 x 610 x 240) or
9.05 x 11.80 x 4.92
(230 x 300 x 125)
10.24 x 15.20 x 4.53
(260 x 386 x 115) or
11.81 x 24.01 x 6.30
(300 x 610 x 160)
4185
4220
FS5972-410-99
FS5972-600-99
A
A
410A
600A
23.15 (10.5)
24.25
(11)
10.24 x 15.20 x 4.53
(260 x 386 x 115)
10.24 x 15.20 x 5.31
(260 x 386 x 135)
4300 FS5972-800-99 A 800A
68.34
(31)
11.81 x 28.19 x 6.30
(300 x 716 x 160)
* Maximum Voltage:
Ambient Temperature:
480Vac 3-phase
45 Degrees Celsius (maximum)
Maximum motor cable length: 50m Class B, 50m Class A
Permissible emission of power drive systems for commercial and light environment (EN61800-3, A11) (General availability, 1st environment)
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 29
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
Installing and Wiring Option Boards
Email: [email protected]
Option Board Models and Specifications
Up to three Option Boards can be mounted in the Drive. You can mount one board into each of the three option slots on the control board (A, C, and D) shown in Fig 2.16. The following Table 2.17 lists the type of Option Boards and their specifications.
Option Board
PG Speed Control Boards
Speed Reference Boards
DeviceNet
Communications Board
Profibus-DP
Communications Board
InterBus-S
Communications Board
CANopen
Communications Board
Analog Monitor Boards
Digital Output Boards
Model
Table 2.17 Option Board Specifications
Specifications
PG-A2 Single open-collector feedback
PG-B2
PG-D2
Single A/B open collector encoder feedback
Single line-driver feedback
PG-X2
PG-W2
AI-14U
Single A/B/Z line-driver encoder feedback
Dual A/B/Z line-driver encoder feedback
Analog input
0 to 10Vdc (20k
Ω
), 1 channel
4 to 20mA (250
Ω
), 1 channel
Input resolution: 14-bit
AI-14B
AI-14B2
DI-08
Analog input
0 to 10Vdc (20k
Ω
)
4 to 20mA (250
Ω
), 3 channels (V or I)
Input resolution: 13-bit plus sign bit
Isolated analog input
0 to 10Vdc (20k
Ω
)
4 to 20mA (250
Ω
), 3 channels (V or I)
Input resolution: 13-bit plus sign bit
8-bit digital input
DI-16H2 16-bit digital input
SI-NX DeviceNet communications
SI-PX Profibus-DP communications
SI-RX InterBus-S communications
SI-SX CANopen communications
AO-08 Analog output, 8-bit 2 channels
AO-12 Analog output, 11-bit plus sign bit, 2 channels
AO-12B Isolated analog output, 11-bit plus sign bit, 2 channels
DO-08 Six photocoupler outputs and 2 relay outputs
DO-02C 2 relay outputs
PO-36F Pulse-train output
Mounting Location
A (4CN)
A (4CN)
A (4CN)
A (4CN)
A (4CN)
C (2CN)
C (2CN)
C (2CN)
C (2CN)
C (2CN)
C (2CN)
C (2CN)
C (2CN)
C (2CN)
D (3CN)
D (3CN)
D (3CN)
D (3CN)
D (3CN)
D (3CN)
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 30
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Installation
Before mounting an Option Board, remove power from the Drive and wait for the CHARGE LED to go out. Remove the
Digital Operator, front cover, and option clip. Option Clip can be easily removed by squeezing the protruding portions of the clip and then pulling it out. Then, mount the Option Board(s).
The A Option Board uses a mounting spacer to secure the board to the control board. Insert the mounting spacer as shown in
Fig 2.16.
After installing an Option Board into slot C or D, insert the Option Clip to prevent the side with the connector from rising.
Refer to documentation provided with the Option Board for detailed mounting instructions for option slots A, C, and D.
2CN (C Option Board connector)
4CN (A Option Board connector)
A Option Board mounting spacer hole
A Option Board mounting spacer
(Provided with
A Option Board)
Option Clip
(To prevent raising of
C or D
Option Board)
3CN
(D Option
Board connector)
Mounting spacer
C Option Board
D Option Board
Mounting spacer
A Option Board
Mounting spacer
(Note:
A Option Board
C or D Option Board must be mounted before mounting
A Option Board)
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Fig 2.16 Mounting Option Boards
Electrical Installation 2 - 31
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
PG (Encoder) Feedback Board Terminal Specifications and Wiring Examples
PG-A2
The terminal specifications for the PG-A2 are given in Table 2.18.
Terminal
TA1
TA2
5
6
3
4
No.
1
2
Table 2.18 PG-A2 Terminal Specifications
Contents
Power supply for pulse generator
+12V/open collector switching terminals
A-phase pulse input terminals
7
8
A-phase pulse monitor output terminals
(E) Shield connection terminal
Specifications
12Vdc (±5%), 200mA max.
0Vdc (GND for power supply)
Terminals for switching between12Vdc voltage input and open collector input. For open collector input, short across 3 and 4.
H: +4 to 12V; L: +1V max. (Maximum response frequency: 30kHz)
Pulse input common
12Vdc (±10%), 20mA max.
Pulse monitor output common
-
Wiring the PG-A2
Wiring examples are provided in the following figures for the PG-A2.
Branch
Circuit
Protection
Drive
R/L1
V/L2
W/L3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
4CN
E
PG-A2
E
4CN
3
TA2 (E)
TA1
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
+12Vdc power supply
0Vdc power supply
12Vdc voltage input (A phase)
Pulse 0Vdc
Pulse monitor output
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the PG-A2's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
Fig 2.17 PG-A2 Open-Collector Input Wiring - Sourcing PG
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 32
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Branch
Circuit
Protection
Drive
R/L1
V/L2
W/L3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
4CN
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
E
PG-A2
E
4CN
3
TA1
4
5
6
7
TA2 (E)
8
1
2
+12Vdc power supply
0Vdc power supply
Open collector input (A phase)
Pulse 0Vdc
Pulse monitor output
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the PG-A2's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
Fig 2.18 PG-A2 Open-Collector Input Wiring - Sinking PG
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 33
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
PG-B2
The terminal specifications for the PG-B2 are given in Table 2.19.
Terminal
TA1
TA2
TA3
No.
1
2
3
4
5
3
4
(E)
6
1
2
Email: [email protected]
Table 2.19 PG-B2 Terminal Specifications
Contents Specifications
12Vdc (±5%), 200mA max.
Power supply for pulse generator
0Vdc (GND for power supply)
A-phase pulse input terminals
H: +8 to 12Vdc
L: +1Vdc max.
(Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz)
Pulse input common
B-phase pulse input terminals
A-phase monitor output terminals
B-phase monitor output terminals
Shield connection terminal
H: +8 to 12Vdc
L: +1Vdc max.
(Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz)
Pulse input common
Open collector output, 24Vdc, 30mA max.
A-phase monitor output common
Open collector output, 24Vdc, 30mA max.
B-phase monitor output common
-
Wiring the PG-B2
Wiring examples are provided in Fig 2.19 and Fig. 2.20 for the PG-B2.
Drive
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Branch
Circuit
Protection
4CN
Power supply +12Vdc
Power supply 0Vdc
A-phase pulse input (+)
A-phase pulse input (–)
B-phase pulse input (+)
B-phase pulse input (–)
A-phase pulse monitor output
B-phase pulse monitor output
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the PG-B2's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
• The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in parameter F1-05 (PG Rotation).
The factory preset is for forward rotation, A-phase advancement.
Fig 2.19 PG-B2 Open-Collector Input Wiring - Sourcing PG
Electrical Installation 2 - 34
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Drive
Branch
Circuit
Protection
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Power supply +12 V
Power supply 0 V
A-phase pulse open-collector input
B-phase pulse open-collector input
A-phase pulse monitor output
B-phase pulse monitor output
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the PG-B2's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
• The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in parameter F1-05 (PG Rotation).
The factory preset is for forward rotation, A-phase advancement.
Fig 2.20 PG-B2 Open-Collector Input Wiring - Sinking PG
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 35
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
PG-D2
The terminal specifications for the PG-D2 are given in Table 2.20.
Email: [email protected]
Terminal
TA1
5
6
3
4
No.
1
2
Table 2.20 PG-D2 Terminal Specifications
Contents
Power supply for pulse generator
Pulse input terminals
Common terminal
7
8
Pulse monitor output terminals
TA2 (E) Shield connection terminal
* 5Vdc and 12Vdc cannot be used at the same time.
Specifications
12Vdc (±5%), 200mA max.*
0Vdc (GND for power supply)
5Vdc (±5%), 200mA max.*
Line driver input (RS-422 level)
Maximum response frequency: 300kHz
-
-
Line driver output (RS-422 level)
Wiring the PG-D2
Wiring examples are provided in Fig 2.21 for the PG-D2.
Drive
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Branch
Circuit
Protection
4CN 4CN
Power supply +12Vdc
Power supply 0Vdc
Power supply +5Vdc
Pulse input + (A phase)
Pulse input - (A phase)
Pulse monitor output
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the PG-D2's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
Fig 2.21 PG-D2 Wiring
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 36
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
PG-X2
The terminal specifications for the PG-X2 are given in Table 2.21.
Terminal
TA1
No.
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Table 2.21 PG-X2 Terminal Specifications
Contents
Power supply for pulse generator
A-phase input terminals
B-phase input terminals
TA2
5
6
3
4
9
10
1
2
Z-phase input terminals
Common terminal
A-phase output terminals
B-phase output terminals
Z-phase output terminals
TA3
7
(E)
Control circuit common
Shield connection terminal
* 5Vdc and 12Vdc cannot be used at the same time.
-
Specifications
12Vdc (±5%), 200mA max.*
0Vdc (GND for power supply)
5Vdc (±5%), 200mA max.*
Line driver input (RS-422 level)
Maximum response frequency: 300kHz
0Vdc (GND for power supply)
Line driver output (RS-422 level)
Isolated control circuit GND
Wiring the PG-X2
Wiring examples are provided in Fig 2.22 for the PG-X2.
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Branch
Circuit
Protection
Drive
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2
T/L3
V/T2
W/T3
4CN 4CN
Power supply +12Vdc
Power supply 0Vdc
Power supply +5Vdc
A-phase pulse input (+)
A-phase pulse input (-)
B-phase pulse input (+)
B-phase pulse input (-)
Z-phase pulse input (+)
Z-phase pulse input (-)
A-phase pulse monitor output
B-phase pulse monitor output
Z-phase pulse monitor output
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the PG-X2's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
• The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in parameter F1-05 (PG Rotation).
The factory preset is for motor forward rotation, A-phase advancement.
Fig 2.22 PG-X2 Wiring
Electrical Installation 2 - 37
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
PG-W2
The terminal specifications for the PG-W2 are given in Table 2.22.
Terminal
J2
J1
11
12
13
14
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
No.
1
2
19
20
21
22
15
16
17
18
23
24
Table 2.22 PG-W2 Terminal Specifications
Contents Specifications
12Vdc (±5%), 200mA max.
Power supply for Pulse Generator
0Vdc (GND for power supply)
A1-phase input terminals
B1-phase input terminals
Z1-phase input terminals
Shield
A2-phase input terminals
B2-phase input terminals
Z2-phase input terminals
Shield connection terminal
A-phase output terminals
B-phase output terminals
Z-phase output terminals
Shield connection terminal
0Vdc
Email: [email protected]
Pulse generator 1 input
Line driver input
(RS-422 level input)
-
Pulse generator 2 input
Line driver input
(RS-422 level input)
-
Pulse monitor output.
Source depends on software parameter
Line driver output
(RS-422 level output)
-
For pulse monitor terminals 17-22
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 38
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Wiring the PG-W2
Wiring examples are provided in Fig 2.23 for the PG-W2.
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Branch
Circuit
Protection
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Drive
4CN
12
M
Pulse A1
Pulse B1
Pulse Z1
Pulse A2
Pulse B2
Pulse Z2
4CN
Pulse
Out 1
TP1
(E)
TP2
Pulse
Out 2
PG-W2
TP3
TP4
TP5
TP6
TP7
TP8
3 3
IP12
IG12
3
*
(E)
(E)
IG5
(0V)
(+12V) 1
2
(0V)
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(E)
10
11
P
P
P
P
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Pulse A
19
20
Pulse B
21
22
Pulse Z
23
24
Ground wire
PG-1
12V
0V
P
P
PG-2
**
P
12V
0V P
12V
Pulse
Monitor
Outputs
Pulse A
Pulse B
Notes:
* Power supply for PG-1 (from PG-W2).
** PG-2 requires external power supply.
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the PG-W2's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
• Do not use PG-W2 to supply both PG units.
Fig 2.23 PG-W2 Wiring
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 39
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Wiring Terminal Blocks
Wire Sizes (Same for All Models)
Terminal wire sizes are shown in Table 2.23.
Terminal
Pulse generator power supply
Pulse input terminal
Pulse monitor output terminal
Shield connection terminal
Terminal
Screws
-
M3.5
Table 2.23 Wire Sizes
Wire Thickness
AWG (mm
2
)
Stranded wire:
24 to 17 (0.2 to 1.0)
Single wire:
24 to 17 (0.2 to 1.0)
Wire Type
• Shielded, twisted-pair wire
• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl sheath cable
• Belden 9504, Hitachi KPEV-S, or equivalent
20 to 16 (0.5 to 1.3)
Wiring Method and Precautions
Observe the following precautions when wiring.
• Separate the control signal lines for the PG (Encoder) Feedback Board from main circuit lines and power lines.
•
•
•
Connect the shield when connecting a PG (Encoder). The shield must be connected to prevent operational errors caused by noise. Also, do not use any lines that are more than 100m long. Refer to Fig 2.12 for details on connecting the shield.
Do not solder the ends of wires. Doing so may cause contact faults.
•
When straight solderless terminals are not used, strip the wires to a length of approximately 5.5mm.
Use shielded, twisted-pair wires for pulse inputs and pulse output monitor wires, and connect the shield to the shield connection terminal.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 40
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Selecting the Number of PG (Encoder) Pulses
The setting for the number of PG pulses depends on the model of PG Speed Control Board being used. Set the correct number for your model.
PG-A2/PG-B2
The maximum response frequency is 32,767Hz.
Use a PG that outputs a maximum frequency of approximately 20kHz for the rotational speed of the motor.
f
PG
(Hz) =
Motor speed at maximum frequency output (RPM)
60
×
PG rating (PPR)
Some examples of PG output frequency (number of pulses) for the maximum frequency output are shown in Table 2.24.
Motor's Maximum Speed (RPM)
1800
1500
1200
900
Table 2.24 PG Pulse Selection Examples
PG Rating (PPR)
600
800
1000
1200
PG Output Frequency (Hz)
18,000
20,000
20,000
18,000
A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than 200mA. (If momentary power loss must be handled, use a backup capacitor or other method). See Fig 2.24.
PG power supply
AC
0Vdc +12Vdc
TA1
PG
1
2
3
4
5
6
Capacitor for momentary power loss
0Vdc
+
_
+
_
_
+
+12Vdc
0Vdc
+
_
+
_
Signals
PG
TA3
Fig 2.24 PG-B2 Connection Example For External +12Vdc PG Power Supply
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 41
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
PG-D2/PG-X2/PG-W2
The maximum response frequency is 300kHz.
Use the following equation to computer the output frequency of the PG (f
PG
).
Email: [email protected]
f
PG
(Hz) =
Motor speed at maximum frequency output (RPM)
60
×
PG rating (PPR)
A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than 200mA. (If momentary power loss must be handled, use a backup capacitor or other method). See Fig 2.25.
PG power supply
PG-X2
AC
0Vdc
Capacitor for momentary power loss _
+12Vdc
+
+12Vdc
0Vdc
TA1
IP12 1
IG 2
IP5 3
A(+) 4
A(-) 5
B(+) 6
B(-) 7
Z(+) 8
Z(-)
IG
9
10
+
_
+
_
PG
TA3
Fig 2.25 PG-X2 Connection Example For External +12V PG Power Supply
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Electrical Installation 2 - 42
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Chapter 3
Digital Operator
This chapter describes the displays and functions of the Digital Operator.
Digital Operator Display .................................................... 3-2
Digital Operator Keys ........................................................ 3-3
Drive Mode Indicators ....................................................... 3-4
Drive Main Menus ............................................................. 3-6
Quick Setting Menu (-QUICK-)........................................ 3-11
Programming Menu (-ADV-)............................................ 3-12
Example of Changing a Parameter ................................. 3-15
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Digital Operator 3 - 1
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Digital Operator Display
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
The Digital Operator is used for programming, operating, monitoring, and copying the Drive’s parameters. To copy parameters,
F7 Drives must have the same software version, model, and control method. The various items included on the Digital
Operator are described below.
Menu Display
-DRIVE- Rdy
Frequency Ref
U101 = 60.00Hz
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U1-02= 60.00Hz
U1-03= 10.05A
Drive Mode Indicators
See Table 3.2
Ready Display
Drive can operate when a Drive command is input
Data Display
Displays monitor data, parameter data and settings
1 line x 13 characters
3 lines x 16 characters
Key Descriptions
See Table 3.1
Factory Default
Setting
DATA DISPLAY EXAMPLE
-QUICK-
------
A1-02= 3
Flux Vector
“2”
*3*
RUN & STOP Indicators
See Tables 3.5 and 3.6
Currently Programmed Value
Present Selection (User adjusts)
Fig 3.1 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions
Digital Operator 3 - 2
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
Digital Operator Keys
The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in Table 3.1.
Email: [email protected]
Key Name
LOCAL / REMOTE
MENU
Table 3.1 Digital Operator Keys
Function
• Switches between operation via the Digital Operator (LOCAL) and the settings in parameter b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) and b1-02 (Run Command
Selection) (REMOTE).
• This key can be enabled or disabled by the setting in parameter o2-01.
• The Drive must be in a stopped condition before it can be transferred to “LOCAL” or “REMOTE” mode.
• Scrolls through the five main menus:
• Operation (-DRIVE-), Quick Setting (-QUICK-), Programming (-ADV-),
Modified Constants (-VERIFY-), and Auto-Tuning (-A.TUNE-).
ESCAPE
• Returns to the previous display, before the DATA/ENTER key was pressed.
JOG
• Enables jog operation when the Drive is being operated from the Digital
Operator (LOCAL).
FWD / REV
INCREASE
DECREASE
SHIFT / RESET
• Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Drive is being operated from the Digital Operator (LOCAL).
• Increases parameter numbers and set values.
• Used to move to the next item or data value.
• Decreases parameter numbers and set values.
• Used to move to the previous item or data value.
• Selects the digit to be changed. The selected digit will blink.
• Also resets the Drive when a fault has occurred. The run command must be removed before the reset command will be accepted.
DATA / ENTER • Enter menus and parameters as well as to set values.
RUN
STOP Key
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
• Starts Drive operation when the Drive is being controlled by the Digital Operator
(LOCAL).
• Stops Drive operation.
• This key can be enabled or disabled when operating from the external terminal or communications by setting user parameter o2-02.
Digital Operator 3 - 3
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
Drive Mode Indicators
The definition of the Drive mode indicators are shown in Table 3.2.
Email: [email protected]
Indicator
FWD
REV
REMOTE SEQ
REMOTE REF
ALARM
Table 3.2 Drive Mode Indicators
Definition
Lit when a forward run command is input.
Lit when a reverse run command is input.
See Table 3.3.
See Table 3.4.
Lit when a fault has occurred. Flashes when an Alarm has occurred.
REMOTE Sequence (SEQ) Indicator
The status of the “REMOTE” Sequence (SEQ) indicator is shown in Table 3.3. This indicator is always “Off” when the Drive is in the “LOCAL” mode. When the Drive is in the “REMOTE” mode, the SEQ indicator status is dependent on the setting of parameter b1-02 (Run Command Selection). See Table 3.3.
Indicator Status
On
Off
Table 3.3 REMOTE Sequence (SEQ) Indicator
Condition
Parameter b1-02 (Run Command Selection) is set to terminal strip, communications, or an option board as indicated below: b1-02=1 (Terminals)
=2 (Communications)
=3 (Option PCB)
Parameter b1-02 (Run Command Selection) is set to Digital Operator as indicated below: b1-02=0 (Operator)
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Digital Operator 3 - 4
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
REMOTE Reference (REF) Indicator
The status of the “REMOTE” Reference (REF) indicator is shown in Table 3.4. This indicator is always “Off” when the Drive is in the “LOCAL” mode. When the Drive is in the “REMOTE” mode, the REF indicator status is dependent on the setting of parameter b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection). See Table 3.4.
Indicator Status
On
Off
Table 3.4 REMOTE Reference (REF) Indicator
Condition
Parameter b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) is set to terminal strip, communications, option board, or pulse train as indicated below: b1-01=1 (Terminals)
=2 (Communications)
=3 (Option PCB)
=4 (Pulse Train)
Parameter b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) is set to digital operator as indicated below: b1-01=0 (Operator)
Run Indicator
The status of the “RUN” indicator is shown in Table 3.5 when the Drive is in either the “LOCAL” or “REMOTE” mode.
Indicator Status
On
Blinking
Off
Table 3.5 RUN Indicator
Condition
Drive is running.
Drive is decelerating to a stop.
Drive is stopped.
Stop Indicator
The status of the “STOP” indicator is shown in Table 3.6 when the Drive is in either the “LOCAL” or “REMOTE” mode.
Indicator Status
On
Blinking
Off
Table 3.6 STOP Indicator
Condition
Drive is decelerating to a stop or stopped.
Drive is in a run condition but the frequency reference is less than the minimum output frequency E1-09, or the Drive is running in “REMOTE” mode and the “STOP” key on has been pressed.
Drive is running.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Digital Operator 3 - 5
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Drive Main Menus
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
The Drive’s parameters and monitoring functions are organized into groups called menus that make it easier to read and set parameters. The Drive is equipped with five menus. The five menus and their primary functions are shown in Table 3.7.
Main Menu
Operation
- DRIVE -
Quick Setting
- QUICK -
Programming
- ADV -
Modified Constants
- VERIFY -
Auto-Tuning
- A.TUNE -
Table 3.7 Drive Main Menus
Primary Functions
The Drive can run in this menu.
Use this menu for monitoring values such as frequency reference or output current, displaying fault history or displaying the fault traces.
The Drive can be programmed in this menu.
Use this menu to set/read the most commonly used parameters.
The Drive can be programmed in this menu or parameters can be copied into the Digital Operator.
Use this menu to set/read every parameter.
The Drive can be programmed in this menu.
Use this menu to set/read the parameters that have been modified from their factory default settings.
The Drive can be programmed in this menu.
Use this menu to Auto-Tune the Drive in order to optimize motor control.
The motor parameters are calculated and set automatically after successfully completing Auto-Tuning.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Digital Operator 3 - 6
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Main Menu Structure
The menu selection display will appear when the MENU key is pressed from a monitor or setting display. While viewing the menu selection display, press the MENU key repeatedly to scroll between the menu selections. Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the desired menu selection.
MENU
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Operation
MENU
-QUICK-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Quick Setting
MENU
-ADV-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Programming
MENU
-VERIFY-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Modified Consts
MENU
-A.TUNE-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Auto-Tuning
MENU
Fig 3.2 Main Menu Structure
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Digital Operator 3 - 7
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Operation Menu (-DRIVE-)
This menu is used for setting the frequency reference (Local Mode) or monitoring values such as output frequency and output current. It is also used for displaying the fault history and the fault traces. The Drive must be in this menu in order to run. See parameter b1-08 (Run Command Selection During Program).
U1 Monitor List
Follow the key operations below (Fig 3.3) to access the Operation Menu:
x1
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Operation
Fig 3.3 U1 Monitor List Access Procedure
-DRIVE- Rdy
Frequency Ref
U101 = 0.00Hz
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U1-02= 0.00Hz
U1-03= 0.00A
Use and keys to scroll through the U1 “Monitor” parameter list. See Appendix A for functional description.
Table 3.8 U1 Monitor List
U1-01 Frequency Reference
U1-02 Output Frequency
U1-03 Output Current
U1-04 Control Method
U1-05 Motor Speed
U1-06 Output Voltage
U1-07 DC Bus Voltage
U1-08 Output Power
U1-09 Torque Reference
U1-10 Input Terminal Status
U1-11 Output Terminal Status
U1-12 Drive Operation Status
U1-13 Cumulative Operation Time
U1-14 Software Number
U1-15 Terminal A1 Input Voltage
U1-16 Terminal A2 Input Voltage
U1-17 Terminal A3 Input Voltage
U1-18 Motor Secondary Current (Iq)
U1-19 Motor Excitation Current (Id)
U1-20 Output Frequency after Soft-start
Note: Some monitors are not available for all Control Modes (A1-02).
Monitors
U1-21 ASR Input
U1-22 ASR Output
U1-24 PI Feedback Value
U1-25 DI-16 H2 Input Status
U1-26 Output Voltage Reference (Vq)
U1-27 Output Voltage Reference (Vd)
U1-28 CPU Number
U1-29 kWh (Lower 4 digits)
U1-30 MWh (Upper 5 digits)
U1-32 ACR(q) Output
U1-33 ACR(d) Output
U1-34 OPE Detected
U1-35 Zero Servo Pulse Count
U1-36 PID Input
U1-37 PID Output
U1-38 PID Setpoint
U1-39 Modbus Error Code
U1-40 Cooling Fan Elapsed Time
U1-44 ASR Output with or without Filter
U1-45 Feed Forward Control Output
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Digital Operator 3 - 8
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
U2 Fault Trace List
After viewing the “Monitor” parameter list, follow the key operations below (Fig 3.4) to access the “Fault Trace” parameter list.
-DRIVE- Rdy
Monitor
U1 -01= 0.00Hz
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U1-02= 0.00Hz
U1-03= 0.00A
-DRIVE- Rdy
Fault Trace
U2 -01= None
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U2-02= None
U2-03= 0.00Hz
Fig 3.4 U2 Fault Trace List Access Procedure
-DRIVE- Rdy
Current Fault
U201 = None
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U2-02= None
U2-03= 0.00Hz
Use and keys to scroll through the U2 “Fault Trace” parameter list.
Table 3.9 U2 Fault Trace List
Fault Trace Parameters
U2-01 Current Fault
U2-02 Previous Fault
U2-03 Frequency Reference at Fault*
U2-04 Output Frequency at Fault*
U2-05 Output Current at Fault*
U2-06 Motor Speed at Fault*
U2-07 Output Voltage at Fault*
U2-08 DC Bus Voltage at Fault*
U2-09 Output Power at Fault*
U2-10 Torque Reference at Fault
U2-11 Input Terminal Status at Fault*
U2-12 Output Terminal Status at Fault*
U2-13 Drive Operation Status at Fault*
U2-14 Cumulative Operation Time at Fault*
* Represents fault condition prior to current fault state.
Note: Fault trace is not executed at CPF00, CPF01,
CPF03, UV1, and UV2.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Digital Operator 3 - 9
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
U3 Fault History List
After viewing the “Fault Trace” parameter list, follow the key operations below (Fig 3.5) to access the “Fault History” parameter list.
-DRIVE- Rdy
Fault Trace
U2 -01= None
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U2-02= None
U2-03= 0.00A
-DRIVE- Rdy
Fault History
U3 -01= None
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U3-02= None
U3-03= None
Fig 3.5 U3 Fault History Access Procedure
-DRIVE- Rdy
Last Fault
U301 = None
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U3-02= None
U3-03= None
Use and keys to scroll through the U3 “Fault History” parameter list.
Table 3.10 Fault History List
Fault History Parameters
U3-01 Last Fault
U3-02 Fault Message 2
U3-03 Fault Message 3
U3-04 Fault Message 4
U3-05 Elapsed Time 1
U3-06 Elapsed Time 2
U3-07 Elapsed Time 3
U3-08 Elapsed Time 4
U3-09 Fault Message 5
U3-10 Fault Message 6
U3-11 Fault Message 7
U3-12 Fault Message 8
U3-13 Fault Message 9
U3-14 Fault Message 10
U3-15 Elapsed Time 5
U3-16 Elapsed Time 6
U3-17 Elapsed Time 7
U3-18 Elapsed Time 8
U3-19 Elapsed Time 9
U3-20 Elapsed Time 10
Note: Fault trace is not executed at CPF00,
CPF01, CPF03, UV1, and UV2.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Digital Operator 3 - 10
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
Quick Setting Menu (-QUICK-)
Email: [email protected]
This menu is used to set/read the most commonly used parameters in the Drive. Follow the key operations in Fig 3.6 to access the Quick Setting Menu: x2
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Quick Setting
-QUICK-
Reference Source
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
B1-01= 1 *1*
Terminals
“1”
Fig 3.6 Quick Setting Parameter Access Procedure
Use and keys to scroll through the “Quick Setting” parameter list.
Table 3.11 Quick Setting Parameter List
Parameter
Number
Parameter Name d1-03 d1-04 d1-17
E1-01
E1-03
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
A1-02 b1-01 b1-02 b1-03
C1-01
C1-02
C6-02 d1-01 d1-02
Control Method Selection
Frequency Reference Selection
Run Command Selection
Stopping Method Selection
Acceleration Time 1
Deceleration Time 1
Carrier Frequency Selection
Frequency Reference 1
Frequency Reference 2
Frequency Reference 3
Frequency Reference 4
Jog Reference
Input Voltage Setting
V/F Pattern Selection
Maximum Output Frequency
Maximum Output Voltage
Base Frequency
E1-09
E1-13
E2-01
E2-04
E2-11
F1-01
F1-21 <3021>
F1-22 <3021>
H4-02
H4-05
Minimum Output Frequency
Base Voltage
Motor Rated Current
Number of Motor Poles
Motor Rated Output
PG Pulses / Revolution
PG Pulse / Revolution 2
PG Rotation Selection
Terminal FM Gain Setting
Terminal AM Gain Setting
L1-01
L3-04
Motor Overload Protection Selection
Stall Prevention Selection During Decel
Note: Refer to Appendix A for control method dependent parameters.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Digital Operator 3 - 11
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
Programming Menu (-ADV-)
Email: [email protected]
This menu is used to set/read every parameter in the Drive. Follow the key operations below (Fig 3.7) to access the
Programming Menu.
x3
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Programming
-ADV-
Initialization
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
A1 -00= 0
Select Language
Fig 3.7 Programming Menu Access Procedure
Use , see Appendix A.
, and keys to scroll through the “Programming” parameter group list. For complete parameter listing
Table 3.12 Programming Parameter Group List
A1 Initialization
A2 User Parameters b1 Sequence b2 DC Injection Braking b3 Speed Search b4 Delay Timers b5 PID Control b6 Reference Hold b7 Droop control b8 Energy Saving b9 Zero Servo
C1 Accel/Decel
C2 S-Curve Accel/Decel
C3 Motor-Slip Compensation
C4 Torque Compensation
C5 ASR Tuning
C6 Carrier Frequency d1 Preset Reference d2 Reference Limits d3 Jump Frequencies d4 Sequence (MOP & Trim Control) d5 Torque Control d6 Field-Weakening
E1 V/F Pattern
E2 Motor Setup
E3 V/F Pattern 2
E4 Motor Setup 2
F1 PG Option Setup
Note: Refer to Appendix A for control method dependent programming parameter groups.
Parameter Group Functions
F2 AI-14 Setup
F3 DI-08, 16 Setup
F4 AO-08, 12 Setup
F5 DO-02, 08 Setup
F6 Communications Option Setup
H1 Digital Inputs
H2 Digital Outputs
H3 Analog Inputs
H4 Analog Outputs
H5 Serial Communications Setup
H6 Pulse I/O Setup
L1 Motor Overload
L2 Power Loss Ridethru
L3 Stall Prevention
L4 Reference Detection
L5 Fault Restart
L6 Torque Detection
L7 Torque Limit
L8 Hardware Protection n1 Hunting Prevention n2 AFR Tuning n3 High Slip Braking n5 Feed Forward o1 Monitor Select o2 Key Selections o3 COPY Function
T1 Auto-Tuning
-
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Digital Operator 3 - 12
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Modified Constants Menu (-VERIFY-)
This menu is used to set/read the parameters that have been modified from their original factory default settings. Follow the key operations below (Fig 3.8) to access the Modified Constants Parameter Menu.
x4
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Modified Consts
Fig 3.8 Modified Constants Menu Access Procedure
Note 1: If there are no parameters that have been modified from their original factory default settings, then the display will state “None Modified”. Otherwise, use and keys to scroll through the “Modified Constants” list.
Auto-Tuning Menu (-A.TUNE-)
This menu is used to Auto-Tune the Drive in order to calculate the required motor parameters to optimize motor performance.
Ideally, perform Auto-Tuning with the motor uncoupled from the load.
When the motor cannot be disconnected from the load, perform static or terminal resistance Auto-Tuning. To set motor parameters by hand calculation, contact your Yaskawa representative. Follow the key operations below (Fig 3.9) to access the
Auto-Tuning Menu.
x5
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Auto-Tuning
-A.TUNE-
Mtr Rated Power
T1-01= 2
“2”
*2*
Fig 3.9 Auto-Tuning Menu Access Procedure
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Digital Operator 3 - 13
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Use and keys to scroll through the “Auto-Tuning” parameter list. Depending on the Control Method (A1-02) setting, only certain Auto-Tuning parameters will be accessible. See table below.
Auto-Tuning Parameters
T1-01 Tuning Mode Selection
T1-02 Motor Rated Power
T1-03 Rated Voltage
T1-04 Rated Current
T1-05 Rated Frequency
T1-06 Number of Poles
T1-07 Rated Speed
T1-08 PG Pulses/Rev
O = Accessible
Table 3.13 Auto-Tuning Parameter List
V/F
O
O
X
O
X
X
X
X
Control Method
V/F w/PG OLV
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
O
O
O
X
Flux Vector
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
After setting Auto-Tuning parameters according to motor nameplate specifications, press appears on the Digital Operator.
-A.TUNE- Rdy
Auto-Tuning
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
0Hz/ 0.00A
Tuning Ready ?
Press RUN key
so that the following screen
Press the RUN key on the Digital Operator to start Auto-Tuning. The motor will automatically run. During this process the motor parameters will be automatically set in the Drive according to the measured values.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Digital Operator 3 - 14
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
Example of Changing a Parameter
Email: [email protected]
Table 3.14 provides an example of how to change parameter “C1-02” (Deceleration Time 1) from 30 seconds to 40 seconds.
Step
Number
Table 3.14 Changing a Parameter in the Programming Menu
Digital Operator Display Description
1
-DRIVE- Rdy
Frequency Ref
U101 = 0.00Hz
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U1-02= 0.00Hz
U1-03= 0.00A
The Drive is first powered up.
2
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Operation
Press the MENU key to scroll to “Operation” menu.
3
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Quick Setting
Press the MENU key to scroll to “Quick Setting” menu.
4
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Programming
Press the MENU key to scroll to “Programming” menu.
5
6
7
-ADV-
Initialization
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
A1 -01= 0
Select Language
-ADV-
Accel/Decel
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C1 -01= 1.0sec
Accel Time 1
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C101 = 30.0sec
(0.0~6000.0)
“30.0sec”
Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter “Programming” menu.
Press the INCREASE key until C1-01 (Accel/Decel) is displayed.
Press the SHIFT/RESET key to move flashing digit to the right.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Digital Operator 3 - 15
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Step
Number
8
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table 3.14 Changing a Parameter in the Programming Menu (continued)
Digital Operator Display Description
-ADV-
Decel Time 1
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C102 = 30.0sec
(0.0~6000.0)
“30.0sec”
Press the INCREASE key to display C1-02 (Decel Time 1).
9
-ADV-
Decel Time 1
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C1-02= 0 030.0sec
(0.0~6000.0)
“30.0sec”
Press the DATA/ENTER key to access setting display.
10
11
12
13
-ADV-
Decel Time 1
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C1-02= 0 0 30.0sec
(0.0~6000.0)
“30.0sec”
-ADV-
Decel Time 1
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C1-02= 00 3 0.0sec
(0.0~6000.0)
“30.0sec”
-ADV-
Decel Time 1
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C1-02= 00 4 0.0sec
(0.0~6000.0)
“30.0sec”
-ADV-
Entry Accepted
Press the SHIFT/RESET key to move the flashing digit to the right.
Press the SHIFT/RESET key to move the flashing digit to the right.
Press the INCREASE key to increase the set data.
Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the set data. “Entry Accepted” is displayed for
1.0 sec after the data setting has been confirmed.
14
15
-ADV-
Decel Time 1
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C102 4
(0.0~6000.0)
“30.0sec”
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Operation
The screen returns to the C1-02 display.
Press the MENU key to scroll to “Operation” menu.
16
-DRIVE- Rdy
Frequency Ref
U101 = 0.00Hz
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U1-02= 0.00Hz
U1-03= 0.00A
Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter “Operation” menu.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Digital Operator 3 - 16
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Chapter 4
Start-Up
This chapter describes the procedures to prepare the Drive for start-up and the procedures to conduct a Drive start-up.
Drive Start-Up Preparation ................................................ 4-2
Drive Start-Up Procedures ................................................ 4-5
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Start-Up 4 - 1
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
Drive Start-Up Preparation
Email: [email protected]
In order to provide the most reliable Drive available and to avoid any extra costs related to loss or reduction of warranty coverage, an authorized Yaskawa service representative should complete this start-up procedure. Please complete the following checklist and maintain it in a secure location as technical service personnel may request information from this checklist.
Drive Start-Up Preparation
Date:
Start-Up Person:
Company Name: _________________________________
Sales Order #: ___________________________________
Printed Name: ___________________________________
Phone #: _______________________________________
Owners Representative:
Printed Name: ___________________________________
Company: ______________________________________
Start-Up Location: _________________________________
Serial #: ________________________________________
Drive Location: ___________________________________
Signature: ________________________________________
Phone #: _________________________________________
Signature: ________________________________________
Step
1.
The Drive is thoroughly tested at the factory. The start-up person should verify that the Drive is free of shipping and installation damage. Shipping damage is not covered by the Yaskawa warranty. Claims must be filed with the shipping company as soon as possible for any potential recovery via insurance.
2.
Review the F7 User Manual (TM.F7.01) shipped with the Drive.
3.
Verify that the model number and voltage ratings in the purchase order match the nameplate data for each unit.
4.
Location of the Drive is important to achieve proper performance and normal operating life. The unit should be installed in an area where it is protected from:
Direct sunlight, rain or moisture
Corrosive gases or liquids
Vibration, airborne dust or metallic particles
5.
Ensure the Drive is on a vertical surface with adequate space for air circulation (4.75” above and below, 1.2” on each side). Refer to Fig 1-8.
6.
Verify that the proper branch circuit protection is installed in front of the Drive. Refer to Appendix E - Peripheral
Devices for proper input fuse or circuit breaker sizing.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Start-Up 4 - 2
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
7.
Avoid running input and output wiring in the same conduit.
Email: [email protected]
8.
Avoid routing power wiring near equipment sensitive to electrical noise.
9.
Never allow wire leads to touch metal surfaces. Short-circuit may result.
10. Never connect AC main power to output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3.
11. Never connect power factor correction capacitors or noise filters to the Drive output.
12. Use 600Vac vinyl-sheathed wire or equivalent. Wire size should be determined considering voltage drop of leads.
Line voltage drop (V) = 3 x wire resistance (
Ω
/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10
-3
13. It is recommended that the motor lead length not exceed 164 feet (50 meters) and motor wiring be run in a separate conduit from the power wiring. If lead length must exceed this distance, reduce the carrier frequency (See Table 2.7) and consult Yaskawa toll free at 1-800-YASKAWA (927-5292) for other motor protection measures.
14. Signal and control leads must be separated from main circuit leads (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3).
15. Determine proper wire size for power and motor leads. Refer to Tables 2.1 and 2.2 for details.
16. Review proper ground connections for the Drive. Refer to Chapter 2 – Electrical Installation for details. The Drive must be solidly grounded using the main circuit ground terminal. Ground resistance should be less than 100
Ω
for a
208-240Vac Drive. Ground resistance should be less than 10
Ω
for a 480Vac Drive. Select wire size suitable for the size of terminal screw. Make the length as short as possible. Never ground the Drive in common with welding machines, other motors, or other large-current electrical equipment. Where several Drives are used, ground each
Drive directly or daisy-chain to the ground pole(s). DO NOT FORM A LOOP WITH THE GROUND LEADS.
See Fig 2.4.
17. Review terminal functions of signal and control circuits. Refer to Table 2.11.
18. Verify if any customer safety devices are required (e.g. firestat, freezestat, high static pressure).
19. Record the following motor nameplate information:
Motor Rated Power (KW): _________Voltage: _______________Full Load Amps: ________________
Rated Frequency:________________ Number of Poles: ________Rated Speed (RPM): _____________
20. Verify that the commercial power supply is within the rated Drive input voltage:
Power Supply: ____________________VAC Drive Input Voltage: _____________________VAC
21. Verify that the leads in the 3-Phase electric motor conduit box are configured for the proper voltage.
22. Ensure Motor Rated Current is less than or equal to Drive Output Amps. If multiple motors are being used, make sure that the Motor Rated Current sum is less than or equal to Drive Output Amp rating. Please note that if multiple motors are being operated from one Drive, each motor must have its own overload and short circuit protection.
23. Wire all necessary input power leads to the Drive. DO NOT CONNECT MOTOR TO DRIVE YET.
24. Wire all necessary ground wires to the Drive.
25. Wire all necessary control wires to the Drive.
26. Ensure that the power leads are connected to the R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3 terminals in the Drive.
Start-Up 4 - 3
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
27. Tighten all of the three-phase power and ground connections. Please check that all control and signal terminations are tight.
28. For Drive models F7U4075 thru F7U4300, set the power supply voltage jumper. Insert the jumper into the voltage connector nearest to the actual power supply voltage. The jumper is factory-set to 460Vac when shipped. Be sure the power is off and the CHARGE indicator is gone out before changing the jumper setting.
Power tab
200V class power supply
400V class power supply
Jumper (factory-set position)
Power supply input terminals
Figure 4.1 Power Supply Voltage Jumper
CHARGE indicator
29. Inspect the control circuit connections (including the shield) and determine if a motor “safety circuit” is connected.
If normally closed, these contacts may be wired in series with the RUN command contacts, which are between terminals S1 and SN of the Drive. No special programming is required. Refer to Chapter 2 – Electrical Installation
(Fig 2.10). Alternately, these contacts could be wired between terminals S3 and SN as External Fault Inputs , and may be either normally closed or normally open contacts.
30. Inspect any option cards for proper installation and wiring. Refer to Chapter 2 - Option Cards.
31. If Braking Resistors and/or Braking Transistor Units are used, check the terminal connections. Refer to Chapter 2 -
Braking Resistors.
32. If a contactor is used between the Drive and motor, wire the contactor so that the Drive controls the pull-in and dropout of the contactor. Use the “Run” multi-function output and necessary auxiliary circuitry to energize the contactor coil. Consult the factory for wiring details.
33. Record any other connections to the Drive using the blank terminal connection drawing in Chapter 2 – Electrical
Installation (Fig 2.13) to determine if special programming is required for the following: (refer to Appendix A).
Multi-function Inputs, Outputs, Digital Inputs, and Analog Outputs
Serial Communications
THIS COMPLETES THE DRIVE START-UP PREPARATION.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Start-Up 4 - 4
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
Drive Start-Up Procedures
Email: [email protected]
1.
Confirm that all three phases are present and that the input voltage is correct for the Drive being set up.
Measure the voltage on the line side of the Drive’s Molded Case Circuit Breaker/disconnect and record below.
Table 4.1 Input Voltage Check
Measurement Location
L1 – L2
L2 – L3
L1 – L3
Voltage (Vac)
2.
If the voltage level is within the Drive’s specification, APPLY POWER to energize the Drive. The STOP , AUTO
SEQ and AUTO REF indicators should be lit on the keypad.
3.
REMOVE POWER from the Drive. Wait for the Red CHARGE LED (near the power terminals) to go out.
4.
Connect the motor leads to the Drive at terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3.
5.
APPLY POWER to the Drive.
6.
Determine the proper control method for the application: V/F Control, V/F with PG Control, Open Loop Vector, or
Flux Vector Control.
7.
If the selected control method requires a PG encoder on the motor (V/F with PG Control and Flux Vector Control), verify that the proper PG card is installed in the Drive and that all encoder wiring is correct. Check the line driver type
(8830, 88C30), output levels, quadrature (A+, A-, B+, B-, etc.), and encoder PPR (pulses per revolution). Refer to
Chapter 2 - Electrical Installation for details.
8.
Proceed to the correct Control Method Start-Up Procedure:
Table 4.2 Control Method Start-Up Procedure
Control Method
V/F
V/F w/ PG Feedback
Open Loop Vector
Flux Vector
Section
V/F Start-Up
V/F w/ PG Start-Up
Open Loop Vector Start-Up
Flux Vector Start-Up
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Start-Up 4 - 5
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
V/F Start-Up
9.
Apply input power to the Drive.
10. Set the control method of the Drive to V/F Control by pressing the MENU key twice for the Quick Setting menu.
Press the ENTER key to display A1-02 “Control Method”. Use the UP and DOWN keys and the DATA/ENTER key to set this parameter to “0: V/F Control”. Ensure the DATA/ENTER key is pressed to enter the selection in the
Drive. “Entry Accepted” will briefly appear.
11. Set the Drive input voltage measured in Step 1. In the Quick Setting menu, go to parameter E1-01 “Input Voltage”.
This parameter sets the nominal input voltage the Drive will receive.
Parameter
No.
E1-01
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Table 4.3 Input Voltage Setting
Setting Range
Input Voltage Setting
Input Voltage
155.0 to 255.0
(208-240Vac)
310.0 to 510.0
(480Vac)
Factory Setting
240.0
(208-240Vac)
480.0
(480Vac)
Menu Location
Quick Setting or
Programming
12. Select an appropriate V/F pattern per the application. Go to parameter E1-03 “V/F Selection” and set this parameter per the application. A standard V/F pattern for a 60Hz motor is “1: 60Hz Saturation”.
13. Set the Drive to Local control. Press the MENU key once to display the Operation menu. Then, press DATA/
ENTER to display “Frequency Reference”. Press the LOCAL/REMOTE key once. This puts the Drive in the Local
Mode, allowing run/stop and speed commands by the Digital Operator. The AUTO SEQ and AUTO REF indicators turn off, and the FWD light turns on.
WARNING
THE NEXT KEY-PRESS WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR TO ROTATE.
TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS.
14. Check the motor rotation. Press and hold the JOG key to check motor rotation. The RUN light turns on and the
STOP light is off. “Frequency Ref” (U1-01) now displays 6.00Hz on the Digital Operator. The frequency reference for this operation comes from parameter d1-17 “Jog Reference” with factory default setting of 6.00Hz. The motor should ramp up to speed. If the motor rotation is incorrect, swap any two motor leads (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3) on the
Drive terminal, and repeat the motor rotation check.
15. Proceed to the Auto-Tuning section.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Start-Up 4 - 6
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
V/F w/ PG Start-Up
1-8. See Drive Start-Up Procedures on Page 4-5.
9.
Apply input power to the Drive.
10. Set the control method of the Drive to V/F w/ PG Feedback Control by pressing the MENU key twice for the Quick
Setting menu. Press the ENTER key to display A1-02 “Control Method”. Use the UP and DOWN keys and the
DATA/ENTER key to set this parameter to “1: V/F w/PG Fdbk”. Ensure the DATA/ENTER key is pressed to enter the selection in the Drive. “Entry Accepted” will briefly appear.
11. Set the Drive input voltage measured in Step 1. In the Quick Setting menu, go to parameter E1-01“Input Voltage”.
This parameter sets the nominal input voltage the Drive will receive.
Parameter
No.
E1-01
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Table 4.4 Input Voltage Setting
Setting Range
Input Voltage Setting
Input Voltage
155.0 to 255.0
(208-240Vac)
310.0 to 510.0
(480Vac)
Factory Setting
240.0
(208-240Vac)
480.0
(480Vac)
Menu Location
Quick Setting or
Programming
12. Select an appropriate V/F pattern per the application. Press the UP key once to display parameter E1-03
“V/F Selection”. To set this parameter press the DATA/ENTER key once. Use the UP and DOWN keys and the
DATA/ENTER key to set this parameter per the application. A standard V/F pattern for a 60Hz motor is “1: 60Hz
Saturation”.
13. Set the PG Pulses/Rev of the PG (Encoder) to the correct value. In the Quick Setting menu, go to parameter F1-01
“PG Pulses/Rev”. Use the UP , DOWN , and RESET keys and the DATA/ENTER key to set the encoder PPR.
14. Display motor speed monitor U1-05 “Motor Speed” in the Operation menu.
15. Rotate the motor shaft by hand in the forward direction for the machine. A low positive speed should be displayed
(PG-B2, PG-X2, PG-W2). As the shaft is turned in reverse, a low negative speed should be displayed. If the speed doesn’t change when the motor shaft is rotated, check the encoder wiring and connections. If the polarity is wrong, swap A+ and A- wires (terminals 4 and 5 on the PG-X2).
16. Set the Drive to Local control. Press the MENU key once to display the Operation menu. Then, press DATA/
ENTER to display “Frequency Reference”. Press the LOCAL/REMOTE key once. This puts the Drive in the Local
Mode, allowing run/stop and speed commands by the Digital Operator. The AUTO SEQ and AUTO REF indicators turn off, and the FWD light turns on.
17. Display monitor U1-01 “Frequency Ref” in the Operation menu.
WARNING
THE NEXT KEY-PRESS WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR TO ROTATE.
TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Start-Up 4 - 7
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
18. Check the motor rotation. Press and hold the JOG key to check motor rotation. The RUN light turns on and the
STOP light is off. U1-01 “Frequency Ref” now displays 6.00Hz on the Digital Operator. The frequency reference for this operation comes from parameter d1-17 “Jog Reference” with factory default setting of 6.00Hz. The motor should ramp up to speed. If the motor rotation is incorrect, swap any two motor leads (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3) on the Drive terminal, and repeat the motor rotation check. The encoder phasing (polarity) may also need to be reversed.
19. Proceed to the Auto-Tuning section.
Open Loop Vector Start-Up
1-8. See Drive Start-Up Procedures on Page 4-5.
9.
Apply input power to the Drive.
10. Set the control method of the Drive to Open Loop Vector Control by pressing the MENU key twice for the Quick
Setting menu. Press the ENTER key to display A1-02 “Control Method”. Use the UP and DOWN keys and the
DATA/ENTER key to set this parameter to “2: Open Loop Vector”. Ensure the DATA/ENTER key is pressed to enter the selection in the Drive. “Entry Accepted” will briefly appear.
11. Set the Drive to Local control. Press the MENU key once to display the Operation menu. Then, press DATA/
ENTER to display “Frequency Reference”. Press the LOCAL/REMOTE key once. This puts the Drive in the Local
Mode, allowing run/stop and speed commands by the Digital Operator. The AUTO SEQ and AUTO REF indicators turn off. The FWD light turns on.
WARNING
THE NEXT KEY-PRESS WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR TO ROTATE.
TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS.
12. Check the motor rotation. Press and hold the JOG key to check motor rotation. The RUN light turns on and the
STOP light is off. “Frequency Ref” (U1-01) now displays 6.00Hz on the Digital Operator. The frequency reference for this operation comes from parameter d1-17 “Jog Reference” with a factory default setting of 6.00Hz. The motor should ramp up to speed. If the motor rotation is incorrect, swap any two motor leads (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3) on the
Drive terminal, and repeat the motor rotation check.
13. Proceed to the Auto-Tuning section.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Start-Up 4 - 8
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Flux Vector Start-Up
1-8. See Drive Start-Up Procedures on Page 4-5.
9.
Apply input power to the Drive.
10. Set the control method of the Drive to Flux Vector Control by pressing the MENU key twice for the Quick Setting menu. Press the ENTER key to display A1-02 “Control Method”. Use the UP and DOWN keys and the DATA/
ENTER key to set this parameter to “3: Flux Vector”. Ensure the DATA/ENTER key is pressed to enter the selection in the Drive. “Entry Accepted” will briefly appear.
11. Set the PG Pulses/Rev of the PG (Encoder) to the correct value. In the Quick Setting menu, go to parameter F1-01
“PG Pulses/Rev”. Use the UP , DOWN , and RESET keys and the DATA/ENTER key to set the encoder PPR.
12. Display motor speed monitor U1-05 “Motor Speed” in the Operation menu.
13. Rotate the motor shaft by hand in the forward direction of the machine. A low positive speed should be displayed
(PG-B2, PG-X2, PG-W2). As the shaft is turned in reverse, a low negative speed should be displayed. If the speed doesn’t change when the motor shaft is rotated, check the encoder wiring and connections. If the polarity is wrong, swap A+ and A- wires (terminals 4 and 5 on the PG-X2).
14. Set the Drive to Local control. Press the MENU key once to display the Operation menu. Then, press DATA/
ENTER to display “Frequency Reference”. Press the LOCAL/REMOTE key once. This puts the Drive in the Local
Mode, allowing run/stop and speed commands by the Digital Operator. The AUTO SEQ and AUTO REF indicators turn off, and the FWD light turns on.
15. Display monitor U1-01 “Frequency Ref” in the Operation menu.
WARNING
THE NEXT KEY-PRESS WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR TO ROTATE.
TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS.
16. Check the motor rotation. Press and hold the JOG key to check motor rotation. The RUN light turns on and the
STOP light is off. U1-01 “Frequency Ref” displays 6.00Hz on the Digital Operator. The frequency reference for this operation comes from parameter d1-17 “Jog Reference” with a factory default setting of 6.00Hz. The motor should ramp up to speed. If the motor rotation is incorrect, swap any two motor leads (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3) on the Drive terminal, and repeat the motor rotation check. The encoder polarity may need to be reversed.
17. Proceed to the Auto-Tuning section.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Start-Up 4 - 9
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Auto-Tuning
Auto-Tuning the motor is required for optimum performance. Use the following flow chart to determine which one of the three
Auto-Tuning Mode Selections to use.
START
Open-loop Vector or
Flux Vector
NO
V/F Control Method
(A1-02 = 0 or 1)?
YES
V/F Control or
V/F w/PG Fdbk
NO
Motor is uncoupled from the load?
YES
Use "Tune - No
Rotate"
(T1-01 = 1)
Use "Standard
Tuning"
(T1-01 = 0)
Use "Term
Resistance"
(T1-01 = 2)
Figure 4.2 Auto-Tuning Selection Flow Chart
Note: Performing Auto-Tuning energizes the motor so that identification of key motor characteristics can be determined. Output filters may affect the accurancy of the measured characteristics and/or result in drive damage. Therefore, it may be necesary to remove the filters completely prior to executing the following tuning procedure. Consult the factory with questions regarding filter compatibility.
Standard Tuning
Always use Standard Tuning (rotational) when operating in Open Loop Vector or Flux Vector (A1-02 = 2 or 3) and it is possible to run the motor uncoupled from the load.
1.
Select the Auto-Tuning Menu. Then, select “Standard Tuning” in the “Tuning Mode Sel” parameter (T1-01 = 0).
2.
Set the motor output power (T1-02), motor rated voltage (T1-03), motor rated current (T1-04), motor base frequency
(T1-05), number of motor poles (T1-06), motor rated speed (T1-07) obtained from the motor nameplate information.
If the Control Method is Flux Vector (A1-02 = 3), be sure to set the encoder pulses per revolution (PPR) (T1-08).
After entering all of the motor parameters press the UP key to display “0Hz/ 0.00A Tuning Ready?”.
WARNING
THE NEXT KEY-PRESS WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR TO ROTATE.
TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Start-Up 4 - 10
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
3.
Confirm that the motor is uncoupled from the load and make sure it is safe to rotate the motor. Press the RUN key to start Auto-Tuning. The Drive will energize the motor without rotating it for approximately 1 minute. Then, the Drive will set the required motor parameters automatically while rotating the motor for approximately 1 minute. If the
Auto-Tuning was successful, the operator keypad will display “Tune Successful”.
4.
Proceed to the Quick Setting Parameters section.
No Rotate Tuning
Use No Rotate Tuning when operating in Open Loop Vector or Flux Vector control (A1-02 = 2 or 3) and it is impossible to uncouple the load from the motor.
1.
Select the Auto-Tuning Menu. Then, select “Tune-No Rotate” in the “Tuning Mode Sel” parameter (T1-01 = 1).
2.
Set the motor output power (T1-02), motor rated voltage (T1-03), motor rated current (T1-04), motor base frequency
(T1-05), number of motor poles (T1-06), and motor rated speed (T1-07) obtained from the motor nameplate information. After entering all of the motor parameters press the UP key to display “0Hz/0.00A Tuning Ready?”.
3.
Press the RUN key to start Auto-Tuning. The Drive will set the required motor parameters automatically while energizing the motor (without rotation) for approximately 1 minute. If the Auto-Tuning is successful, the operator keypad will display “Tune Successful”.
4.
Proceed to the Quick Setting Parameters section.
Terminal Resistance Tuning
Terminal Resistance Tuning is the only Auto-Tuning method available when using V/F or V/F w/ Feedback control
(A1-02 = 0 or 1).
1.
Select the Auto-Tuning Menu. Then, select “Term Resistance” in the “Tuning Mode Sel” parameter (T1-01 = 2).
2.
Set the motor output power (T1-02) and motor rated current (T1-04) obtained from the motor nameplate information.
After entering all of the motor parameters press the UP key to display “0Hz/ 0.00A Tuning Ready?”.
3.
Press the RUN key to start Auto-Tuning. The Drive will set the required motor parameter automatically while energizing the motor (without rotation) for approximately 30 seconds. If the Auto-Tuning is successful, the Digital
Operator keypad will display “Tune Successful”.
4.
Proceed to the Quick Setting Parameters section.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Start-Up 4 - 11
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Quick Setting Parameters
The following Drive parameters located in the Quick Setting menu need to be set according to the application. Refer to
Chapter 5 Basic Programming section for more details on each parameter.
Note: Not all parameters are available for all Control Methods. See Control Method column.
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Control Method
V/F
V/F w/
PG
OLV FV
A1-02 b1-01 b1-02 b1-03
Control Method Selection
Control Method
Frequency Reference
Selection
Reference Source
Run Command Selection
Run Source
Stopping Method Selection
Stopping Method
Selects the Control Method of the Drive.
0: V/F control without PG
1: V/F control with PG
2: Open Loop Vector
3: Flux Vector (Closed Loop Vector)
Selects the frequency reference input source.
0: Operator - Digital preset speed U1-01 or d1-01 to d1-17.
1: Terminals - Analog Input Terminal A1 (Terminal A2 sums together with terminal A1 when H3-09=0)
2: Serial Com - Modbus RS-422/485 terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-
3: Option PCB - Option board connected on 2CN
4: Pulse Input
Selects the run command input source.
0: Operator - RUN and STOP keys on Digital Operator
1: Terminals - Contact closure on terminals S1 or S2
2: Serial Com - Modbus RS-422/485 terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-
3: Option PCB - Option board connected on 2CN
Selects the stopping method when the run command is removed.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: DC Injection to Stop
3: Coast with Timer (A new run command is ignored if input before the timer expires.)
C1-01
C1-02
C6-02
Acceleration Time 1
Accel Time 1
Deceleration Time 1
Decel Time 1
Carrier Frequency Selection
CarrierFreq Sel
Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency
(E1-04).
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero
(E1-04).
Selects the number of pulses per second of the output voltage waveform. Setting range determined by C6-01 setting.
0: Low noise
1: Fc = 2.0 kHz
2: Fc = 5.0 kHz
3: Fc = 8.0 kHz
4: Fc = 10.0 kHz
5: Fc = 12.5 kHz
6: Fc = 15.0 kHz
F: Program (Determined by the settings of C6-03 thru C6-05) d1-01 d1-02 d1-03 d1-04 d1-17
Frequency Reference 1
Reference 1
Frequency Reference 2
Reference 2
Frequency Reference 3
Reference 3
Frequency Reference 4
Reference 4
Jog Frequency Reference
Jog Reference
Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input “Multi-step speed reference 1” is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input “Multi-step speed reference 2” is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input “Multi-step speed reference 1,2” is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when:
“Jog Frequency Reference”, “Forward Jog”, or “Reverse Jog” is selected via multi-function input terminals or JOG key is pressed on the operator keypad. Jog reference has priority over frequency reference 1 to 4. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
0 to 3
0 to 4
0 to 3
0 to 3
0.0
to
6000.0
Varies by kVA
0.00 to
E1-04
Value
0
1
1
0
10.0sec
Varies by kVA
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
6.00Hz
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Start-Up 4 - 12
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Parameter
No.
E1-01
E1-03
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-09
E1-13
E2-01
E2-04
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Control Method
V/F
V/F w/
PG
OLV FV
Input Voltage Setting
Input Voltage
V/F Pattern Selection
V/F Selection
Maximum Output Frequency
Max Frequency
Maximum Output Voltage
Max Voltage
Base Frequency
Base Frequency
Minimum Output Frequency
Min Frequency
Base Voltage
Base Voltage
Motor Rated Current
Motor Rated FLA
Number of Motor Poles
Number of Poles
Set to the nominal voltage of the incoming line, sets maximum/ base voltage used by preset V/F patterns (E1-03 = 0 to E), adjusts the levels of Drive protective features (i.e. Overvoltage, braking resistor turn-on, stall prevention, etc.).
155 to
255.0
(240V)
310 to
510.0
(480V)
Set to the type of motor being used and the type of application.
The Drive operates utilizing a set V/F pattern to determine the appropriate output voltage level for each commanded speed. There are 15 different preset V/F patterns to select from (E1-03 = 0 to E) with varying voltage profiles, base levels (base level = frequency at which maximum voltage is reached), and maximum frequencies.
There are also settings for Custom V/F patterns that will use the settings of parameters E1-04 through E1-13. E1-03 = F selects a custom V/F pattern with an upper voltage limit and E1-03 = FF selects a custom V/F pattern without an upper voltage limit.
0: 50Hz
1: 60Hz
2: 60Hz (50Hz Base)
3: 72Hz (60Hz Base)
4: 50Hz VT1
5: 50Hz VT2
6: 60Hz VT1
7: 60Hz VT2
8: 50Hz HST1
9: 50Hz HST2
A: 60Hz HST1
B: 60Hz HST2
C: 90Hz (60Hz Base)
D: 120Hz (60Hz Base)
E: 180Hz (60Hz Base)
F: Custom V/F
FF:Custom w/o limit
These parameters are only applicable when V/F Pattern Selection is set to Custom (E1-03 = F or FF). To set V/F characteristics in a straight line, set the same values for E1-07 and E1-09. In this case, the setting for E1-08 will be disregarded. Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner:
E1-04
≥
E1-12
≥
E1-06 > E1-07
≥
E1-09
E2-04 is automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Output voltage (V)
E1-05
E1-12
E1-13
E1-08
0 to FF
HD: 40.0 to 300.0
ND2: 40.0 to 400.0
0 to 255.0
(240V)
0 to 510.0
(480V)
0.0 to
200.0
0.0 to
200.0
0 to 255.0
(240V)
0 to 510.0
(480V)
Varies by kVA
E1-10
E1-09 E1-07 E1-06 E1-11 E1-04
2 to 48
240V
480V
F
60.0Hz
240V
480V
60.0Hz
1.5Hz
0.0VAC
Varies by kVA
4
Frequency (Hz)
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
Q
-
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
Q
Q
Q
-
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
-
Q
-
Q
Q
Q
A
Q
Q
Q
E2-11
F1-01
Motor Rated Output
Motor Rated Power
PG Parameter
PG Pulse/Rev
Set to the motor rated power in KW.
This value is automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Sets the number of pulses per revolution of the encoder (pulse generator). This value is automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
0.00 to
650.00
0 to 60000
Varies by kVA
1024
Q
-
Q
Q
Q
-
Q
Q
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Start-Up 4 - 13
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
Control Method
V/F w/
PG
OLV FV
1024 No Q No Q
F1-21
<3021>
F1-22
<3021>
H4-02
H4-05
PG Constant 2
PG Pulse / Rev 2
PG Rotation 2
PG Rotation Sel 2
Terminal FM Gain Setting
Terminal FM Gain
Terminal AM Gain Setting
Terminal AM Gain
Sets the number of pulses for the encoder (pulse generator) for each full rotation of Motor 2.
Determines the direction of rotation for the encoder (PG) connected to Motor 2.
0: Phase A leads with Forward Run Command.
(Phase B leads with Reverse Run Command.)
1: Phase B leads with Forward Run Command.
(Phase A leads with Reverse Run Command.)
Sets terminal FM output voltage (in percent of 10Vdc) when selected monitor is at 100% output.
Sets terminal AM output voltage (in percent of 10Vdc) when selected monitor is at 100% output.
L1-01
L3-04
Motor Overload Protection
Selection
MOL Fault Select
Stall Prevention Selection
During Decel
StallP Decel Sel
Sets the motor thermal overload protection (OL1) based on the cooling capacity of the motor.
0: Disabled
1: Standard Fan Cooled (<10:1 motor)
2: Standard Blower Cooled (10:1 motor)
3: Vector Motor (1000:1 motor)
When using a braking resistor, use setting “0”. Setting “3” is used in very specific applications.
0: Disabled - The Drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate.
If the load is too large or the deceleration time is too short, an
OV fault may occur.
1: General Purpose - The Drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate, but if the main circuit DC bus voltage reaches the stall prevention level (380/760 Vdc), deceleration will stop.
Deceleration will continue once the DC bus level drops below the stall prevention level.
2: Intelligent - The active deceleration rate is ignored and the Drive decelerates as fast as possible w/o hitting OV fault level.
Range: C1-02/10.
3: Stall Prevention w/ Braking Resistor
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
0 to 60000
0, 1
0.0 to
1000.0
0.0 to
1000.0
0 to 1
0 to 3
0
100.0%
50.0%
1
1
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Start-Up 4 - 14
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Trial Run
1.
Press the LOCAL/REMOTE key once. This puts the Drive in the Local Mode, allowing run/stop and speed commands by the Digital Operator. The AUTO SEQ and AUTO REF indicators turn off, and the FWD light turns on.
2.
Run the Drive at different frequencies and record monitor values. With the Drive in Local Mode, press the ENTER key at Frequency Reference Monitor (U1-01). Use the UP , DOWN , and RESET keys to set the frequency reference.
Then, press the DATA/ENTER key to accept the frequency reference entered. Run the Drive at the set frequency reference by pressing the RUN key. Use the UP and DOWN keys to view Output Current (U1-03), Output Voltage
(U1-06), and DC Bus Voltage (U1-07) while running the Drive throughout its entire speed range. Record the following information at each speed:
Frequency
(Hz)
Monitor U1-01
6.0
10.0
35.0
40.0
45.0
50.0
15.0
20.0
25.0
30.0
55.0
60.0
Output Current
(A)
Monitor U1-03
Output Voltage
(Vac)
Monitor U1-06
DC Bus Voltage
(Vdc)
Monitor U1-07
When this table is complete, press the STOP key. The Drive will stop and the FWD light remains on. This step provides benchmark data for the application from the initial start-up.
3.
Press the MENU key once to display “Operation”. Press the DATA/ENTER key to display “Frequency Ref”.
If using a remote speed command, press the LOCAL/REMOTE key so the REMOTE SEQ and REMOTE REF indicators are on. This puts the Drive in REMOTE mode.
4.
If using an external speed command, determine whether the speed command is a 0-10Vdc or a 4-20mA signal.
Connect the positive side of a 0-10Vdc signal to terminal A1 . Connect the positive side of a 4-20mA signal to terminal A2 . Connect the COMMON of the speed command to terminal AC .
Note: Connect only one input. The factory default is 0-10Vdc. To change to 4-20mA, adjust parameter H3-08 to “2: 4 – 20mA” and ensure DIP Switch S1-2 (located on the terminal board) is in the ON position.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Start-Up 4 - 15
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
5.
Check the signal for proper polarity. Observe if the speed command can achieve the minimum and maximum speeds desired. If not, perform the following:
For 0-10Vdc input (Terminal A1 )
1.
With no input, adjust Bias ( H3-03 setting) until an output of “0.0Hz” is obtained.
2.
With full-scale input, adjust Gain ( H3-02 setting) until an output of “60.0Hz” (or other desired maximum frequency) is obtained.
For 4-20mA input (Terminal A2 )
1.
With 4mA input, adjust Bias ( H3-11 setting) until an output of “0.0Hz” is obtained.
2.
With 20mA input, adjust Gain ( H3-10 setting) until an output of “60.0Hz”
(or other desired maximum frequency) is obtained.
THIS COMPLETES THE DRIVE START-UP PROCEDURES.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Start-Up 4 - 16
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Chapter 5
Basic Programming
This chapter describes basic programming for the Drive.
Description of Parameter Tables....................................... 5-2
Control Method.................................................................. 5-2
Speed Command Source .................................................. 5-3
Run Command Source...................................................... 5-4
Stopping Method ............................................................... 5-5
Accel/Decel Time .............................................................. 5-8
Carrier Frequency ............................................................. 5-9
Preset Reference ............................................................ 5-11
Input Voltage Setting ....................................................... 5-12
V/F Pattern ...................................................................... 5-12
Motor Setup..................................................................... 5-20
PG Option........................................................................ 5-20
Analog Output Gain......................................................... 5-21
Motor Overload Fault....................................................... 5-22
Stall Prevention ............................................................... 5-23
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Basic Programming 5 - 1
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
F7 Basic Programming Parameters
Email: [email protected]
Description of Parameter Tables
This chapter details all of the parameters in the Quick Setting Menu (-QUICK-). Some parameters are not available for all
Control Methods. See Appendix A for details. Setting range and factory default value of the parameter follows the control method table for each parameter.
Control Method
A1-02 Control Method Selection
Setting
0
1
2
3
Description
V/F Control ( factory default )
V/F with PG Feedback
Open Loop Vector
Flux Vector
The setting of parameter A1-02 determines which control method the Drive will use for operation. Select the control method best suited for the application:
V/F Control is for general purpose and multiple motor applications.
V/F with PG Feedback is for general purpose applications requiring closed loop speed control.
Open Loop Vector is for applications requiring precise speed control, quick response, and higher torque at low speeds
(150% torque below 1Hz).
Flux Vector Control is for applications requiring very precise speed and torque control at a wide speed range including zero speed. It requires encoder feedback.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Basic Programming 5 - 2
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Speed Command Source b1-01 Reference Source Selection
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
Description
Operator - Monitor U1-01 or parameter d1-01
Terminals - Analog input terminal A1 (Terminal A2 sums together with terminal A1 when H3-09=0)
( factory default )
Modbus Serial Communication - RS-422/485 terminals R+, R-, S+, and S-
Option Board - Option board connected on 2CN
Pulse Train Input - Terminal RP and AC
In order to run the Drive and motor in REMOTE mode, the Drive must receive a run command and a speed command from an external source. Parameter b1-01 specifies from where the speed command will be accepted. To switch into the “REMOTE” mode press the LOCAL/REMOTE button on the Digital Operator while the Drive is stopped.
IMPORTANT
If the set speed command is less than the minimum output frequency (E1-09) with a run command input, the
RUN indicator on the Digital Operator will turn on and the STOP indicator on the Digital Operator will blink.
To have the Drive follow the speed command set by the Digital Operator:
Set b1-01=0. The speed command can then be entered into the U1-01 monitor or in parameter d1-01.
To have the Drive follow an analog speed command:
Set b1-01 = 1 and connect a 0 to 10Vdc or -10 to +10Vdc signal to terminals A1 and AC. Be sure to set parameter H3-01 to the proper setting. Or, connect a 4 – 20mA signal to terminals A2 and AC. Make sure the S1-2 switch and corresponding parameter
H3-08 is properly set up when using terminal A2
To have the Drive receive the speed command from Modbus serial communication:
Set b1-01 = 2 and connect the RS-485/422 serial communications cable to terminals R+, R-, S+, and S- on the removable terminal block. Make sure the S1-1 switch and the Modbus H5 parameters are properly set.
To use an option board to input the speed command:
Set b1-01 = 3 and install a communications analog input, or digital input option board into the 2CN port on the Drive control board. Consult the manual supplied with the option board for instructions on integrating the Drive and communications option board.
IMPORTANT
If b1-01=3 but an option board is not installed in 2CN, an OPE05 Fault will be displayed on the digital operator and the Drive will not run.
To use pulse train to input a speed command:
Set b1-01 = 4 and connect the pulse train signal to terminals RP and AC. Make sure the H6 parameters are properly set.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Basic Programming 5 - 3
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Run Command Source
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
b1-02 Run Source Selection
Setting
2
3
0
1
Description
Operator - RUN and STOP keys on Digital Operator
Terminals - Contact closure between terminal S1 and SN ( factory default )
Modbus Serial Communication - RS-422/485 terminals R+, R-, S+, and S-
Option Board - Option board connected to 2CN
In order to run the Drive and motor in REMOTE mode, the Drive must receive a run command and a speed command from an external source. Parameter b1-02 specifies from where the RUN command will be accepted.
To issue a run command from the Digital Operator:
Set b1-02=0 and use the RUN and STOP keys on the Digital Operator to start and stop the Drive.
To issue the run command from the terminals:
Set b1-02=1 and select between 2-wire and 3-wire operation according to the following:
2-Wire Control: The factory setting is for 2-wire operation. In the 2-wire configuration, a closure between S1 and SN will be interpreted as a Forward run command by the Drive. A closure between S2 and SN will be interpreted as a Reverse run command. If both S1 and S2 are closed, the Drive will alarm and the Digital Operator will flash an EF fault. The Drive will not run in this condition.
S1
FWD Run/Stop
S2
REV Run/Stop
SN
Fig 5.1 2-Wire Control
3-Wire Control: When any of the multi-function digital input parameters, H1-01 through H1-05, is set to 0, terminals S1 and
S2 become Run and Stop, respectively.
The multi-function digital input that was set to 0 will function as a Forward/Reverse input for the Drive. When the Forward/Reverse input is open the Drive will run in the Forward direction and when the input is closed, the Drive will run in the Reverse direction.
In 3-wire operation, a momentary closure (> 50mS) between S1 and SN will cause the Drive to run provided that S2 and SN is held closed. The Drive will stop any time the S2-SN connection is broken. If the 3-wire configuration is implemented via a
3-wire Initialization (A1-03=3330), terminal S5 becomes the Forward/Reverse input.
S1
Run Command (Run on momentary “Close”)
S2
Stop Command (Stop on momentary “Open”)
S5
FWD/REV Run Selection (FWD Run when “Open” Rev Run when “Closed”)
SN
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Fig 5.2 3-Wire Control
Basic Programming 5 - 4
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
To issue a run command via Modbus serial communication:
Set b1-02=2 (Modbus communication) and connect the Modbus RS-485/422 serial communication cable to R+, R-, S+, and
S- on the removable terminal block. Make sure the S1-1 switch and the Modbus H5 parameters are properly set.
To issue the RUN command via an option card:
Set b1-02=3 and install an option board into the 2CN port on the control board. Consult the manual supplied with the option board for instructions on integrating the Drive and communication option board.
IMPORTANT
If b1-01=3 but an option board is not installed in 2CN, an OPE05 operator programming error will be displayed on the Digital Operator and the Drive will not run.
Stopping Method b1-03 Stopping Method Selection
Setting
0
1
2
3
Description
Ramp to Stop ( factory default )
Coast to Stop
DC Injection to Stop
Coast to Stop with Timer
There are four methods of stopping the Drive when the RUN command is removed.
0: Ramp to stop: When the run command is removed, the Drive will decelerate the motor to minimum output frequency
(E1-09) and then shut off. The rate of deceleration is determined by the active deceleration time. The factory default Decel Time is parameter C1-02.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Basic Programming 5 - 5
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
When the output frequency has dropped below the DC Injection Start Frequency (b2-01) or the minimum output frequency
(E1-09) (whichever is greater), deceleration will stop and DC current will be injected into the motor at the current level set in b2-02 for the time set in b2-04.
Run Command
100 %
ON
OFF
DC Injection Start
Frequency (b2-01)
DC Injection Brake Time when Stopping (b2-04)
Output Frequency
Deceleration Time (C1-02)
DC Injection Braking
0 %
Fig 5.3 Deceleration to Stop
The actual deceleration time can be determined by the following formula:
Time to stop
=
Output frequency at time of stop command
Maximum frequency (E1
−
04) x Active decelerati on time
IMPORTANT If S-Curve characteristics are set in the Drive programming, they will add to the total time to stop.
1: Coast to stop: When the run command is removed, the Drive will turn off its output transistors. The friction of the driven equipment will eventually overcome any residual inertia of the system and the motor will stop.
Run Command
ON
OFF
100 %
Output Frequency
0 %
Fig 5.4 Coast to Stop
IMPORTANT
After a stop is initiated, subsequent run commands will be ignored until the Minimum Baseblock Time
(L2-03) has expired.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Basic Programming 5 - 6
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
2: DC Injection to Stop: When the run command is removed, the Drive will Baseblock (turn off all output transistors) for the
Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03). Once the Minimum Baseblock Time has expired, the Drive will inject DC current into the motor windings to try and lock the motor shaft. The stopping time will be reduced as compared to Coast to Stop. The level of DC Injection current is set by parameter b2-02.
The DC Injection brake time is determined by the set value in b2-04 and the output frequency at the time the run command is removed.
DC Injection Brake Time
=
(b2 04)
×
10
×
Output Frequency
Maximum Frequency (E1 04)
ON
Run Command
OFF
100 %
Output Frequency
0 % b2-04 x 10
DC Injection Braking
DC Injection Braking Time Minimum Baseblock
Time (L2-03)
Fig 5.5 DC Injection Braking to Stop
DC Injection
Brake Time b2-04
10%
100% (Maximum
Output Frequency)
Output Frequency at Stop Command Input
IMPORTANT
If an overcurrent (OC) fault occurs during DC Injection Braking to Stop, lengthen the Minimum Baseblock
Time (L2-03) until the fault no longer occurs.
3: Coast to Stop with Timer: When the run command is removed, the Drive will turn off its output transistors and the motor will coast to a stop. If a run command is input before the timer expires, the Drive will not run and the run command will be ignored . The timer value is determined by the active deceleration time and the output frequency when the run command is removed.
Run Command
100 %
Output Frequency
0 %
Timer Value
ON
OFF
Deceleration
Time
Timer Value
Minimum
Baseblock
Time (L2-03)
Minimum
Output
Frequency
100% (Maximum
Output Frequency)
Output Frequency at Stop Command Input
Fig 5.6 Coast to Stop with Timer
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Basic Programming 5 - 7
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Accel/Decel Time
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
C1-01 Acceleration Time 1
C1-02 Deceleration Time 1
Setting Range: 0.0 to 6000.0
Factory Default: 10.0sec
C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum output frequency (E1-04). C1-02 (Deceleration
Time 1) sets the time to decelerate from maximum output frequency to zero. C1-01 and C1-02 are the factory default active accel/decel settings. Alternate accel/decel settings (C1-03 through C1-08) can be activated by multi-function digital inputs
(H1-0 = 7 and 1A), or specified by the switch over frequency (C1-11). See Fig 5.7 below.
C1-11
C1-07 Rate C1-01 Rate C1-02 Rate C1-08 Rate
Time
Fig 5.7 Acceleration/deceleration Time Switch Over Frequency
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Basic Programming 5 - 8
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Carrier Frequency
C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
F
*The factory default setting is model dependent
Description
Low Noise
Fc=2.0 kHz
Fc=5.0 kHz
Fc=8.0 kHz
Fc=10.0 kHz
Fc=12.5 kHz
Fc=15.0 kHz
Program
Parameter C6-02 sets the switching frequency of the Drive’s output transistors. It can be changed in order to reduce audible carrier noise and also reduce leakage current. Cases that may require adjustment to the C6-02 include:
• If the wiring length between the Drive and the motor is long, decrease the carrier frequency.
Wiring Length
C6-02 (carrier frequency) setting
164 ft or less
1 to 6 (15 kHz max.)
328 ft or less
1 to 4 (10 kHz max.)
Over 328 ft
1 to 2 (5 kHz max.)
• If speed and torque are inconsistent at low speeds, decrease the carrier frequency.
• If leakage current from the Drive is large, decrease the carrier frequency.
• If the audible motor noise is too great, increase the carrier frequency.
The setting range depends on setting of parameter C6-01 Heavy/Normal Duty Selection.
If Heavy Duty is selected (C6-01=0), the default Carrier Frequency setting is 1=2 kHz. Software version VSF103021 and higher allows the carrier frequency to be increased above the 2 kHz setting (on most models). However, the continuous rated output current will automatically be reduced to the level as indicated in the following table.
Note: Increasing the carrier frequency above 2 kHz while in Heavy Duty (C6-01=1) may result in overload (OL2) shutdown if the load current is above the continuous current rating in the following table.
If Normal Duty 1 (C6-01=1) or Normal Duty 2 (C6-01=2) is selected, Carrier Frequency Selection range is “0” (Low Noise) to
“F” (Program).
Setting of “F: Program” allows the carrier frequency to be varied according to parameters C6-03 (Carrier Frequency Upper
Limit), C6-04 (Carrier Frequency Lower Limit), and C6-05 (Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain).
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Basic Programming 5 - 9
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Model
CIMR-F7U
2018
2022
2030
2037
2045
2055
2075
2090
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
25P5
27P5
2011
2015
2110
4011
4015
4018
4022
4030
4037
4045
4055
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P7
44P0
45P5
47P5
2.0 kHz
3.2
4.2
7
9.6
15.2
23
31
45
58
71
85
115
145
180
215
283
346
360
*2
1.8
2.1
3.7
5.3
7.6
8.7
12.5
17
60
75
91
112
24
31
39
45
Table 5.1 HD Ratings for Various Carrier Frequencies
Continuous Amps (A)
*1
5.0 kHz
3.1
4
6.7
9.2
14.6
22.1
29.8
43.2
55.7
68.2
81.6
106.7
127.6
158.4
189.2
249
304.5
7.3
8.4
12
16.3
1.7
2
3.6
5.1
23
29.8
37.4
43.2
55.7
69.6
84.4
103.9
Carrier Frequency
8.0 kHz 10.0 kHz
2.9
3.8
6.4
8.8
13.9
21
28.3
41
52.9
64.8
77.5
96.8
106.7
132.5
158.2
208.3
254.7
21.9
28.3
35.6
41
50.5
63.2
76.6
94.3
6.9
7.9
11.4
15.5
1.6
1.9
3.4
4.8
2.8
3.7
6.2
8.4
13.4
20.2
27.3
39.6
51
62.5
74.8
90.2
92.8
115.2
137.6
181.1
221.4
1.6
1.8
3.3
4.7
6.7
7.7
11
15
21.1
27.3
34.3
39.6
47
58.8
71.3
87.8
12.5 kHz
2.7
3.5
5.9
8.1
12.8
19.3
26.0
37.8
48.7
59.6
71.4
81.9
1.5
1.8
3.1
4.5
6.4
7.3
10.5
14.3
20.2
26.0
32.8
37.8
42.7
53.4
64.8
79.7
15.0 kHz
2.6
3.4
5.6
7.7
12.2
18.4
24.8
36.0
46.4
56.8
68.0
73.6
No Increase in Carrier
Frequency Possible
4075
4090
4110
4132
150
180
216
260
132
158.4
190.1
228.8
110.4
132.5
159
191.4
96
115.2
138.2
166.4
4160
4185
304
370
267.5
296
223.7
194.6
4220 414
*2
No Increase in Carrier Frequency Possible
4300 590
*2
*1 All models have an overload rating of 150% of rated output current for 60 seconds except model 2110, which has an overload rating of
138% of rated output current for 60 seconds, and models 4220 and 4300, which have an overload rating of 150% of rated output current for 45 seconds.
*2 Heavy Duty Ratings for models 2110, 4220 and 4300 are effective in software version VSF103021 and higher.
19.2
24.8
31.2
36.0
38.4
48.0
58.2
71.7
6.1
7.0
10.0
13.6
1.4
1.7
3.0
4.2
Basic Programming 5 - 10
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Preset Reference
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
d1-01 Frequency Reference 1 d1-02 Frequency Reference 2 d1-03 Frequency Reference 3 d1-04 Frequency Reference 4
Setting Range: 0.0 to E1-04 (Maximum Output Frequency)
Factory Default: 0.0Hz
d1-17 Jog Reference
Setting Range: 0.0 to E1-04 (Maximum Output Frequency)
Factory Default: 6.0Hz
Up to 17 preset references (including Jog Reference) can be set through multi-function inputs S3 to S8. The first 4 preset references and Jog Reference are accessible through the Quick Setting menu. It is a two-step process to set the Drive up for preset speeds. First, d1-01 through d1-04 and d1-17 must be programmed with the desired preset speeds and the desired jog speed, respectively. Next, three of the Drive’s digital inputs need to be programmed and wired as Multi-step Speed Reference
1, Multi-step Speed Reference 2, and Jog Frequency.
Table 5.2 Preset Speed
Preset Speed
Terminal
programmed as Multi-step
Reference 1
OFF
Terminal programmed as Multi-step
Reference 2
OFF 1
2
3
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
4
5
ON
-
ON
-
* The Jog Frequency input is given priority over the multi-step speeds.
Terminal programmed as Jog
Reference
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON*
Details
Frequency Reference 1 (d1-01) or analog input A1
Frequency Reference 2 (d1-02) or analog input A3
Frequency Reference 3 (d1-03)
Frequency Reference 4 (d1-04)
Jog Frequency (d1-17)
As shown in the above table, it is possible to use analog inputs in place of Frequency Reference 1 and Frequency Reference 2.
If b1-01 = 1, then the analog input A1 will be used instead of Frequency Reference 1 for the first preset speed. If b1-01=0 then Frequency Reference 1 (d1-01) will be used.
If H3-05 = 2, then the analog input A2 will be used instead of Frequency Reference 2 (d1-02) for the second preset speed.
If H3-05
≠
2, then Frequency Reference 2 will be used.
IMPORTANT
The programming of d1-01 through d1-17 will be in the units specified by the display scaling parameter (o1-03).
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Basic Programming 5 - 11
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Input Voltage Setting
E1-01 Input Voltage Setting
Setting Range: 155.0V to 255.0V (240V Models)
310.0V to 510.0V (480V Models)
Factory Defaults: 230.0V (240V Models)
460.0V (480V Models)
Set the Input Voltage parameter (E1-01) to the nominal voltage of the connected AC power supply. This parameter adjusts the levels of some protective features of the Drive (i.e. Overvoltage, Built-in Braking Transistor Turn-on, Stall Prevention, etc.).
E1-01 also serves as the Maximum/Base Voltage used by the Preset V/F curves (E1-03=0 to E).
WARNING
DRIVE INPUT VOLTAGE (NOT MOTOR VOLTAGE) MUST BE SET IN E1-01 FOR THE PRO-
TECTIVE FEATURES OF THE DRIVE TO FUNCTION PROPERLY. FAILURE TO DO SO
MAY RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND/OR PERSONAL INJURY.
V/F Pattern
E1-03 V/F Pattern Selection
Setting
0
3
4
5
1
2
8
9
6
7
A
B
C
D
E
F
FF
Note: VT = Variable Torque, HST = High Starting Torque
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Basic Programming 5 - 12
Aotewell
Description
50Hz
60Hz
60Hz (with 50Hz Base)
72Hz (with 60Hz Base)
50Hz VT1
50Hz VT2
60Hz VT1
60Hz VT2
50Hz HST1
50Hz HST2
60Hz HST1
60Hz HST2
90Hz (with 60Hz Base)
120Hz (with 60Hz Base)
180Hz (with 60Hz Base)
Custom V/F ( factory default )
Custom w/o limit http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
This parameter is only available in the V/F or V/F with PG control methods (A1-02 = 0 or 1).
The Drive operates utilizing a set V/F pattern to determine the appropriate output voltage level for each commanded speed.
There are 15 different preset V/F patterns to select from (E1-03 = 0 to E) with varying voltage profiles, base level
(base level = frequency at which maximum voltage is reached), and maximum frequencies.
There are also settings for Custom V/F patterns that will use the settings of parameters E1-04 through E1-13. E1-03 = F selects a custom V/F pattern with an upper voltage limit and E1-03 = FF selects a custom V/F pattern without an upper voltage limit.
See Fig 5.8 below for the upper voltage limit.
Voltage Upper Limits for 208-240V Class Drives
250V
B
A
E1-06 / 40
Output Frequency
E1-06
F7U20P4-23P7 F7U24P0-2045 F7U2055 & higher
A = 5V A = 2.5V A = 2.5V
B = 35V B = 20V B = 15V
For 480V class Drives, the values are twice that of 208-240V class Drives.
Fig 5.8 V/F Pattern Voltage Upper Limit
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Basic Programming 5 - 13
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Specifications E1-03
50Hz
60Hz
60Hz
(with 50Hz Base)
72Hz
(with 60 Hz Base)
50Hz
60Hz
Variable
Torque 1
Variable
Torque 2
Variable
Torque 1
Variable
Torque 2
0
1 or
F
2
3
4
5
6
7
Table 5.3 Preset V/F Patterns
V/F Pattern Specifications E1-03
230
(V)
17
10
0 1.3 2.5
0
50
(Hz)
230
(V)
17
10
0 1.5 3.0
2
1
F
50 60
(Hz)
230
(V)
3
50Hz
High
Starting
Torque 1
High
Starting
Torque 2
60Hz
High
Starting
Torque 1
High
Starting
Torque 2
8
9
A
B
90Hz
(with 60Hz Base)
C
17
10
0 1.5 3.0
230
(V)
60 72
(Hz)
5
57
40
10
9
0 1.3
25
4
50
(Hz)
230
(V)
7
57
40
10
9
0 1.5
30
6
60
(Hz)
120Hz
(with 60Hz Base)
180Hz
(with 60Hz Base)
D
E
V/F Pattern
230
(V)
9
28
22
15
13
0 1.3 2.5
8
50
(Hz)
230
(V)
28
22
17
13
0 1.5 3.0
B
A
230
(V)
C
17
10
0 1.5 3.0
230
(V)
D
17
10
0 1.5 3.0
230
(V)
E
17
10
0 1.5 3.0
60
(Hz)
60 90
(Hz)
60 120
(Hz)
60 180
(Hz)
IMPORTANT
When a factory initialization is performed and the setting of E1-03 = F or FF, E1-03 is unaffected, but the settings of E1-04 through E1-13 are returned to their factory default settings.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Basic Programming 5 - 14
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency
Setting Range: 40.0 to 400.0Hz
Factory Default: 60.0Hz
E1-05 Maximum Output Voltage
Setting Range: 0.0 to 255.0V (240V Models)
0.0 to 510.0V (480V Models)
Factory Defaults: 230.0V (240V Models)
460.0V (480V Models)
E1-06 Base Frequency
Setting Range: 0.0 to 400.0Hz
Factory Default: 60.0Hz
E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency
Setting Range: 0.0 to 400.0Hz (Normal Duty)
0.0 to 300.0Hz (Heavy Duty)
Factory Default: 1.5Hz
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
E1-13 Base Voltage
Setting Range: 0.0 to 255.0V (240V Models)
0.0 to 510.0V (480V Models)
Factory Defaults: 0.0V (240V Models)
0.0V (480V Models)
To set up a custom V/F pattern, program the points shown in the diagram below using parameters E1-04 through E1-13. Be sure that the following condition is true:
E1-09
≤ Ε1−07 < Ε1−06 ≤ Ε1−11 ≤ Ε1−04
Voltage
Max Voltage E1-05
Mid Voltage B E1-12
Base Voltage E1-13
Mid Voltage A E1-08
Min Voltage E1-10
E1-11 E1-04
Min
Freq
Base
Freq
Mid
Freq B
A
Fig 5.9 V/F Pattern Parameters
Max
Freq
Frequency
Parameters E1-07, E1-08, E1-10, E1-11, and E1-12 are accessible through the Programming Menu.
Basic Programming 5 - 15
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Tables 5.3 to 5.5 list the factory settings of V/F patterns when V/F without PG or V/F with PG control method is selected
(A1-02 = 0 or 1).
Table 5.3 V/F Pattern for Drive Capacity F7U20P4 - 21P5 for 200V Class
Parameter
No.
Name Unit
E1-03 V/F Pattern Selection — 0 1
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
Max. Output Frequency
Max. Output Voltage
Base Frequency
Mid. Output Frequency
Hz
V
Hz
V
50.0
230.0
50.0
2.5
60.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
E1-08
E1-09
Mid. Output Voltage
Min. Output Frequency
V
Hz
17.2
1.3
17.2
1.5
E1-10 Min. Output Voltage V 10.3
10.3
1. For 400V class units, the voltage values are twice that of 200V class units.
2. These default values are for V/F or V/F with PG control methods (A1-02 = 0 or 1)
2
60.0
230.0
50.0
3.0
17.2
1.5
10.3
Factory Setting
3 4
72.0
50.0
230.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
50.0
25.0
17.2
1.5
10.3
40.2
1.3
9.2
5 6 7
50.0
60.0
60.0
230.0
230.0
230.0
50.0
25.0
60.0
30.0
60.0
30.0
57.5
1.3
10.3
40.2
1.5
9.2
57.5
1.5
10.3
Table 5.3 V/F Pattern for Drive Capacity F7U20P4 - 21P5 for 200V Class (continued)
Parameter
No.
Name Unit
E1-03 V/F Pattern Selection — 8 9
E1-04 Max. Output Frequency Hz 50.0
50.0
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
Max. Output Voltage
Base Frequency
Mid. Output Frequency
Mid. Output Voltage
V
Hz
V
V
230.0
50.0
2.5
21.8
230.0
50.0
2.5
27.6
E1-09
E1-10
Min. Output Frequency
Min. Output Voltage
Hz
V
1.3
12.6
1.3
14.9
1. For 400V class units, the voltage values are twice that of 200V class units.
2. These default values are for V/F or V/F with PG control methods (A1-02 = 0 or 1)
A
60.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
21.8
1.5
12.6
Factory Setting
B C D E
60.0
90.0
120.0
180.0
230.0
230.0
230.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
3.0
27.6
3.0
17.2
3.0
17.2
1.5
17.2
1.5
10.3
1.5
10.3
230.0
60.0
3.0
17.2
1.5
10.3
F & FF
60.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
17.2
1.5
10.3
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Basic Programming 5 - 16
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table 5.4 V/F Pattern for Drive Capacity F7U22P2 - 2045 for 200V Class
Parameter
No.
Name Unit
E1-03 V/F Pattern Selection — 0 1
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
Max. Output Frequency
Max. Output Voltage
Base Frequency
Hz
V
Hz
50.0
230.0
50.0
60.0
230.0
60.0
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
Mid. Output Frequency
Mid. Output Voltage
Min. Output Frequency
Min. Output Voltage
V
V
Hz
V
2.5
16.1
1.3
8.0
1. For 400V class units, the voltage values are twice that of 200V class units.
2. These default values are for V/F or V/F with PG control methods (A1-02 = 0 or 1)
3.0
16.1
1.5
8.0
2
Factory Setting
3 4 5 6 7
60.0
72.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
230.0
230.0
230.0
230.0
230.0
230.0
50.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
3.0
16.1
1.5
8.0
3.0
16.1
1.5
8.0
25.0
40.2
1.3
6.9
25.0
57.5
1.3
8.0
30.0
40.2
1.5
6.9
30.0
57.5
1.5
8.0
Table 5.4 V/F Pattern for Drive Capacity F7U22P2 - 2045 for 200V Class (continued)
Parameter
No.
Name Unit Factory Setting
E1-03 V/F Pattern Selection — 8 9
E1-04 Max. Output Frequency Hz 50.0
50.0
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
Max. Output Voltage
Base Frequency
Mid. Output Frequency
Mid. Output Voltage
V
Hz
V
V
230.0
50.0
2.5
20.7
230.0
50.0
2.5
26.4
E1-09
E1-10
Min. Output Frequency
Min. Output Voltage
Hz
V
1.3
10.3
1. For 400V class units, the voltage values are twice that of 200V class units.
2. These default values are for V/F or V/F with PG control methods (A1-02 = 0 or 1)
1.3
12.6
A B C D E
F &
FF
60.0
60.0
90.0
120.0
180.0
60.0
230.0
230.0
230.0
230.0
230.0
230.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
3.0
20.7
3.0
26.4
3.0
16.1
3.0
16.1
3.0
16.1
3.0
16.1
1.5
10.3
1.5
14.9
1.5
8.0
1.5
8.0
1.5
8.0
1.5
8.0
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Basic Programming 5 - 17
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table 5.5 V/F Pattern for Drive Capacity F7U2055 and higher for 200V Class
Parameter
No.
Name Unit
E1-03
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
V/F Pattern Selection
Max. Output
Frequency
Max. Output Voltage
Max. Voltage
Frequency
Mid. Output
Frequency
Mid. Output Voltage
–
Hz
V
Hz
V
0
50.0
230.0
50.0
2.5
1
60.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
2
60.0
230.0
50.0
3.0
E1-08 V 13.8
13.8
13.8
E1-09
Min. Output
Frequency
Hz 1.3
1.5
1.5
E1-10 Min. Output Voltage V 6.9
6.9
6.9
1. For 400V class units, the voltage values are twice that of 200V class units.
2. These default values are for V/F or V/F with PG control methods (A1-02 = 0 or 1)
Factory Setting
3
72.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
13.8
1.5
6.9
4
50.0
230.0
50.0
25.0
40.2
1.3
5.7
5
50.0
230.0
50.0
25.0 30.0
57.5
1.3
6.9
6
60.0
230.0
60.0
40.2
1.5
5.7
7
60.0
230.0
60.0
30.0
57.5
1.5
6.9
Table 5.5 V/F Pattern for Drive Capacity F7U2055 and higher for 200V Class (continued)
Parameter
No.
Name Unit
E1-03
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
V/F Pattern Selection
Max. Output
Frequency
Max. Output Voltage
Base Frequency
Mid. Output
Frequency
–
Hz
V
Hz
V
8
50.0
230.0
50.0
2.5
9
50.0
230.0
50.0
2.5
A
60.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
E1-08
E1-09
Mid. Output Voltage
Min. Output
Frequency
Min. Output Voltage
V
Hz
17.2
1.3
23.0
1.3
17.2
1.5
E1-10 V 8.0
10.3
8.0
1. For 400V class units, the voltage values are twice that of 200V class units.
2. These default values are for V/F or V/F with PG control methods (A1-02 = 0 or 1)
Factory Setting
B
60.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
23.0
1.5
12.6
C
90.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
13.8
1.5
6.9
D
120.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
13.8
1.5
6.9
E
180.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
13.8
1.5
6.9
F & FF
60.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
13.8
1.5
6.9
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Basic Programming 5 - 18
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table 5.6 lists the factory settings of V/F patterns when open loop vector or flux vector control method is selected
(A1-02 = 2 or 3).
Parameter No.
Table 5.6 V/F Pattern for 200V Class Drives
Name Unit
Factory Setting
Open Loop Vector Flux Vector
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
Max. Output
Frequency
Max. Output Voltage
Base Frequency
Mid. Output
Frequency
Hz
V
Hz
V
E1-08
E1-09
Mid. Output Voltage
Min. Output
Frequency
Min. Output Voltage
V
Hz
E1-10 V
1. For 400V class units, the voltage values are twice that of 200V class units.
2. These default values are for open loop vector or flux vector control methods (A1-02 = 2 or 3)
60.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
12.6
0.5
2.3
60.0
230.0
60.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Basic Programming 5 - 19
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Motor Setup
E2-01 Motor Rated Current
Setting Range: Model Dependent
Factory Default: Model Dependent
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
The Motor Rated Current parameter (E2-01) is used by the Drive to protect the motor and for proper Vector control when using Open Loop Vector or Flux Vector control methods (A1-02 = 2 or 3). The motor protection parameter L1-01 is enabled by default. Set E2-01 to the full load amps (FLA) stamped on the motor’s nameplate.
During Auto-Tuning, it is required for the operator to enter the motor’s rated current (T1-04) in the Auto-Tuning menu. If the
Auto-Tuning operation completes successfully, the value entered into T1-04 will automatically be written into E2-01.
E2-04 Number of Motor Poles
Setting Range: 2 to 48
Factory Default: 4
This parameter sets the number of motor poles. During Auto-Tuning, it is required for the operator to enter the number of motor poles (T1-06) in the Auto-Tuning menu. If the Auto-Tuning operation completes successfully, the value entered into
T1-06 will automatically be written into E2-04.
E2-11 Motor Rated Power
Setting Range: 0.00 to 650.00kW
Factory Default: Varies by kVA
This parameter sets the motor rated power is set in kilowatts (kW).
1HP = 0.746kW
During Auto-Tuning, it is required for the operator to enter the motor’s rated power (T1-02) in the Auto-Tuning menu. If the
Auto-Tuning operation completes successfully, the value entered into T1-02 will automatically be written into E2-11.
PG Option
F1-01 PG Pulses / Revolution
Setting Range: 0 to 60000
Factory Default: 1024
If a PG encoder option is used with the Drive, the number of PG pulses per motor revolution (PPR) must be set. During
Auto-Tuning, it is required for the operator to enter the PG pulses per revolution (T1-08) in the Auto-Tuning menu. If the
Auto-Tuning operation completes successfully, the value entered into T1-08 will automatically be written into F1-01.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Basic Programming 5 - 20
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Analog Output Gain
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
H4-02 Terminal FM Gain
Setting Range: 0.0 to 1000.0
Factory Default: 100.0%
H4-05 Terminal AM Gain
Setting Range: 0.0 to 1000.0
Factory Default: 50.0%
These parameters set the gains for the analog output terminals FM and AM. The analog outputs are used for external monitoring of Drive conditions, such as output frequency, output current, PID feedback, and others. To obtain the output level, multiply the monitor output level by the gain set in H4-02 or H4-05.
For example, if H4-02=150%, then the FM analog output will output 10Vdc when the assigned output function reaches the 67% level. The analog output has a maximum of 10Vdc.
10V x 150%
10V
0 67 100
Output Function Level (%)
Fig 5.10 Analog Output Gain Setting Example
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Basic Programming 5 - 21
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Motor Overload Fault
L1-01 Motor Overload Fault Selection
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Setting
0
1
2
3
Description
Disabled
Standard Fan Cooled Motor (<10:1 motor) ( factory default )
Standard Blower Cooled Motor (
≥
10:1 motor)
Vector Motor (
≤
1000:1 motor)
The Drive has an electronic overload protection function (OL1) for protecting the motor from overheating. The Drive bases the protection on time, output current, and output frequency. The electronic thermal overload function is UL-recognized, so an external thermal overload relay is not required for single motor operation.
This parameter selects the motor overload curve used according to the type of motor applied.
Setting L1-01 = 1 selects a motor with limited cooling capability below rated (base) speed when running at 100% load. The
OL1 function derates the motor any time it is running below base speed.
Setting L1-01 = 2 selects a motor capable of cooling itself over a 10:1 speed range when running at 100% load. The OL1 function derates the motor when it is running at 1/10 of its rated speed or less.
Setting L1-01 = 3 selects a motor capable of cooling itself at any speed when running at 100% load. This includes zero speed.
The OL1 function does not derate the motor at any speed.
If the Drive is connected to a single motor, the motor overload protection should be enabled (L1-01=1, 2, or 3) unless another means of preventing motor thermal overload is provided. When the electronic thermal overload function is activated, an OL1 fault occurs, shutting OFF the Drive’s output thus preventing additional overheating of the motor. The motor temperature is continually calculated as long as the Drive is powered up.
When operating several motors with one Drive, install a thermal relay on each motor and disable the motor overload protection
(L1-01=0).
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Basic Programming 5 - 22
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
Stall Prevention
L3-04 Stall Prevention During Deceleration Selection
Email: [email protected]
Setting
0
1
2
3
Description
Disabled
General purpose (Enabled) ( factory default )
Intelligent stall prevention (Enabled)
Stall prevention with DB resistor (Enabled)
The stall prevention during deceleration function adjusts the deceleration time in order to prevent OV fault trips during deceleration. If L3-04=0, stall prevention is disabled, and if the load is large and the deceleration time short enough, the Drive may fault and stop.
If L3-04=1, the standard stall prevention function is enabled. If, during deceleration, the DC Bus voltage exceeds the stall prevention level (see table below), the Drive will discontinue decelerating and maintain speed. Once the DC Bus voltage has dropped below the stall prevention level, deceleration will continue. Fig 5.11 demonstrates deceleration when L3-04=1.
480Vac
Drive Voltage
240Vac
E1-01
≥
400Vac
E1-01
<
400Vac
Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration
380Vdc
760Vdc
660Vdc
Output
Frequency
DC Bus
Voltage t a - Set decel time b - Decel time is extended t
380/660/760Vdc
Fig 5.11 Stall Prevention
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Basic Programming 5 - 23
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
If L3-04=2, the intelligent stall prevention function is enabled. The active deceleration time is used as a starting point and the
Drive will attempt to decelerate as quickly as possible without causing the DC Bus voltage to exceed the stall prevention level.
The fastest time possible is 1/10 the active deceleration time.
If L3-04=3, the stall prevention with braking resistor function is enabled. The DC bus voltage level is controlled during fast deceleration and allows for a faster than normal deceleration time. Use this setting with a braking resistor when overvoltage fault (OV) sometimes occurs even under settings 1 or 2.
IMPORTANT
In Flux Vector Control Mode (A1-02=3), setting stall prevention with DB resistor (L3-04=3) cannot be done.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Basic Programming 5 - 24
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Chapter 6
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting
This chapter describes diagnostics and troubleshooting for the Drive.
Fault Detection ............................................................................. 6-2
Alarm Detection.......................................................................... 6-10
Operator Programming Errors (OPE)......................................... 6-15
Auto-Tuning Faults..................................................................... 6-17
Digital Operator COPY Function Faults ..................................... 6-19
Troubleshooting ......................................................................... 6-20
Main Circuit Test Procedure....................................................... 6-28
Drive Date Stamp Information .................................................... 6-31
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 1
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Fault Detection
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
When the Drive detects a fault, the fault information is displayed on the Digital Operator, the fault contact closes, and the motor coasts to stop. (However, a fault with selectable stopping method will operate according to the stopping method selected.)
• If a fault occurs, take appropriate action according to the table by investigating the cause.
• To restart, reset the fault with any of the following procedures:
•Set “14: Fault Reset” to a multi-function digital input (H1-01 to H1-06). Then, close and open the input.
•Press the RESET key of the Digital Operator.
•Shut off the Drive input power, and then turn on again.
Table 6.1 Fault Displays and Processing
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
BUS
Option Com Err
Option Communication Error
After initial communication was established, the connection was lost.
Connection was broken and/or master controller stopped communicating.
Check all connections and verify all user-side software configurations.
CE
Memobus Com Err
Modbus Communication Error
Control data was not received correctly for two seconds. This fault is detected when
H5-05=1 and H5-04=0 to 2.
Connection was broken and/or master has stopped communicating.
Check all connections and verify all user-side software configurations.
CF
Out of Control
Control Fault
A torque limit was reached continuously for
3 seconds or longer during a ramp to stop while in open-loop vector control.
Motor parameters were not set properly.
Check motor parameters.
Perform Auto-Tuning.
CPF00
COM-ERR(OP&INV)
Operator Communication Fault
Transmission between the Drive and the
Digital Operator was not established within
5 seconds after supplying power.
Digital Operator cable was not securely connected, Digital
Operator defective, and/or control board defective .
CPF01
COM-ERR(OP&INV)
External RAM of CPU was defective.
Operator Communication Fault
After communication started with the
Digital Operator, communication stopped for 2 seconds or more.
Remove the Digital Operator, and then reinstall it.
Cycle power to the Drive.
Control circuit was damaged.
Digital Operator cable was not securely connected, Digital
Operator defective, and/or control board defective.
Replace the control board.
Remove the Digital Operator once and then reinstall it.
Cycle power to the Drive.
Replace the Digital Operator and/ or the control board.
CPF02
BB Circuit Err
CPF03
EEPROM Error
CPF04
Internal A/D Err
Baseblock Circuit Fault
Baseblock circuit fault at power-up.
EEPROM Fault
Check sum was not valid.
CPU Internal A/D Converter Fault
Gate array hardware failure during power-up.
Noise or spike was on the control circuit input terminals.
Noise or spike was on the control circuit input terminals.
Perform a factory initialization .
Cycle power to the Drive.
Replace the control board.
Perform factory initialization.
Cycle power to the Drive.
Replace the control board.
Perform factory initialization.
Cycle power to the Drive.
Replace the control board.
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 2
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table 6.1 Fault Displays and Processing (continued)
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
CPF05
External A/D Err
CPF06
Option Error
CPF07
RAM-Err
CPF08
WAT-Err
CPF09
CPU-Err
CPF10
ASIC-Err
External A/D Converter Fault
Option Board Connection Error
ASIC Internal RAM Fault
Watchdog Timer Fault
CPU-ASIC Mutual Diagnosis Fault
ASIC Version Fault
Noise or spike was on the control circuit input terminals.
Perform a factory initialization.
Cycle power to the Drive.
Replace the control board.
The option board was not connected properly.
Turn off the power and reinstall the option board.
The Drive or option board was damaged.
Replace the option board or the
Drive.
Control circuit failure/damage.
Cycle power to the Drive.
Control circuit damage.
Replace the Drive.
Control circuit failure/damage.
Cycle power to the Drive.
Control circuit damage.
Replace the Drive.
Control circuit failure/damage.
Cycle power to the Drive.
Control circuit damage.
Replace the Drive.
Control circuit damage.
Replace the Drive.
CPF20
Option A/D Error
CPF21
Option CPU Down
Self-diagnosis Fault of Option Board
CPF22
Option Type Err
Option Card Fault
Option Board Code Number Fault
CPF23
Option DPRAM Err
Option Board Interconnection Fault
Option board input fault.
Noise or spike was on the communication line and/or defective option board.
Remove all inputs to the option board.
Perform a factory initialization.
Cycle power to the Drive.
Option card A/D convert fault.
Replace the option board.
Replace the control board.
Perform a factory initialization.
Cycle power to the Drive.
Replace the option board.
Replace the control board.
Remove any option boards.
Cycle power to the Drive.
Unrecognizable option board was connected to the control board.
Perform a factory initialization.
Replace the option board.
Replace the control board.
An option board was not correctly connected to the control board, or an option board that was not made for the Drive was attached to the control board.
Remove power to the Drive.
Reconnect the option board.
Perform a factory initialization.
Cycle power to the Drive.
Replace the option board.
Replace the control board.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 3
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table 6.1 Fault Displays and Processing (continued)
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
DEV
Speed Deviation
EF0
Opt External Flt
Excessive Speed Deviation
Detected when F1-04 = 0 to 2 and in Flux
Vector control method A1-02 = 3.
The speed deviation is greater than the setting in F1-10 for a time longer than the setting in F1-11.
Option Board External Fault
The load is locked.
The acceleration or deceleration time is too short.
The load is too large.
Reduce the load.
Lengthen the acceleration time and deceleration time.
Check the mechanical system.
The settings in F1-10 and
F1-11 are not appropriate for the application.
Braking mechanism is engaged
Check the settings in F1-10 and
F1-11.
Check that the brake is released when using brake (motor).
Encoder wiring and/or encoder settings (F1 group) are incorrect
Check for proper encoder wiring and verify the parameter settings are correct.
An external fault condition is present.
Check for an external condition.
Verify the parameters.
Verify communication signal.
EF3
Ext Fault S3
EF4
Ext Fault S4
EF5
Ext Fault S5
EF6
Ext Fault S6
EF7
Ext Fault S7
EF8
Ext Fault S8
External Fault at Terminal S3 - S8
Detected when terminals S3 - S8 (H1-01 to
H1-06) are programmed for external fault function that stops the Drive using ramp to stop, coast to stop, or fast stop.
An external fault condition is present that is connected to a multi-function digital input.
Eliminate the cause of the external fault condition.
E5
SI-T WDT Err
<3021>
E-15
SI-F/G Com Err
SI-T Watchdog Error
Consistency error of received control data.
Synchronization error between master controller and Drive for control data.
Check the communications timing such as communications cycle.
Refer to SI-T manual for details.
Check the communication signals.
SI-F/G Communication Error Detected
A communication error is detected when a run command or frequency reference is set from the SI-F/G Option Card (b1-01=3, b1-02=3) and communication is lost.
Communication has been lost to the SI-F/G option card connected and b1-01=3 and/or b1-02=3.
Check the settings of b1-01 and b1-02.
Check the setting of F6-01.
Check the host side (master) communication configuration.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 4
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table 6.1 Fault Displays and Processing (continued)
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
FAN
Cooling FAN Err
<3021>
FBL
Feedback Loss
GF
Ground Fault
LF
Output Phase Loss
OC
Over Current
Drive’s Cooling Fan Fault
A Drive’s cooling fan fault was detected, and the Drive overload protection was activated based on the internal electric thermal value.
This fault is detected when L8-32 is set to 1.
The Drive continued running with an overload after the cooling fan stopped.
Replace the cooling fan.
PID Feedback Loss
This fault occurs when PID Feedback Loss
Detection is programmed to fault
(b5-12 = 2) and the PID Feedback < PID
Feedback Loss Detection Level (b5-13) for the PID Feedback Loss Detection Time
(b5-14).
PID feedback source
(e.g. transducer, sensor, building automation signal) is not installed correctly or is not working.
Verify Drive is programmed to receive the PID feedback source signal.
Check to ensure the PID feedback source is installed and working properly.
Remove the motor and run the
Drive without the motor.
Output Ground Fault
Drive output grounding current has exceeded 50% of the Drive rated output current and L8-09 = 1 (enabled).
Motor lead was shorted to ground and/or a DCCT was defective.
Check the motor for a phase to ground short.
Check the output current with a clamp on meter to verify the
DCCT reading.
Output Open-phase
An open-phase occurred at the Drive output
This fault is detected when output current has exceeded 5% imbalance and L8-07 = 1
(enabled).
There was a broken wire in the output cable.
There was a broken wire in the motor winding.
The output terminals were loose.
Check the wiring to the motor.
Check the motor for phase to ground short.
The motor being used has a capacity less than 5% of the
Drive’s maximum motor capacity.
Low impedance motor was used.
Check the motor and Drive capacity.
Add additional impedance.
Overcurrent
Drive output current exceeded the overcurrent detection level (approximately
200% of Drive rated output current).
Shorted Drive output phase to phase, shorted motor, locked rotor, load too heavy, accel/ decel time too short, contactor on the Drive output is opened or closed, a special motor or a motor with a FLA rating larger than Drive rated output current.
Remove the motor and run the
Drive without the motor.
Check the motor for a phase-tophase short.
Check the Drive for a phase-tophase short at the output.
Verify C1-01 and C1-02 are set correctly.
Check load conditions.
OH
Heatsink Overtemp
Heatsink Overheat
The temperature of the Drive’s heatsink exceeded the setting in L8-02 and
L8-03 = 0 to 2.
There was a heat source nearby.
The ambient temperature was too high.
Check for dirt build-up on the fans and heatsink.
Reduce the ambient temperature around the Drive.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 5
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table 6.1 Fault Displays and Processing (continued)
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
OH
Heatsink Overtemp
(Continued)
Heatsink Overheat
The temperature of the Drive’s heatsink exceeded the setting in L8-02 and
L8-03 = 0 to 2.
Drive’s internal cooling fan stopped
(F7U2018 / F7U4018 and larger).
The Drive’s cooling fan(s) stopped.
OH1
Heatsink Max Temp
Heatsink Overheat
The temperature of the Drive’s heatsink exceeded 105 degrees C.
The Drive’s internal cooling fan(s) stopped.
There was a heat source nearby.
The ambient temperature was too high.
The Drive’s cooling fan(s) stopped.
Drive’s internal cooling fan stopped
(F7U2011 / F7U4011 and larger capacities).
The Drive’s internal cooling fan(s) stopped.
OH3
Motor Overheat 1
OH4
Motor Overheat 2
OL1
Motor Overloaded
Motor Overheating 1
Detected when A2 or A3, programmed for motor temperature (H3-09 or H3-05 = E), exceeds 1.17V for time L1-05 and
L1-03 = 0 to 2.
Motor Overheating 2
Detected when A2 or A3, programmed for motor temperature (H3-09 or H3-05 = E), exceeds 2.34V for time L1-05 and
L1-03 = 0 to 2.
Motor Overload
Detected when L1-01 = 1 to 3 and the
Drive’s output current exceeded the motor overload curve.
The overload curve is adjustable using parameter E2-01, L1-01, and L1-02.
Replace the cooling fan.
Check for dirt build-up on the fans and heatsink.
Reduce the ambient temperature around the Drive.
Replace the cooling fan.
Overheating of motor as measured by the motor thermistor.
Overheating of motor as measured by the motor thermistor.
Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load.
Recheck the accel/decel time
(C1-01 and C1-02).
Recheck the V/F pattern (E1-01 thru E1-13).
Recheck the motor rated current value (E2-01).
Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load.
Recheck the accel/decel time
(C1-01 and C1-02).
Recheck the V/F pattern (E1-01 thru E1-13).
Recheck the motor rated current value (E2-01).
The load was too large. The cycle time was too short at the accel/decel time.
Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load as well as the times set in C1-01 and C1-02
The voltage of the V/F pattern was incorrect for the application.
Review the V/F pattern parameters, E1-01 thru E1-13.
Motor rated current setting was improper.
Check the motor rated current value in E2-01.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 6
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table 6.1 Fault Displays and Processing (continued)
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
OL2
Inv Overload
OL3
Overtorque Det 1
OL4
Overtorque Det 2
OL7
HSB OL
OPR
Oper Disconnect
OS
Overspeed Det
OV
DC Bus Overvolt
Drive Overload
The Drive output current exceeded the
Drive’s overload curve.
Overtorque Detection 1
Drive output current > L6-02 for more than the time set in L6-03 and L6-01 = 3 or 4.
Overtorque Detection 2
Drive output current > L6-05 for more than the time set in L6-06 and L6-04 = 3 or 4.
The load was too large, or the accel/decel times are too short.
Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load as well as the times set in C1-01 and C1-02.
The voltage of the V/F pattern was incorrect for the application.
Review the V/F pattern parameters, E1-01 thru E1-13.
The size of the Drive was too small.
Change to a larger size Drive.
Motor was overloaded.
Motor was overloaded.
Ensure the values in L6-02 and L6-
03 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Ensure the values in L6-05 and L6-
06 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
High Slip Braking OL
The output frequency stayed constant for longer than the time set in n3-04 during high slip braking.
Digital Operator Connection Fault
Detected when the Digital Operator is removed and the Drive is commanded to run through the Digital Operator
(b1-02 = 0).
Motor Overspeed
Detected when F1-03 = 0 to 2 and
A1-02 = 1 or 3.
The motor speed feedback (U1-05) exceeded the setting in F1-08 for a longer time than the setting in F1-09.
DC Bus Overvoltage
The DC bus voltage has exceeded the trip point.
208-240Vac: Trip point is 410Vdc
480Vac: Trip point is 820Vdc
The inertia of the load is too large.
The Digital Operator was not attached, or the Digital
Operator connector was broken.
Overshooting/Undershooting was occurring.
The reference was too high.
The settings in F1-08 and
F1-09 are not appropriate.
High input voltage at R/L1,
S/L2 and T/L3.
The deceleration time is set too short.
Make sure the load is an inertial.
If possible, reduce the load inertia.
Attach the Digital Operator.
Check the Digital Operator connector.
Verify the setting of o2-06.
Adjust the ASR settings in the C5 parameter group.
Check the reference circuit and reference gain.
Check the settings in F1-08 and
F1-09.
Check the input circuit and reduce the input power to within specifications.
Extend the time in C1-02 or other active decel settings used such as
C1-04, C1-06, C1-08, or C1-09
(time).
Power factor correction capacitors are being used on the input or output to the
Drive.
Remove the power factor correction capacitors.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 7
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table 6.1 Fault Displays and Processing (continued)
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
PF
Input Pha Loss
Open phase on the input of the
Drive.
Check the input voltage.
Input Phase Loss
Drive input power supply has an open phase or has a large imbalance of voltage.
Detected when L8-05 = 1 (enabled).
Loose terminal screws at
R/L1, S/L2 or T/L3.
Momentary power loss occurred.
Input voltage fluctuation too large.
Tighten the terminal screws.
Check the input voltage.
Check the input voltage.
PGO
PG Open
There was a break in the PG wiring.
Power wasn’t being supplied to the PG.
Fix the broken / disconnected wiring.
PG Disconnection (Detection with
Software)
Detected when F1-02 = 0 to 2 and
A1-02 = 1 or 3.
Detected when no PG (encoder) pulses are received for a time longer than the setting in
F1-14.
The PG was wired incorrectly.
Fix the wiring.
Supply power to the PG properly.
Braking mechanism is possibly engaged.
Check for open circuit when using brake (motor).
PGOH
PG Open
HARDWARE
<3021>
PG Disconnection (Detection with
Hardware)
Detected when F1-02 - 0 to 2 and F1-25 = 1
(PG-T2 or PG-Z2) and / or F1-26 = 1 (PG-
Z2) and A1-02 = 1 or 3.
Detected when no PG (encoder) pulses are received.
There is a break in the PG wiring.
Power is not being supplied to the PG.
—
Fix the broken / disconnected wiring.
The PG was wired incorrectly.
Fix the wiring.
Supply the proper power required by the PG encoder.
Check for an open circuit when using the brake (motor).
PUF
DC Bus Fuse Open
DC Bus Fuse
Detects if the DC bus fuse has opened.
Warning:
Never run the Drive after replacing the
DC bus fuse without checking for shorted components.
Shorted output transistor(s) or terminals.
Remove power from the Drive.
Disconnect the motor.
Perform the checks without power in Table 6.6.
Replace the shorted component(s).
Replace the defective fuse.
RH
DynBrk Resistor
RR
DynBrk Transistr
Dynamic Braking Resistor
The protection of the heatsink mount resistor is activated when L8-01 = 1.
This fault is only applicable when using the
3% duty cycle resistor, which is mounted on the Drive’s heatsink. For all other resistors, set L8-01 = 0.
Dynamic Braking Transistor
The built-in dynamic braking transistor is not operating properly.
Overhauling load, extended dynamic braking duty cycle, defective dynamic braking resistor.
Started dynamic braking transistor high DC bus voltage, defective dynamic braking resistor.
Verify dynamic braking duty cycle.
Monitor DC bus voltage.
Replace dynamic braking resistor.
Cycle power to the Drive.
Replace defective dynamic braking transistor or resistor .
Monitor DC bus voltage.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 8
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table 6.1 Fault Displays and Processing (continued)
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
SER
Search Retry Err
<3021>
SVE
Zero Servo Fault
UL3
Undertorq Det 1
UL4
Undertorq Det 2
UV1
DC Bus Undervolt
UV2
CTL PS Undervolt
UV3
MC Answerback
Exceeded Allowable Number of Speed
Search Retries
The speed search has been retried more than the number of tries set in b3-19 (Number of speed search retrials).
The settings in b3-17 and b3-18 are not appropriate.
Make sure that the settings in b3-17 and b3-18 are appropriate.
Zero Servo Fault
The motor position moved more than
10,000 revolutions during zero servo operation.
Undertorque Detection 1
Drive output current < L6-02 for more than the time set in L6-03 when L6-01 = 7 or 8.
Undertorque Detection 2
Drive output current < L6-05 for more than the time set in L6-06 when L6-04 = 7 or 8.
The torque limit was too small. Increase the torque limit.
The load torque was too large.
Control circuit fault
Motor was underloaded.
Motor was underloaded.
Reduce the load torque.
Check for signal noise.
Ensure the values in L6-02 and
L6-03 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Ensure the values in L6-05 and
L6-06 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Check the input circuit and increase the input power to within specifications.
DC Bus Undervoltage
208-240Vac: Default trip point is
≤
190Vdc
480Vac: Default trip point is
≤
380Vdc
Trip point is adjustable in L2-05.
Detected when the DC bus voltage is
≤
L2-05.
Control Power Supply Undervoltage
Undervoltage of the control circuit when running.
Soft Charge Circuit Fault
The pre-charge contactor opened while the
Drive was running.
Low input voltage at R/L1,
S/L2 and T/L3.
The acceleration time is set too short.
Extend the time in C1-01 or other active accel settings used such as
C1-03, C1-05, or C1-07 (time).
Voltage fluctuation of the input power is too large.
Check the input voltage.
Cycle power to the Drive.
External load was pulling down the Drive’s power supplies, or there was an internal short in the power/ gate Drive board.
Remove all control wiring and test
Drive or disconnect control terminal strip.
Repair or replace the Power PCB/
Gate Drive PCB.
Cycle power to the Drive.
Contacts on the soft charge contactor were dirty and the soft charge contactor does not function mechanically.
Check the condition of the soft charge contactor.
Repair or replace the Power PCB/
Gate Drive PCB.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 9
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Alarm Detection
Alarms are Drive protection functions that do not operate the fault contact. The Drive will automatically return to its original status once the cause of the alarm has been removed.
During an alarm condition, the Digital Operator display flashes and an alarm output is generated at the multi-function outputs
(H2-01 to H2-03) if programmed.
When an alarm occurs, take appropriate corrective action according to the table below.
Table 6.2 Alarm Displays and Processing
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
AEr
SI-T Address Err
<3021>
SI-T Station Number Setting Error
Station number of SI-T option board was outside the setting range.
Station number setting error
Circuit of SI-T option board is faulty.
Check the station number setting.
Refer to SI-T manual for details.
Check the communications devices and signals.
Refer to SI-T manual for details.
BUS
Option Com Err
(Flashing)
Option Communication Error
After initial communication is established, the connection was lost.
Connection is broken, master controller has stopped communicating.
Check all connections, verify all user side software configurations.
CALL
SI-F/G ComCall
(Flashing)
DEV
Speed Deviation
(Flashing)
Serial communication transmission error.
Communication has not yet been established.
Connection was not made properly, or user software was not configured to the proper baud rate or configuration.
Check all connections, verify all user side software configurations.
CE
MEMOBUS Com Err
(Flashing)
Modbus Communications Error
Enabled when H5-05 = 1 and H5-04 = 3.
CyC
SI-T Cycle Err
<3021>
Normal communication was not possible for 2 seconds or longer after control data was received.
SI-T Communications Cycle Setting
Error
Communications cycle of SI-T option board was out of range.
Communications cycle of SI-T option board set in the master controller was out of range.
Check the communications devices and signals.
Check the communication cycle of SI-T option board set in master controller.
Refer to SI-T manual for details.
The load was locked.
Reduce the load.
Excessive Speed Deviation
Detected when F1-04 = 3 and A1-02 = 1 or 3.
The speed deviation is greater than the setting in F1-10 for longer than the setting in F1-11.
The acceleration time and deceleration times were too short.
The load was too large.
The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 were not appropriate.
Lengthen the acceleration and deceleration times.
Check the mechanical system.
Check the settings in F1-10 and
F1-11.
DNE
Drive not Enable
(Flashing)
Detected when a multi-function digital input (H1-01 to H1-06) is programmed for
6A: Drive enable.
The Drive does not have the enable command when the run command is applied. This alarm stops the motor.
Enable command was lost while
Drive was running.
Check the input terminal programmed for enable command.
The Run command was applied prior to the enable signal.
Apply and maintain the enable command before applying the run command.
EF
External Fault
Both the forward and the reverse run commands are input simultaneously for
500ms or more. This alarm stops the motor.
An external forward and reverse command were input simultaneously.
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 10
Check external sequence logic, so only one input is received at a time.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
Table 6.2 Alarm Displays and Processing
Email: [email protected]
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
EF0
Opt External Flt
(Flashing)
Communication Option Card External
Fault
Check for an external condition.
An external fault condition was present.
Verify the parameters.
Verify communication signal.
EF3
Ext Fault S3
(Flashing)
EF4
Ext Fault S4
(Flashing)
EF5
Ext Fault S5
(Flashing)
EF6
Ext Fault S6
(Flashing)
EF7
Ext Fault S7
(Flashing)
EF8
Ext Fault S8
(Flashing)
External Fault at Terminal S3 - S8
Detected when terminals S3 - S8 (H1-01 to
H1-06) are programmed for external fault function that alarms only and continues to run the Drive.
An external fault condition exists that was connected to a multi-function digital input.
Eliminate the cause of an external fault condition.
E5
SI-T WDT Err
<3021>
E-15
SI-F/G Com Err
FAN
Cooling FAN Err
<3021>
SI-T Watchdog Error Detected
A watchdog error was detected when the
Run Command or a frequency reference was set from the option board and continuous operation was set for the E5 operation selection.
Synchronization error between the master controller and the
Drive for control data.
Check the communication timing (such as communications cycle, etc.).
Refer to SI-T manual for details.
Check the communications signals.
SI-F/G Communications Error Detected
A communication error is detected when a run command or frequency reference is set from the SI-F/G Option Card (b1-01=3, b1-02=3) and communication is lost.
Communication has been lost to the SI-F/G option card connected and b1-01=3 and/or b1-02=3.
Check the settings of b1-01 and b1-02.
Check the setting of F6-01.
Check the host side (master) communication configuration.
Drive’s Cooling Fan Fault
A cooling fan fault was detected.
This fault is detected when L8-32 is set to 0.
The Drive’s cooling fan has stopped.
Replace the cooling fan.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 11
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table 6.2 Alarm Displays and Processing (continued)
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
FBL
Feedback Loss
OH
Heatsnk Overtemp
(Flashing)
OH2
Over Heat 2
(Flashing)
PID Feedback Loss
This alarm occurs when PID Feedback Loss
Detection is programmed to alarm
(b5-12 = 1) and the PID feedback < PID feedback loss detection level (b5-13) for the
PID feedback loss detection time (b5-14).
Cooling Fin/Cooling Fin Fan Overheat
The temperature of the Drive’s heatsink exceeded the temperature programmed in parameter L8-02.
Enabled when L8-03=3.
PID Feedback source
(e.g. transducer, sensor, building automation signal) was not installed correctly or was not working.
Cooling fan(s) were not working, high ambient temperature, a heat source in close proximity to Drive present, or dirty heatsink.
Verify Drive is programmed to receive the PID Feedback source signal.
Check to ensure the PID
Feedback source is installed and working properly.
Check for dirt build-up on the fans and cooling fins.
Reduce the ambient temperature around the Drive.
Remove the heating unit.
Drive overheat alarm signal is input from a multi-function digital input terminal S3-S8
(H1-01 to H1-06) that is programmed for B: overheat alarm.
An external overheat condition exists that was connected to one of the multi-function input terminals S3 - S8.
Check for an external condition.
Verify the program parameters
H1-01 thru H1-06.
OH3
Motor Overheat 1
(Flashing)
Motor Overheating Alarm
Detected when A2 or A3, programmed for motor temperature (H3-09 or H3-05 = E), exceeds 1.17V for time L1-05 and
L1-03 = 3.
Overheating of the motor as measured by the motor thermistor.
Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load.
Recheck the accel/decel time
(C1-01 and C1-02).
Recheck the V/F pattern (E1-01 thru E1-13).
Recheck the motor rated current value (E2-01).
OL3
Overtorque Det 1
(Flashing)
OL4
Overtorque Det 2
(Flashing)
OS
Overspeed Det
(Flashing)
Overtorque Detection 1
Drive output current > L6-02 for more than the time set in L6-03 and L6-01 = 1 or 2.
Overtorque Detection 2
Drive output current > L6-05 for more than the time set in L6-06 and L6-04 = 1 or 2.
Motor was overloaded.
Motor was overloaded.
Ensure the values in L6-02 and
L6-03 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Ensure the values in L6-05 and
L6-06 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Overspeed
The motor speed feedback (U1-05) exceeded the value set in F1-08 for a time longer than the setting in F1-09.
Detected when A1-02 = 1 or 3 and F1-03 = 3.
Overshooting/Undershooting was occurring.
The reference was too high.
The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 were not appropriate.
Adjust the ASR settings in the C5 parameter group.
Check the reference circuit and reference gain.
Check the settings in F1-08 and
F1-09.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 12
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table 6.2 Alarm Displays and Processing (continued)
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
OV
DC Bus Overvolt
(Flashing)
PGO
PG Open
(Flashing)
DC Bus Overvoltage
The DC bus voltage has exceeded the trip point.
Default:
208-240Vac: Trip point is 410Vdc
480Vac: Trip point is 820Vdc
Detected when the Drive is in a stopped condition. E1-01 affects the trip level.
High input voltage at R/L1,
S/L2 and T/L3
The deceleration time is set too short.
Check the input circuit and reduce the input power to within specifications.
Extend the time in C1-02 or other active decel settings used such as
C1-04, C1-06, C1-08 or C1-09
(time).
Power factor correction capacitors are being used on the input or output to the Drive.
Remove the power factor correction capacitors.
PG Disconnection (Detection with
Software)
Detected when F1-02 = 3 and A1-02 = 1 or 3.
Detected when no PG (encoder) pulses are received for a time longer than the setting in
F1-14.
There was a break in the PG wiring.
The PG was wired incorrectly.
Power wasn’t being supplied to the PG.
Brake mechanism is possibly engaged.
Fix the broken / disconnected wiring.
Fix the wiring.
Supply power to the PG properly.
Check for open circuit when using brake (motor).
PGO H
PG Open Hardware
<3021>
PG Disconnection (Detection with
Hardware)
Detected when F1-02 = 3 and F1-25 = 1
(PG-T2 or PG-Z2) and / or F1-26 = 1
(PG-Z2) and A1-02 = 1 or 3.
Detected when no PG (encoder) pulses are received.
There was a break in the PG wiring.
Fix the broken / disconnected wiring.
The PG was wired incorrectly.
Power wasn’t being supplied to the PG.
Brake mechanism is possibly engaged
Fix the wiring.
Supply power to the PG properly.
Check for open circuit when using brake (motor).
UL3
Undertorq Det 1
(Flashing)
UL4
Undertorq Det 2
(Flashing)
UV
DC Bus Undervolt
(Flashing)
Undertorque Detection 1
Drive output current < L6-02 for more than the time set in L6-03 when L6-01 = 5 or 6.
Undertorque Detection 2
Drive output current < L6-05 for more than the time set in L6-06 when L6-04 = 5 or 6.
Motor was underloaded.
Motor was underloaded.
Ensure the values in L6-02 and
L6-03 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Ensure the values in L6-05 and
L6-06 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
DC Bus Undervoltage
The DC bus voltage is
≤
L2-05.
Default:
208-240Vac: Trip point is 190Vdc
480Vac: Trip point is 380Vdc
Detected while Drive is in a stopped condition.
Low input voltage was at R/L1,
S/L2 and T/L3.
The acceleration time was set too short.
Voltage fluctuation of the input power was too large.
Check the input circuit and increase the input power to within specifications.
Extend the time in C1-01 or other active accel settings used such as
C1-03, C1-05, or C1-07 (time).
Check the input voltage.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 13
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table 6.2 Alarm Displays and Processing (continued)
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
UV2
CTL PS Undervolt
UV3
MC Answerback
Control Power Supply Undervoltage
Undervoltage of the control circuit when running.
Cycle power to the Drive.
External load was pulling down the Drive’s power supplies, or there was an internal short in the power/gate Drive board.
Repair or replace the Power PCB/
Gate Drive PCB.
Remove all control wiring and test Drive.
Soft Charge Circuit Fault
The pre-charge contactor opened while the
Drive was running.
Cycle power to the Drive.
Contacts on the soft charge contactor were dirty and the soft charge contactor does not function mechanically.
Check the condition of the soft charge contactor.
Repair or replace the Power PCB/
Gate Drive PCB.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 14
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Operator Programming Errors (OPE)
An Operator Programming Error (OPE) occurs when an inapplicable parameter is set or an individual parameter setting is inappropriate. The Drive will not operate until the parameter is set correctly; however, no alarm or fault outputs will occur. If an OPE occurs, change the appropriate parameter by checking the cause shown in Table 6.3. When OPE error is displayed, press the ENTER key to display U1-34 (OPE fault constant). This monitor will display the parameter that is causing the OPE error.
Digital Operator
Display
OPE01 kVA Selection
OPE02
Limit
OPE03
Terminal
OPE05
Sequence Select
OPE06
PG Opt Missing
OPE07
Analog Selection
Multi-function Input Selection
Error
Run Command Selection Error
The run command selection parameter b1-02 is set to 3 but no option board is installed.
Multi-function Analog Input
Error
Description
Drive kVA Setting Error
Table 6.3 OPE Error Displays
Parameter Setting Out of Range
Control Method Selection Error
Cause
Corrective
Action
The control board was replaced and the kVA parameter is set incorrectly.
Enter the correct kVA setting (o2-04) by referring to the Drive model number in Appendix B - Table B.1.
Parameter setting was outside of the allowable range. In some cases, parameter range may depend on other parameter settings.
For example, when E2-03
≥
E2-01.
Verify the parameter settings.
Duplicate functions were selected, up/down commands or trim control increase/decrease were not set simultaneously. Speed search from maximum frequency and set frequency were set simultaneously.
PID is enabled and up input is programmed. More than one of the speed search inputs were set simultaneously, or HSB and KEB functions were set simultaneously.
N.O. and N.C. fast stop are both set, or Drive enable and DC injection input are both set.
Verify parameter settings
(H1-01 to H1-06).
Serial communication or other option board is not installed, or is installed incorrectly.
Verify that the option board is installed. Remove power to the Drive and connect the option board once more.
Control method with PG feedback was selected A1-02 = 1 or 3, but a
PG option board is not installed, or is installed incorrectly.
Verify the control method in A1-02 and/or the installation of the PG option board.
Duplicate functions were selected for the analog inputs (A2 and A3) or for either of the analog inputs
(A2 or A3) and the pulse input (RP) selection.
H3-09 = B and H6-01 = 1
H3-09 = C and H6-01 = 2 b1-01 (Reference Selection) was set to 4 (pulse input), and H6-01 (Pulse
Train Input) was set to a value other than 0 (frequency reference).
Check parameters b1-01, H3-05,
H3-09, and H6-01 and correct the errors.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 15
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table 6.3 OPE Error Displays (continued)
Digital Operator
Display
Description Cause
Corrective
Action
OPE08
Constant Selection
OPE09
PID Selection
OPE10
V/F Ptrn Setting
Carrier Frequency Parameter
Setting Error occurs when:
C6-05 > 6 and C6-04 > C6-03
OPE11
CarrFrq/On-Delay or
C6-01 = 0 and C6-02
=
0,1 or
Parameter setting was incorrect.
ERR
EEPROM R/W Err
C6-01 = 1 and C6-02 = 0 thru 6, F
EEPROM Write Error
The NV-RAM data does not match the EEPROM data.
Power supply is turned OFF.
End - 3
Data Invalid
Function Selection Error
PID Control Setup Error
V/F Parameter Setting Error
Data Invalid
A setting has been made that was not applicable in the current control method. Example: a function used only in open-loop vector control was selected while in V/F control.
Verify the control method and the function in question.
The following settings have been made at the same time: b5-01 (PID Control Method
Selection) has been set to a value other than 0.
b5-15 (PID Sleep Function Start
Level) has been set to a value other than 0.
b1-03 (Stopping Method Selection) was set to 2 or 3.
Check parameters b5-01, b5-15, and b1-03 and correct the error.
V/F parameter settings were out of range.
Check parameters (E1-04 ~ E1-11).
A minimum frequency value is set higher than the maximum frequency.
Rated current set value is set too high
Check the parameter settings and correct the errors.
Cycle power to the Drive.
Do a factory initialization (A1-03).
Check input data (especially, motor output current and motor rated current value).
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 16
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Auto-Tuning Faults
Auto-Tuning faults are shown below. When the following faults are detected, the fault is displayed on the Digital Operator and the motor coasts to a stop. No fault or alarm outputs will occur.
Table 6.4 Auto-Tuning Fault Displays and Processing
Digital Operator
Display
Description Probable Cause Corrective Action
Er - 01
Fault
Er - 02
Minor Fault
Er - 03
STOP key
Er - 04
Resistance
Er - 05
No-Load Current
STOP Key Input
Line-to-Line Resistance Fault
No-Load Current Fault
Er - 08
Rated Slip
Er - 09
Accelerate
Er - 11
Motor Speed
Motor Data Fault
Alarm
Rated Slip Fault
Acceleration Fault
Detected only for rotational Auto-
Tuning.
Motor Speed Fault
Detected only for rotational Auto-
Tuning.
•There is an error in the data input for Auto-Tuning.
•There is an error in the relationship between the motor output and the motor rated current.
•There is an error between the noload current setting and the input motor rated current (when Auto-
Tuning only line-to-line resistance is performed for vector control).
• Check Auto-Tuning input data (T1 parameters).
• Check Drive and motor capacity for compatibility.
• Check motor rated current and no-load current (E2-03 and
T1-04).
An alarm is detected during Auto-
Tuning.
• Check Auto-Tuning input data (T1 parameters).
• Check output/motor wiring.
• Check the load.
The STOP key is pressed during
Auto-Tuning, and the Auto-Tuning is interrupted.
–
Auto-Tuning is not completed within the specified time.
The Auto-Tuning result is outside the parameter setting range.
• Check Auto-Tuning input data (T1 parameters).
• Check motor wiring.
• If the motor and the machine are connected, disconnect the motor from the machine.
• For Er-08, if the setting of T1-03 is higher than the Drive’s input voltage, change the input voltage setting.
The motor did not accelerate in the specified time (C1-01 + 10 seconds).
• Increase C1-01 (Accel Time 1)
• Increase L7-01 and L7-02
(Forward/Reverse Torque Limits) if they are low.
• If the motor and load are connected, disconnect the motor from the load.
The torque reference exceeded 100% during acceleration. Detected when
A1-02 = 2 or 3 (vector control).
• Increase C1-01 (Accel Time 1)
• Check the input data [particularly the number of PG pulses (F1-01) and the number of motor poles
(E2-04)].
• If the motor and load are connected, disconnect the motor from the load.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 17
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table 6.4 Auto-Tuning Fault Displays and Processing (continued)
Digital Operator
Display
Description Probable Cause Corrective Action
Er - 12
I-det. Circuit
Er - 13
Leakage
Inductance Fault
End - 1
V/F Over Setting
End - 2
Saturation
Current Detection Fault
Leakage Inductance Fault
V/F Settings Alarm
Displayed after Auto-Tuning is complete.
Motor Core Saturation Fault
Detected only for rotational
Auto-Tuning.
End - 3
Rated FLA Alm
Rated Current Setting Alarm
Displayed after Auto-Tuning is complete.
End - 4
Slip Lower Limit
<3021>
Slip Lower Limit
Adjusted slip value fell below the lower limit.
•Current exceeded the motor rated current.
•Any of U/TI, V/T2, and W/T3 has open-phase.
Auto-Tuning did not finish within the set time.
Auto-Tuning result is outside the parameter setting range.
• Check that the motor is unloaded
(uncoupled and brake is released).
• Check Drive wiring and mounting.
• Check the motor connections for continuity (on Drive output terminals and in motor junction box).
• Check Auto-Tuning input data (T1 parameters).
• Check motor wiring for proper connection configuration.
The torque reference exceeded
100%, and the no-load current exceeded 70% during Auto-Tuning.
• Check and correct the motor settings (T1 parameters).
• If the motor is coupled to the load, disconnect the motor from the load.
During Auto-Tuning, the measured values of motor iron-core saturation coefficient 1 and 2 (E2-07 and
E2-08) exceeded its setting range. A temporary value was set:
E2-07 = 0.75, E2-08 = 0.50.
• Check Auto-Tuning input data (T1 parameters).
• Check the motor wiring.
• If the motor and the load are connected, disconnect the motor from the load.
During Auto-Tuning, the measured value of motor rated current (E2-01) was greater than the set value.
• Check the motor rated current value (E2-01).
During stationary Auto-Tuning, the slip value has fallen to 0.2 Hz or below.
• Check the input data.
• Perform a Rotational Auto-Tuning. if possible. If not possible, perform a stationary Auto-Tuning 2.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 18
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Digital Operator COPY Function Faults
These faults can occur during the Digital Operator COPY function. When a fault occurs, the fault content is displayed on the operator. A fault does not activate the fault contact output or alarm output.
Function
READ
Function
COPY
Function
Verify
Function
Table 6.5 Digital Operator COPY Function Faults
Digital Operator Display Probable Causes Corrective Action
PRE
READ IMPOSSIBLE
IFE
READ DATA ERROR o3-01 was set to 1 to write parameters when the Digital Operator was write-protected
(o3-02 = 0).
Set o3-02 to 1 to enable writing parameters into the Digital Operator.
The data file read from the Drive was of the wrong size indicating corrupted data.
• Retry the Read (o3-01=1).
• Check the Digital Operator cable.
• Replace Digital Operator.
Low Drive voltage has been detected.
Check the Drive’s main incoming voltage and verify control wiring is correct.
RDE
DATA ERROR
CPE
ID UNMATCHED
An attempted write of the Drive data to the
Digital Operator’s EEPROM failed.
• Repeat the read.
• Replace Digital Operator.
The Drive type or software number was different than the stored data in the Digital
Operator.
Use stored data for the F7 Drive and software number (U1-14).
VAE
INV. KVA UNMATCH
The capacity of the Drive and the capacity of the stored data are different.
Use stored data for the same Drive capacity (o2-04).
CRE
CONTROL UNMATCHED
The control method of the Drive and the control method of the stored data in the
Digital Operator were different.
Use stored data for the same control method (A1-02).
CYE
COPY ERROR
CSE
SUM CHECK ERROR
VYE
VERIFY ERROR
A parameter setting written to the Drive was different than the setting stored in the
Digital Operator.
Retry the Copy function (o3-01 = 2).
Upon completion of the COPY function, the Drive’s data checksum was different than the Digital Operator’s data checksum.
Retry the Copy function (o3-01 = 2).
The set value of the Digital Operator and the Drive do not match.
Retry the Verify function (o3-01 = 3).
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 19
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Troubleshooting
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Due to parameter setting errors, faulty wiring, etc., the Drive and motor may not operate as expected when the system is started. If this occurs, use this section as a reference and apply the appropriate measures.
If a fault or alarm is displayed on the Digital Operator, refer to Table 6.1 and Table 6.2.
If A Parameter Cannot Be Set
Use the following information if a Drive parameter cannot be set.
The display does not change when the INCREASE and DECREASE keys are pressed.
The following causes are possible:
The Drive is operating (Drive mode).
There are some parameters that cannot be set during operation. Remove the run command and then set the parameter.
Parameter write enable is input.
This occurs when "parameter write enable" (set value: 1B) is set for a multi-function digital input terminal (H1-01 to H1-06).
If the terminal is open, the Drive parameters cannot be changed. Close the terminal and then set the parameters.
Passwords do not match (Only when a password is set.)
If the parameter A1-04 (Password) and A1-05 (Password Setting) settings are different, the parameters for the initialize mode cannot be changed. Enter the correct password in A1-04.
If you cannot remember the password, display A1-05 (Password Setting) by pressing the Shift/Reset Key and the MENU Key simultaneously while in the A1-04 display. Reset the password and input the reset password in parameter A1-04.
OPE01 through OPE11 is displayed.
The set value for the parameter is wrong. Refer to Table 6.3 OPE Error Displays in this chapter and correct the setting.
CPF00 or CPF01 is displayed.
This is a Digital Operator communication error. The connection between the Digital Operator and the Drive may be faulty.
Remove the Digital Operator and then re-install it.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 20
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
If the Motor Does Not Operate Properly
The following causes are possible:
Ensure the Digital Operator is securely connected to the Drive.
The motor does not operate when the RUN key on the Digital Operator is pressed.
The following causes are possible:
The Local/Remote mode is not selected properly.
The status of the SEQ and REF REMOTE LEDs should be OFF for Local mode. Press the LOCAL/REMOTE key to switch.
The Drive is not in Drive mode.
If the Drive is not in Drive mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the MENU key once and then press the
DATA/ENTER key. The Drive is now in Drive mode.
The Speed Command is too low.
If the Speed Command is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Drive will not operate.
Raise the Speed Command to at least the minimum output frequency.
The motor does not operate when an external run command is input.
The following causes are possible:
The Drive is not in Drive mode.
If the Drive is not in Drive mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the MENU key once and then press the
DATA/ENTER key. The Drive is now in Drive mode.
The Local/Remote mode is not selected properly.
The status of the SEQ and REF REMOTE LEDs should be ON for Local mode. Press the LOCAL/REMOTE key to switch.
The Speed Command is too low.
If the Speed Command is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Drive will not operate. Raise the Speed Command to at least the minimum output frequency.
The motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected.
The load may be too large. The motor’s responsiveness limit may be exceeded if it is accelerated too rapidly by the Drive’s stall prevention function or automatic torque boost function. Increase the acceleration time (CI-01) or reduce the motor load.
Also, consider increasing the motor size.
The motor only rotates in one direction.
"Reverse run prohibited" may be selected. If b1-04 (Prohibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 (reverse run prohibited), the
Drive will not accept any reverse run commands.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 21
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
If The Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed
If the motor rotates in the wrong direction, the motor output wiring may be incorrect. When the Drive operates in the forward direction, the forward direction of the motor will depend on the manufacturer and the motor type, so be sure to check the motor specification.
The direction of motor rotation can be reversed by switching any two wires among U/TI, V/T2, and W/T3. If using an encoder, the polarity will also have to be switched.
If the Motor Stalls or Acceleration is Slow
The following causes are possible:
The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low.
If the value set for L3-02 (Stall Prevention Acceleration Level) is set too low, the acceleration time will be increased. Check that the set value is suitable and that the load is not too large for the motor.
The stall prevention level during running is too low.
If the value set for L3-06 (Stall Prevention Level during Running) is too low, the motor speed and torque will be limited. Check that the values set are suitable.
If the Motor Operates at a Higher Speed Than the Speed Command
The following causes are possible:
PID is enabled.
If the PID mode is enabled (b5-01 = 1 to 4), the Drive output frequency will change to regulate the process variable to the desired setpoint. The PID can command a speed up to maximum output frequency (E1-04).
If There is Low Speed Control Accuracy Above Base Speed in Open-loop
Vector Control Method
The Drive’s maximum output voltage is determined by its input voltage (For example, if 230Vac is input, then the maximum output voltage will be 230Vac). Vector control uses voltage to control the currents within the motor. If the vector control voltage reference value exceeds the Drive output voltage capability, the speed control accuracy will decrease because the motor currents cannot be properly controlled. Use a motor with a low rated voltage compared to the input voltage, or change to flux vector control.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 22
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
If Motor Deceleration is Slow
The following causes are possible:
The deceleration time is long even when a braking resistor is connected.
The following causes are possible:
“Stall prevention during deceleration enabled” is set.
When a braking resistor is connected, set parameter L3-04 (Stall Prevention Selection During Deceleration) to 0 (disabled) or
3 (with braking resistor). When this parameter is set to 1 (enabled, factory default), the stall prevention function will interfere with the braking resistor.
The deceleration time setting is too long.
Check the active deceleration time setting (parameters C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, or C1-08).
Motor torque is insufficient.
If the parameters are correct and there is no overvoltage fault, then the motor’s power may be insufficient. Consider increasing the motor and Drive’s capacity.
The torque limit has been reached.
When a torque limit is reached (L7-01 to L7-04), the motor torque will be limited. This can cause the deceleration time to be extended. Check to be sure that the value set for the torque limit is suitable.
If a torque limit has been set for the multi-function analog input terminals A2 or A3, parameters H3-09 or H3-05 (set value:
10, 11, 12, or 15), check to be sure that the analog input value is suitable.
If the Vertical-axis Load Drops (Droops) When a Mechanical Brake is Applied
The brake sequence is incorrect.
To ensure that the brake holds, set frequency detection 2 (H2-01 = 5) for the multi-function contact output terminals (M1 and
M2) so that the contacts will turn OFF when the output frequency is greater than L4-01 (3.0 to 5.0Hz). (The contacts will turn
ON below L4-01).
There is a hysteresis in the frequency detection 2 function (i.e., a frequency detection width, L4-02 = 2.0Hz). Change the setting to approximately 0.5Hz if there is a load droop during stop. Do not use the multi-function contact output run signal
(H2-01 = 0) for the brake ON / OFF signal.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 23
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
If the Motor Overheats
The following causes are possible:
The load is too large.
If the motor load is too large and the torque exceeds the motor's rated torque, the motor may overheat. Reduce the load amount by either reducing the load or increasing the acceleration/deceleration times. Also consider increasing the motor size.
The ambient temperature is too high.
The motor rating is determined by a particular ambient operating temperature range. The motor will overheat if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment where the maximum ambient operating temperature rating is exceeded.
Lower the motor's ambient temperature to within its acceptable range.
Auto-Tuning has not been performed for Vector Control
Vector Control may not perform optimally if Auto-Tuning has not been performed. Therefore, perform Auto-Tuning.
Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection (A1-02) to V/F Control (0 or 1).
If Peripheral Devices Like PLCs or Others are Influenced by Starting or
Running Drive
The following solutions are possible:
1. Change the Drive's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. This will help to reduce the amount of transistor switching noise.
2. Install an Input Noise Filter at the Drive's input power terminals.
3. Install an Output Noise Filter at the Drive's motor terminals.
4. Use conduit. Electrical noise can be shielded by metal, so run the Drive’s power leads in a conduit or shielded cable.
5. Ground the Drive and motor.
6. Separate main circuit wiring from control wiring.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 24
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Drive is Run
The Drive’s output is a series of high frequency pulses (PWM), so there is a certain amount of leakage current. This may cause the ground fault interrupter to operate and cut off the power supply. Change to a ground fault interrupter with a higher leakage current detection level (i.e., a sensitivity current of 200mA or greater per Unit, with an operating time of 0.1s or more), or one that incorporates high frequency countermeasures (i.e., one designed for use with a Drive). It will also help to change the
Drive's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. In addition, remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened.
If There is Mechanical Vibration
Use the following information when there is mechanical vibration.
The application is making unusual sounds.
The following causes are possible:
There may be resonance between the mechanical system's natural frequency and the carrier frequency.
This is characterized by the motor running with no noise generation, but the machinery vibrates with a high-pitched whine. To prevent this type of resonance, adjust the carrier frequency with parameters C6-02 to C6-05.
There may be resonance between the mechanical system’s natural frequency and the output frequency of the Drive.
To prevent this from occurring, use the jump frequency function in parameters d3-01 to d3-04, or have the driven motor and load balanced to reduce vibration.
Oscillation and hunting occur with V/F control.
The torque compensation parameter settings may be incorrect for the machine. Adjust parameters C4-01 (Torque
Compensation Gain), C4-02 (Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Parameter), n1-02 (Hunting Prevention Gain),
C2-01 (S-curve Characteristic Time at Acceleration Start), and C3-02 (Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time) in order.
Lower the gain parameters and raise the primary delay time parameters.
Oscillation and hunting occur with V/F w/PG control.
The Speed Control Loop Gain ASR) parameter setting (C5-01) may be incorrect for the machine. Change the gain to a more effective level.
If the oscillation cannot be eliminated in this way, set the Hunting Prevention Selection n1-01 = 0 (disabled). Then try re-adjusting the gain.
Oscillation and hunting occur with Open-Loop Vector control.
The torque compensation parameter settings may be incorrect for the machine. Adjust parameters C4-01 (Torque
Compensation Gain), C4-02 (Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Parameter), C2-01 (S-curve Characteristic Time at
Acceleration Start), and C3-02 (Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time) in order. Lower the gain parameters and raise the primary delay time parameters.
Vector Control may not perform optimally if Auto-Tuning has not been performed. Therefore, perform Auto-Tuning.
Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection (A1-02) to V/F Control (0 or 1).
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 25
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Oscillation and hunting occur with Flux Vector control.
The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Adjust the speed control loop (ASR) gain (C5-01). If the oscillation points overlap with those of the machine and cannot be eliminated, increase the ASR primary time delay constant (C5-06), and then readjust the ASR gain (C5-01).
Vector Control may not perform optimally if Auto-Tuning has not been performed. Therefore, perform Auto-Tuning.
Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection (A1-02) to V/F Control (0 or 1).
Oscillation and hunting occur with PID control.
If there is oscillation or hunting during PID control, check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust the P, I, and D parameters.
• Disable Integral (I) and Derivative time (D) control.
•
•
•
Reduce the proportional gain (P) until hunting stops.
Reintroduce the integral function, starting with long integral time values, to eliminate the P offset.
Reintroduce the derivative time and adjust with small increments to eliminate oscillation.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 26
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
If the Motor Rotates Even When Drive Output is Stopped
If the motor rotates even when the Drive is stopped due to a large internal load, DC-injection braking may be necessary. Adjust the DC injection braking as follows:
• Increase parameter b2-04 (DC Injection Braking (initial excitation) Time at Stop).
• Increase parameter b2-02 (DC Injection Braking Current).
If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to the Frequency Reference
Use the following information if the output frequency does not match the frequency reference.
The frequency reference is within the jump frequency range.
When the jump frequency function is used, the output frequency does not change within the jump frequency range. Check to be sure that the Jump Frequency (d3-01 to d3-03) and Jump Frequency Width (d3-04) settings are suitable.
The frequency reference upper limit has been reached.
The output frequency upper limit is determined by the following formula:
Freq Ref Upper Limit = Maximum Output Frequency (E1-04)
×
Frequency Reference Upper Limit (d2-01) / 100
Check to be sure that the parameter E1-04 and d2-01 settings are suitable.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 27
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Main Circuit Test Procedure
Before attempting any troubleshooting checks, make sure that the three-phase power is disconnected and locked out. With power removed from the unit, the DC bus capacitors will stay charged for several minutes. The Charge LED in the Drive will glow red until the DC bus voltage is below 10Vdc. To ensure that the DC bus is completely discharged, measure between the positive and negative bus with a DC voltmeter set to the highest scale.
Check
Measure DC Bus Voltage
Input Diodes
(D1-D12 or Q1)
Table 6.6 Main Circuit Test Procedure
Procedure
1. Set the digital multi-meter to its highest Vdc scale.
2. Measure between
⊕
1 and (-) for the following check:
Place the positive (red) meter lead on
⊕
1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on (-).
3. If the measured voltage is < 10Vdc, it is safe to work inside the Drive.
If not, wait until the DC Bus has completely discharged.
The input diodes rectify or transform the three-phase input AC voltage into a DC voltage.
1. Set a digital multi-meter to the Diode Check setting.
2. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal R/L1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal
⊕
1.
Expected reading is about 0.5Vdc.
3. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal S/L2.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal
⊕
1.
Expected reading is about 0.5Vdc.
4. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal T/L3.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal
⊕
1.
Expected reading is about 0.5Vdc.
5. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal R/L1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal (-).
Expected reading is OL displayed.
6. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal S/L2.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal (-).
Expected reading is OL displayed.
7. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal T/L3.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal (-).
Expected reading is OL displayed.
8. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal (-).
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal R/L1.
Expected reading is about 0.5Vdc.
9. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal (-).
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal S/L2.
Expected reading is about 0.5Vdc.
10. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal (-).
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal T/L3.
Expected reading is about 0.5Vdc.
11. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal
⊕
1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal R/L1.
Expected reading is OL displayed.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 28
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Check
Input Diodes
(D1-D12 or Q1)
Soft Charge Resistor Check
(R1, R2, 6PCB)
Soft Charge Contactor
(K1)
DC Bus Fuse
(F1)
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table 6.6 Main Circuit Test Procedure (continued)
Procedure
12. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal
⊕
1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal S/L2.
Expected reading is OL displayed.
13. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal
⊕
1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal T/L3.
Expected reading is OL displayed.
The soft charge resistor works in conjunction with the soft charge contactor to slowly charge the
DC bus capacitors to minimize the inrush current when power is applied to the Drive.
1. Conduct a visual inspection. Check for physical damage.
2. Set a digital multi-meter to the R x 1 scale.
3. If the resistor is damaged, the measured value will be infinite
Ω
.
The purpose of the soft charge contactor is to bypass the soft charge resistor after the DC bus voltage has reached its normal operating level.
1.
Conduct a visual inspection. Check for physical damage.
2.
Set a digital multi-meter to the R x 1 scale.
3.
On Drives with a board-mounted contactor, verify that each contact resistance measures infinite
Ω
.
4.
On Drives without a board-mounted contactor, press the plunger in, and verify that each contact measures 0
Ω
.
5.
On Drives without a board-mounted contactor, release the plunger, and verify that the resistance is the ohmic value of the soft charge resistor.
6.
On Drives with a board-mounted contactor, verify that the contactor coil measures about 300
Ω
.
The coil can be tested by applying the appropriate voltage to verify the contacts change states.
7.
On Drives without a board-mounted contactor, verify that the 230Vac contactor coil measures about 175
Ω
. The coil can be tested by applying the appropriate voltage to verify the contacts change states.
8.
On Drives without a board-mounted contactor, verify that the 24Vdc auxiliary coil measures about 2.2M
Ω
. The coil can be tested by applying the appropriate voltage to verify the contacts change states.
The DC bus fuse is located in the negative portion of the DC Bus. The DC bus fuse is used to protect the main circuit components if the output transistors short. If the DC bus fuse is open, at least one of the output transistors has failed. When a transistor fails, there is a short between the positive and negative portions of the DC Bus. The DC bus fuse does not protect the transistors, but protects the rest of the main circuit from the high current present during a short. Never replace the
DC bus fuse without first checking all of the output transistors.
1. Set a digital multi-meter to the R x 1 scale.
2. Place one lead of the multi-meter on one side of the fuse and place the other lead of the multimeter on the other side of the fuse.
3. If the fuse is good, the measured value will be 0
Ω
.
If the fuse is bad, the measured value will be infinite
Ω
.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 29
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Check
Output Transistors
(Q1-Q12)
Control Power Fuse
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table 6.6 Main Circuit Test Procedure (continued)
Procedure
The output transistors are used to switch the DC bus voltage to allow current to flow to the motor.
The following checks will read erroneously if the DC bus fuse is open.
1. Set a digital multi-meter to the Diode Check setting.
2. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal U/T1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal
⊕
1.
Expected reading is about 0.5Vdc.
3. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal V/T2.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal
⊕
1.
Expected reading is about 0.5Vdc.
4. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal W/T3.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal
⊕
1.
Expected reading is about 0.5Vdc.
5. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal U/T1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal (-).
Expected reading is OL displayed.
6. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal V/T2.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal (-).
Expected reading is OL displayed.
7. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal W/T3.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal (-).
Expected reading is OL displayed.
8. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal (-).
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal U/T1.
Expected reading is about 0.5Vdc.
9. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal (-).
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal V/T2.
Expected reading is about 0.5Vdc.
10. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal (-).
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal W/T3.
Expected reading is about 0.5Vdc.
11. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal
⊕
1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal U/T1.
Expected reading is OL displayed.
12. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal
⊕
1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal V/T2.
Expected reading is OL displayed.
13. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal
⊕
1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal W/T3.
Expected reading is OL displayed.
All Drives have a Control Power Fuse. The fuse is located on either the Power PCB (3PCB) or the
Gate Drive PCB (3PCB). The Control Power Fuse protects the primary switching mode power supply.
1. Set a digital multi-meter to the R x 1 scale.
2. Place one lead of the multi-meter on one side of the fuse and place the other lead of the multimeter on the other side of the fuse.
3. If the fuse is good, the measured value will be 0
Ω
.
If the fuse is bad, the measured value will be infinite
Ω
.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 30
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Check
24Vdc Cooling Fans
(Heat Sink & Internal)
230/240Vac Cooling Fans
(Heat Sink)
Cooling Fan Fuse
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table 6.6 Main Circuit Test Procedure (continued)
Procedure
The Heat Sink & Internal Cooling Fans cool the heat sink as well as the output transistor modules of the Drive.
1. Conduct a visual inspection to ensure the fan turns freely.
2. If there is no physical evidence that the fan is bad, the fan motor can be checked with a
digital multi-meter.
3. Set the digital multi-meter to the R x 1 scale.
4. Measure across the fan motor terminals. If 0
Ω
are measured, conclude that the fan motor is shorted. If infinite
Ω
are measured, conclude that the fan motor is burned open.
5. If the fan is not working, then disconnect the fan and apply 24Vdc to the fan to test the motor.
The Heat Sink Cooling Fans cool the heat sink to remove heat from the Drive.
1. Conduct a visual inspection to ensure the fan turns freely.
2. If there is no physical evidence that the fan is bad, the motor can be checked with a digital multi-meter.
3. Set a digital multi-meter to the R x 1 scale.
4. Measure across the fan motor terminals. If the fan motor is good, the measured value should be about 500
Ω
. If 0
Ω
are measured, conclude that the fan motor is shorted. If infinite ohms are measured, conclude that the fan motor is burned open.
5. If the fan is not working, then disconnect the fan and apply 230/240Vac to the fan to test the motor.
Large Drive units contain a Cooling Fan Fuse. It is located on either the Gate Drive Board (3PCB) or the Tap Change Board (8PCB). If the Cooling Fan Fuse is open, then the 230/240Vac cooling fans may be defective.
1. Set a digital multi-meter to the R x 1 scale.
2. Place one lead of the multi-meter on one side of the fuse and place the other lead of the multimeter on the other side of the fuse.
3. If the fuse is good, the measured value will be 0
Ω
. If the fuse is bad, the measured value will be infinite
Ω
.
Drive Date Stamp Information
This information is used to determine when a Drive was built to see if it is within its warranty period. The date stamp is located on the lower right side of the Drive.
PRD
INSP2
YEA Production
Manufacture Date
Inspector Number
Fig 6.1 Date Stamp Location
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 31
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Notes:
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 6 - 32
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Chapter 7
Maintenance
This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection of the Drive. Please refer to these instructions to ensure that the Drive receives the proper maintenance to maintain overall performance.
Periodic Inspection ............................................................ 7-2
Preventive Maintenance.................................................... 7-3
Periodic Maintenance of Parts .......................................... 7-4
Heatsink Cooling Fan Replacement.................................. 7-5
Removing and Mounting the Terminal Card...................... 7-7
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Maintenance 7 - 1
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Periodic Inspection
•
•
Check the following items during periodic maintenance.
•
•
The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises.
There should be no abnormal heat generation from the Drive or motor.
The ambient temperature should be within the Drive specification of -10
°
C to 40
°
C (14
°
F to 104
°
F).
The output current value shown on U1-03 should not be higher than the motor or Drive rated current for an extended period of time.
• The cooling fan in the Drive should be operating normally.
Before attempting any maintenance checks, make sure that the three-phase power is disconnected and locked out. With power removed from the unit, the DC bus capacitors will stay charged for several minutes. The Charge LED in the Drive will glow red until the DC bus voltage is below 10Vdc. To ensure that the DC bus is completely discharged, measure between the positive and negative bus with a DC voltmeter set to the highest scale. Be sure not to touch terminals immediately after the power has been turned off. Doing so can result in electric shock. Please refer to Warnings starting on page i.
Item
External terminals, mounting bolts, connectors, etc.
Table 7.1 Periodic Inspections With no Power Applied
Inspection
Are all screws and bolts tight?
Are connectors tight?
Corrective Action
Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly.
Cooling fins Are the fins dirty or dusty?
Reconnect the loose connectors.
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using clean and dry air at a pressure between 55-85 psi.
Control PCB
Terminal PCB
Power PCB
Gate Drive PCBs
Input Diodes
IPMs
Output Transistors
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the PCBs?
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the modules or components?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using clean and dry air at a pressure between 55-85 psi. Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean.
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using clean and dry air at a pressure between 55-85 psi.
Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean.
DC bus capacitors
Are there any irregularities, such as discoloration or odor?
Replace the capacitors or Drive.
Apply power to the Drive and conduct the following inspection.
Item
Cooling fan(s)
Table 7.2 Periodic Inspections With Power Applied
Inspection
Is there any abnormal noise or vibration, or has the total operating time exceeded 20,000 hours. Check
U1-40 for elapsed cooling fan operation time.
Corrective Action
Replace Cooling Fan
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Maintenance 7 - 2
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Preventive Maintenance
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Inspection Points
General
AC Power Circuit &
Devices
Control Circuits
Cooling System
Keypad/Display
Item
Environment
Equipment
Table 7.3 Preventive Maintenance
AC Power Supply
Conductors & Wire
Connections
Transformers & Reactors
Terminal Blocks
DC Bus Capacitors
Relays & Contactors
Soft Charge Resistors
Operation
Cooling Fans/Fins & Heatsink
Digital Operator
Check Points
Ambient temperature
Humidity
Dust
Harmful gas
Oil mist
Abnormal vibration or noise
Main circuit & control voltage
Loose lugs, screws & wires
Hot spots on parts
Corrosion
Bent conductors
Breakage, cracking or discoloration
Check spacing
Discoloration or noise
Loose, damaged
Leakage
Ruptures, broken, expansion
Capacitance & insulation resistance
Noisy
Contact discoloration
Cracked
Discoloration
Speed reference voltage/current
I/O contact operation
Abnormal fan noise
Loose connectors
Free of accumulation
LEDs
Monitor display values
Key functionality
Clean
Every 3-6 Months
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Yearly
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
If the Drive is used under the following conditions, it may be necessary to inspect more often:
•
High ambient temperatures, humidity or altitudes above 3,300 feet.
•
Frequent starting and stopping.
•
Fluctuations of the AC power supply or load.
•
Excessive vibration and/or shock loading.
•
Poor environment, including dust, metal dust, salt, sulfuric acid, chlorine.
•
Poor storage conditions.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Maintenance 7 - 3
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Periodic Maintenance of Parts
In order to keep the Drive operating normally over a long period of time, and to prevent down time due to an unexpected failure, it is necessary to perform periodic inspections and replace parts according to their service life.
The data indicated in the following table is to be used as a general guideline only. Periodic inspection standards vary depending on the Drive's installation environment conditions and usage. The Drive's suggested maintenance periods are noted below.
Part
Cooling fan(s)
DC bus capacitors
Soft charge contactor
DC bus fuse
Control power fuse
Table 7.4 Part Replacement Guidelines
Standard Replacement Period
2 to 3 years (20,000 hours)
5 years
-
Replacement Method
Replace with new part.
Replace with new part.
(Determine need by inspection.)
Determine need by inspection.
10 years Replace with new part.
Replace with new board.
(Determine need by inspection.)
PCB capacitors 5 years
Note: The standard replacement period is based on the following usage conditions:
Ambient temperature:Yearly average of 86
°
F/ 30
°
C
Load factor: 80% maximum
Operating time: 12 hours maximum per day
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Maintenance 7 - 4
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
Heatsink Cooling Fan Replacement
Email: [email protected]
Models CIMR-F7U20P4 thru 2018 and 40P4 thru 4018
A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Drive.
If the Drive is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Drive, the cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Drive from the installation panel.
If the Drive is mounted with the heatsink external to the enclosure, the cooling fan can only be replaced by removing the Drive from the enclosure.
Removing the Heatsink Cooling Fan
1. Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan.
2. Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows “1” and then pull the fan out in the direction of arrow “2”.
3. Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the power connector. See Fig 7.1.
4. Open the fan cover on the left and right sides in the direction of arrows “3” and remove the fan cover from the fan.
3
3
Power
Connector
Fig 7.1 Cooling Fan Replacement Procedure
Installing the Heatsink Cooling Fan
1. Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan. Be sure that the air flow direction indicated by the arrows above faces into the
Drive.
2. Connect the power connector securely and place the power connector and cable into the fan cover.
3. Mount the fan cover on the Drive. Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on the Drive.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Maintenance 7 - 5
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Models CIMR-F7U2022 thru 2110 and 4030 thru 4300
These Drives have an internal cooling fan assembly and a heatsink cooling fan assembly. The heatsink cooling fan assembly is attached to the top of the heatsink inside the Drive. The cooling fan(s) can be replaced without removing the Drive from the installation panel.
Removing the Heatsink Cooling Fan Assembly
1. Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan assembly.
2. Remove the terminal cover, Drive cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the front of the Drive.
3. Remove the Control PCB bracket (if necessary) to which the cards are mounted. Remove all cables connected to the Control PCB and remove the cooling fan power connector from the fan board (13 PCB) positioned near the top of the Drive.
4. Remove the cooling fan power connectors from the gate drive board (3PCB) positioned at the back of the Drive.
5. Remove the fan assembly screws and pull out the fan assembly from the Drive.
6. Remove the cooling fan(s) from the fan assembly.
Mounting the Heatsink Cooling Fan Assembly
After attaching a new cooling fan, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the air flow goes toward the top of the Drive.
Control PCB bracket
Control PCB
Air flow direction
Fan cover
Connector
Gate driver
Fig 7.2 Cooling Fan Assembly Replacement Procedure
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Maintenance 7 - 6
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Removing and Mounting the Terminal Card
The terminal card can be removed and mounted without disconnecting the control wiring.
IMPORTANT
Always confirm that input power is removed and the Charge LED is not lit before removing or mounting the terminal card.
Removing the Terminal Card
1. Remove the terminal cover on the Drive.
2. Remove the Digital Operator and front cover from the Drive.
3. Remove the wires connected to FE and/or NC on the terminal card.
4. Loosen the mounting screws on the left and right sides of the terminal card until they are free. It is not necessary to remove the mounting screws completely. They are captive and self-rising.
5. Pull the terminal card out in the direction of the block arrow.
Mounting the Terminal Card
Reverse the removal procedure to mount the terminal card.
Confirm that the terminal card and the Control PCB properly meet at connector CN8 before insertion.
The connector pins may be damaged if the terminal card is forced into place, possibly preventing correct Drive operation.
FE NC CN8
Mounting
Screw
Mounting
Screw
Fig 7.3 Terminal Card Removal Procedure
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Maintenance 7 - 7
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Notes:
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Maintenance 7 - 8
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Appendix A
Parameters
This appendix lists all the parameter numbers and names, along with a description of each. The abbreviated name as it appears on the Digital Operator display/keypad is shown in bold type.
F7 Parameter List ............................................................... A-3
F7 Monitor List .................................................................. A-38
F7 Fault Trace List............................................................ A-41
F7 Fault History List.......................................................... A-41
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 1
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Some parameters in the following tables are not available for all Control Methods (A1-02). Use the key below to determine which parameters are available for the selected Control Method.
V/F
Q
V/F w/PG
Q
Open Loop Vector
A
Flux Vector
-
Q: Parameters which can be monitored and set in either Quick Setting or Advanced Programming Menu
A: Parameters which can be monitored and set in only Advanced Programming Menu
-: Parameters which cannot be monitored or set for the selected Control Method
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 2
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
F7 Parameter List
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
Initialization
A1-00
A1-01
Language Selection
Select Language
Access Level Selection
Access Level
Language selection for the Digital Operator.
This parameter is not reset to the factory setting by A1-03.
0: English
1: Japanese
2: Deutsch
3: Francais
4: Italiano
5: Espanol
6: Portugues
Selects which parameters are accessible via the Digital Operator.
0: Operation Only
1: User Level (only available if A2 parameters have been set)
2: Advanced Level
A1-02
A1-03
A1-04
A1-05
Control Method Selection
Control Method
Initialize Parameters
Init Parameters
Password 1
Enter Password
Password 2
Select Password
Selects the Control Method of the Drive.
0: V/F control without PG
1: V/F control with PG
2: Open Loop Vector
3: Flux Vector (Closed Loop Vector)
Used to return all parameters to their factory or user default settings. (Initializes and then returns A1-03 to zero.)
0: No Initialize
1110: User Initialize (The user must first set their own parameter
values and then store them using parameter o2-03.)
2220: 2-Wire Initialization
3330: 3-Wire Initialization
When the value set into A1-04 does NOT match the value set into
A1-05, parameters A1-01 thru A1-03 and A2-01 thru A2-32 cannot be changed. All other parameters as determined by A1-01 can be changed. Parameter A1-05 can be accessed by pressing the MENU key while holding the RESET key.
User Parameters
A2-01
A2-02
A2-03
A2-04
A2-05
A2-06
A2-07
A2-08
User Parameter 1
User Param 1
User Parameter 2
User Param 2
User Parameter 3
User Param 3
User Parameter 4
User Param 4
User Parameter 5
User Param 5
User Parameter 6
User Param 6
User Parameter 7
User Param 7
User Parameter 8
User Param 8
Selects the parameters to be available in the User Access Level
(A1-01 = 1). These parameters are not related to the User Initialize function.
A2-09
User Parameter 9
User Param 9
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
0 to 6
0 to 2
0 to 3
0 to
3330
0 to 9999
0 to 9999 b1-01 to o3-02
0
2
2
0
0
0
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 3
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Description
A2-10
A2-11
A2-12
A2-13
A2-14
A2-15
A2-16
A2-17
A2-18
A2-19
A2-20
A2-21
A2-22
A2-23
A2-24
A2-25
User Parameter 10
User Param 10
User Parameter 11
User Param 11
User Parameter 12
User Param 12
User Parameter 13
User Param 13
User Parameter 14
User Param 14
User Parameter 15
User Param 15
User Parameter 16
User Param 16
User Parameter 17
User Param 17
User Parameter 18
User Param 18
User Parameter 19
User Param 19
User Parameter 20
User Param 20
User Parameter 21
User Param 21
User Parameter 22
User Param 22
User Parameter 23
User Param 23
User Parameter 24
User Param 24
User Parameter 25
User Param 25
Selects the parameters to be available in the User Access Level
(A1-01 = 1). These parameters are not related to the User Initialize function.
A2-26
A2-27
A2-28
A2-29
User Parameter 26
User Param 26
User Parameter 27
User Param 27
User Parameter 28
User Param 28
User Parameter 29
User Param 29
A2-30
A2-31
User Parameter 30
User Param 30
User Parameter 31
User Param 31
A2-32
User Parameter 32
User Param 32
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
A
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
A A A b1-01 to o3-02
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 4
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F b1-01 b1-02 b1-03 b1-04 b1-05 b1-06 b1-07 b1-08
Frequency Reference
Selection
Reference Source
Run Command Selection
Run Source
Stopping Method
Selection
Stopping Method
Reverse Operation
Selection
Reverse Oper
Minimum Output
Frequency (E1-09) or Less
Operation Selection
Zero-Speed Oper
Digital Input Scan Time
Cntl Input Scans
Local/Remote Run
Selection
LOC/REM RUN Sel
Run Command Selection
During Program
RUN CMD at PRG
Sequence
Selects the frequency reference input source.
0: Operator - Digital preset speed U1-01 or d1-01 to d1-17.
1: Terminals - Analog input terminal A1 (or terminal A2 based on parameter H3-09).
2: Serial Com - Modbus RS-422/485 terminals R+, R-, S+, and S-.
3: Option PCB - Option board connected on 2CN.
4: Pulse Input (Terminal RP)
Selects the run command input source.
0: Operator - RUN and STOP keys on Digital Operator.
1: Terminals - Contact closure on terminals S1 or S2.
2: Serial Com - Modbus RS-422/485 terminals R+, R-, S+, and S-.
3: Option PCB - Option board connected on 2CN.
Selects the stopping method when the run command is removed.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: DC Injection to Stop
3: Coast with Timer (A new run command is ignored if received before the timer expires).
Determines the forward rotation of the motor, and if reverse operation is disabled.
0: Reverse Enabled
1: Reverse Disabled
2: Exchange Phase - Change direction of forward motor rotation.
Operation method when frequency reference is less than minimum output frequency set in E1-09.
0: Operates according to frequency reference (E1-09 is disabled)
1: Output shuts off (coast to stop if less than E1-09)
2: Operates according to E1-09 (frequency reference set to E1-09)
3: Zero speed (frequency reference of zero is less than E1-09)
Sets the scan rate of terminals S1 to S8.
0: 2ms - 2 scans (for quick response)
1: 5ms - 2 scans (for noisy environments)
0: Cycle External RUN - If the run command is closed when switching from local mode to remote mode, the Drive will not run.
1: Accept External RUN - If the run command is closed when switching from local mode to remote mode, the Drive WILL run.
0: Disabled - Run command accepted only in the operation menu.
1: Enabled - Run command accepted in all menus (except when b1-02 = 0).
DC Injection Braking b2-01 b2-02 b2-03
DC Injection Braking Start
Frequency
DCInj Start Freq
DC Injection Braking
Current
DCInj Current
DC Injection Braking Time at
Start
DCInj Time @Start
Sets the frequency at which DC injection braking starts when ramp to stop (b1-03 = 0) is selected. If b2-01< E1-09, DC Injection braking starts at E1-09.
Sets the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the Drive rated current.
Sets the time of DC injection braking at start in units of 0.01 seconds.
b2-04
DC Injection Braking Time at
Stop
DCInj Time @Stop
Sets the time length of DC injection braking at stop in units of 0.01 seconds.
1.When b1-03 = 2, actual DC Injection time is calculated as
follows: b2-04 * 10 * Output Frequency / E1-04.
2.When b1-03 = 0, this parameter determines the amount of time
DC Injection is applied to the motor at the end of the decel ramp.
3.This should be set to a minimum of 0.50 seconds when using
HSB. This will activate DC injection during the final portion of
HSB and help ensure that the motor stops completely.
b2-08
Magnetic Flux
Compensation Capacity
Field Comp
Sets the magnetic flux compensation as a percentage of the no-load current value (E2-03).
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
* For parameter b1-04 settings 0 and 1.
0 to 4
0 to 3
0 to 3
0 to 2
0 to 3
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
0.0 to
10.0
0 to 100
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 to
10.00
0 to 1000
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0.5Hz
50%
0.00sec
0.00sec
0%
Q
Q
Q
A
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
Q
Q
Q
- (A * )
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
Q
Q
Q
A
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
Q
- (A * )
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
A
A
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 5
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F b3-01
Speed Search Selection
SpdSrch at Start
Speed Search
Enables/disables and selects the speed search function at start.
0: Speed Estimation Speed Search Disable - Speed search at start is disabled (however the estimated speed method is used for multi-function input, power loss ridethrough, auto fault retry)
1: Speed Estimation Speed Search Enable - The speed estimation method of speed search is enabled at run command.
2: Current Detection Speed Search Disable - Speed search at start is disabled (however the current detection method is used for multi-function input, power loss ride through, auto fault retry)
3: Current Detection Speed Search Enable - The current detection method of speed search is enabled at run command.
Speed Estimation Method: Motor speed and direction are measured using residual motor flux.
0 to 3 2 A
Current Detection Method: Motor speed is measured using current feedback levels
(unidirectional only). b3-02 b3-03 b3-05 b3-10
Speed Search Deactivation
Current
SpdSrch Current
Speed Search Deceleration
Time
SpdSrch Dec Time
Speed Search Delay Time
Search Delay
Speed Search Detection Compensation Gain
Srch Detect Comp
Used only when b3-01 = 2 or 3. Sets the speed search operation current as a percentage of Drive rated current.
Used only when b3-01 = 2 or 3. Sets the deceleration time during speed search.
Delays the speed search operation after a momentary power loss to allow time for an external output contactor to re-energize.
Sets the gain for the frequency at which the Drive starts speed estimation speed search. Use only when b3-01 = 0 or 1.
0 to 200
0.1 to
10.0
0.0 to
20.0
1.00 to
1.20
120%
2.0sec
0.2sec
1.10
b3-14
Bi-directional Speed Search
Selection
Bidir Search Sel
This parameter enables the Drive to detect the direction of rotation of the motor during speed search.
0: Disable - Drive uses frequency reference direction.
1: Enable - Drive uses detected direction
0 to 1 1 b3-17
<3021> b3-18
<3021> b3-19
<3021>
Speed Search Restart
Current Level
SrchRestart Lvl
Speed Search Detection Time
SrchRestart Time
Number of Speed Search
Restarts
Num of SrchRestr
Sets the current level to retry a speed search as a percentage, taking the Drive rated current as 100%.
Sets the time for speed search detection in seconds.
Sets the number of times that a speed search can be restarted.
0 to 200
0.00 to
1.00
0 to 10
150%
*
0.10 sec
0
Delay Timers b4-01 b4-02
Timer Function ON-Delay
Time
Delay-ON Timer
Timer Function
OFF-Delay Time
Delay-OFF Timer
Used in conjunction with a multi-function digital input and a multifunction digital output programmed for the timer function. This sets the amount of time between when the digital input is closed, and the digital output is energized.
Used in conjunction with a multi-function digital input and a multifunction digital output programmed for the timer function. This sets the amount of time the output stays energized after the digital input is opened.
0.0 to
3000.0
0.0 to
3000.0
0.0sec
0.0sec
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
* For Heavy Duty (HD) Rating (C6-01=0): Factory Setting = 150% For Normal Duty (ND) Rating (C6-01=2): Factory Setting = 120%.
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
A
-
-
A
-
A
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
A
-
-
No
No
No
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 6
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
PID Control b5-01
PID Function Setting
PID Mode
This parameter determines the function of the PID control.
0: Disabled
1: D = Feedback
2: D = Feed-Forward
3: Freq. Ref. + PID output (D = Feedback)
4: Freq. Ref. + PID output (D = Feed-Forward)
0 to 4 0 A b5-02 b5-03 b5-04 b5-05 b5-06 b5-07
Proportional Gain Setting
PID Gain
Intregral Time Setting
PID I Time
Intregral Limit Setting
PID I Limit
Derivative Time
PID D Time
PID Output Limit
PID Limit
PID Offset Adjustment
PID Offset
Sets the proportional gain of the PID controller.
Sets the integral time for the PID controller. A setting of zero disables integral control.
Sets the maximum output possible from the integrator. Set as a percentage (%) of maximum frequency.
Sets D control derivative time. A setting of 0.00 disables derivative control.
Sets the maximum output possible from the entire PID controller.
Set as a percentage (%) of maximum frequency.
Sets the amount of offset of the output of the PID controller. Set as a percentage (%) of maximum frequency.
The offset is summed with the PID output. This can be used to artificially kick-start a slow starting PID loop.
0.00 to
25.00
0.0 to
360.0
0.0 to
100.0
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 to
100.0
–100.0 to
+100.0
1.00
1.0sec
100.0%
0.00sec
100.0%
0.0%
A
A
A
A
A
A b5-08
PID Primary Delay Time
Constant
PID Delay Time
Sets the amount of time for the filter on the output of the PID controller.
0.00 to
10.00
0.00sec
A b5-09
PID Output Level
Selection
Output Level Sel
Determines whether the PID controller will be direct or reverse acting.
0: Normal Output
1: Reverse Output
0 to 1 0 A b5-10 b5-11 b5-12 b5-13 b5-14
PID Output Gain Setting
Output Gain
PID Output Reverse
Selection
Output Rev Sel
PID Feedback Reference
Missing Detection
Selection
Fb los Det Sel
PID Feedback Loss
Detection Level
Fb los Det Lvl
PID Feedback Loss
Detection Time
Fb los Det Time
Sets the output gain of the PID controller.
0: 0 limit (when PID output goes negative, Drive stops). 0 limit is automatic when reverse prohibit is selected using b1-04.
1: Reverse (when PID goes negative, Drive reverses).
0: Disabled
1: Alarm
2: Fault
Sets the PID feedback loss detection level as a percentage (%) of maximum frequency (E1-04).
Sets the PID feedback loss detection delay time in terms of seconds.
0.0 to
25.0
0 to 1
0 to 2
0 to 100
0.0 to
25.5
1.0
0
0
0%
1.0sec
A
A
A
A
A b5-15 b5-16
PID Sleep Function Start
Level
PID Sleep Level
PID Sleep Delay Time
PID Sleep Time
Sets the sleep function start frequency.
Sets the sleep function delay time in terms of seconds.
Varies by
Duty
Rating*
0.0 to
25.5
0.0Hz
0.0sec
A
A b5-17 b5-18
PID Accel/Decel Time
PID Acc/Dec Time
PID Setpoint Selection
PID Setpoint Sel
Applies an accel/decel time to the PID setpoint reference. The
Drive’s standard softstarter (C1-XX and S-curve) still affects the output of the PID algorithm.
Allows the b5-19 setting to be the PID target setpoint value.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0.0 to
25.5
0 to 1
0.0sec
0
A
A b5-19
PID Setpoint Value
PID Setpoint
Sets the PID target value. Use only when b5-18 = 1
0.0 to
100.0
0.0%
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
* For Heavy Duty (HD) Rating (C6-01=0): Setting Range=0.0 to 300.0. For Normal Duty (ND) Rating (C6-01=2): Setting Range=0.0 to 400.0.
A
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 7
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display b6-01 b6-02 b6-03
Dwell Reference at Start
Dwell Ref @Start
Dwell Time at Start
Dwell Time @Start
Dwell Frequency at Stop
Dwell Ref @Stop
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
Reference Hold (Dwell)
Temporarily holds the frequency reference.
Run command
ON
Output frequency
OFF
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 to
10.0
0.0 to
400.0
0.0Hz
0.0sec
0.0Hz
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A b6-04
Dwell Time at Stop
Dwell Time @Stop b6-02 b6-01 b6-03 b6-04
Time
0.0 to
10.0
0.0sec
A A A A b7-01 b7-02
Droop Control Level
Droop Quantity
Droop Control Delay Time
Droop Delay Time
Droop Control
Sets the speed decrease as a percentage of maximum output frequency (E1-04) when the motor is at 100% load torque. Setting of 0.0 disables droop control.
Determines the droop control delay time in response to a load change.
Energy Saving b8-01 b8-02 b8-03 b8-04 b8-05 b8-06
Energy Saving Control
Selection
Energy Save Sel
Energy Saving Gain
Energy Save Gain
Energy Saving Control Filter
Time Constant
Energy Saving F.T
Energy Saving
Coefficient Value
Energy Save COEF
Power Detection Filter Time kW Filter Time
Search Operation Voltage
Limit
Search V Limit
Energy Savings function enable/disable selection.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Sets energy savings control gain when in vector control method.
Sets energy saving control filter time constant when in vector control method.
Used to fine-tune the energy savings function when in V/F control method.
Zero Servo b9-01
Zero Servo Gain
Zero Servo Gain
Sets the position loop gain for Zero Servo command.
This function is effective when multi-function input “zero servo command” is set.
b9-02
Zero Servo Completion Width
Zero Servo Count
Sets number of pulses used for the multi-function output of
“zero servo completion”.
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
0.0 to
100.0
0.03 to
2.00
0 to 1
0.0 to
10.0
0.00 to
10.00
0.0 to
655.00
0 to 2000
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to
16383
0.0%
0.05sec
0
0%
5
10 pulses
1.0
Varies by kVA
Varies by kVA
20ms
-
-
-
-
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
A
A
A
-
-
-
-
A
A
A
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 8
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
C1-01
C1-02
C1-03
C1-04
C1-05
C1-06
C1-07
C1-08
C1-09
C1-10
C1-11
Acceleration Time 1
Accel Time 1
Deceleration Time 1
Decel Time 1
Acceleration Time 2
Accel Time 2
Deceleration Time 2
Decel Time 2
Acceleration Time 3
Accel Time 3
Deceleration Time 3
Decel Time 3
Acceleration Time 4
Accel Time 4
Deceleration Time 4
Decel Time 4
Fast Stop Time
Fast Stop Time
Accel/Decel Time Setting
Unit
Acc/Dec Units
Accel/Decel
Switch Frequency
Acc/Dec SW Freq
Accel / Decel
Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency.
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero.
Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency when selected via a multi-function input.
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero when selected via a multi-function input.
Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency when selected via a multi-function input.
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero when selected via a multi-function input.
Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency when selected via a multi-function input.
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero when selected via a multi-function input.
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero for the multi-function input "Fast Stop" function.
Sets the setting resolution of C1-01 to C1-09
0: 0.01 sec (0.00 to 600.00 sec)
1: 0.1 sec (0.0 to 6000.0 sec)
Sets the frequency for automatic switching of accel / decel times.
Fout < C1-11: Accel/Decel Time 4
Fout
≥
C1-11: Accel/Decel Time 1
Multi-function inputs "Multi-Acc/Dec 1" and "Multi-Acc/Dec 2" have priority over C1-11.
S-Curve Accel / Decel
0.0
to
6000.0
0.0
to
6000.0
0 to 1
Varies by
Duty
Rating*
C2-01
C2-02
C2-03
S-Curve Characteristic at
Accel Start
SCrv Acc @ Start
S-Curve Characteristic at
Accel End
SCrv Acc @ End
S-Curve Characteristic at
Decel Start
SCrv Dec @ Start
S-curve is used to further soften the starting and stopping ramp. The longer the S-curve time, the softer the starting and stopping ramp.
Run command
ON OFF
Output frequency
C2-02 C2-03
C2-04
S-Curve Characteristic at
Decel End
SCrv Dec @ End
C2-01
C2-04
Time
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
* For Heavy Duty (HD) Rating: Setting Range=0.0 to 300.0. For Normal Duty (ND) Rating: Setting Range=0.0 to 400.0.
0.00 to
2.50
10.0sec
10.0sec
1
0.0Hz
0.20sec
0.20sec
0.20sec
0.00sec
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 9
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
C3-01
C3-02
C3-03
C3-04
C3-05
C4-01
Slip Compensation Gain
Slip Comp Gain
Slip Compensation
Primary Delay Time
Slip Comp Time
Slip Compensation Limit
Slip Comp Limit
Slip Compensation
Selection During
Regeneration
Slip Comp Regen
Output Voltage Limit
Operation Selection
Output V Lim SEL
Torque Compensation Gain
Torq Comp Gain
Motor-Slip Compensation
This parameter is used to increase motor speed to account for motor slip by boosting the output frequency.
If the speed is lower than the frequency reference, increase C3-01.
If the speed is higher than the frequency reference, decrease C3-01.
This parameter adjusts the filter on the output of the slip compensation function. Increase to add stability, decrease to improve response.
This parameter sets the upper limit for the slip compensation function. It is set as a percentage of motor rated slip (E2-02).
Determines whether slip compensation is enabled or disabled during regenerative operation.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Determines if the motor magnetic flux is automatically decreased when output voltage saturation occurs.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Torque Compensation
This parameter sets the gain for the Drive’s automatic torque boost function to match the Drive’s output voltage to the motor load. This parameter helps to produce better starting torque. It determines the amount of torque or voltage boost based upon motor current, motor resistance, and output frequency.
0.0 to 2.5
0 to
10000
0 to 250
0 to 1
0 to 1
0.00 to
2.50
C4-02
Torque Compensation
Primary Delay Time
Torq Comp Time
This parameter adjusts the filter on the output of the torque compensation function. Increase to add stability, decrease to improve response.
C4-03
C4-04
Torque Compensation at
Forward Start
F TorqCmp @ start
Torque Compensation at
Reverse Start
R TorqCmp @ start
Sets torque compensation at forward start as a percentage of motor torque.
Sets torque compensation at reverse start as a percentage of motor torque.
C4-05
Torque Compensation Time
Constant
TorqCmp Delay T
Sets the time constant for torque compensation at forward start and reverse start (C4-03 and C4-04). The filter is disabled if the time is set to 4ms or less.
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
0 to
10000
0.0 to
200.0
-200.0 to
0.0
0 to 200
1.0
200ms
200%
0
0
1.00
20ms
0.0%
0.0%
10ms
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
-
A
A
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
-
-
-
-
-
A
A
-
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
A
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 10
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
C5-01
C5-02
C5-03
ASR Proportional Gain 1
ASR P Gain 1
ASR Integral Time 1
ASR I Time 1
ASR Proportional Gain 2
ASR P Gain 2
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
ASR Tuning
Sets the proportional gain of the speed control loop (ASR) A A
Sets the integral time of the speed control loop (ASR)
Sets the speed control gain 2 and integral time 2 of the speed control loop (ASR).
1.00 to
300.00
0.000 to
10.000
1.00 to
300.00
20.00
0.500 sec
20.00
-
A
A -
A
A
P, I Flux Vector
C5-01/02
C5-03/04
C5-04 ASR Integral Time 2
ASR I Time 2
C5-07 Hz
P, I
V/F with PG
P = C5-01
I = C5-02
P = C5-03
I = C5-04
E1-04 Hz
C5-05
C5-06
C5-07
ASR Limit
ASR Limit
ASR Primary Delay Time
Constant
ASR Delay Time
ASR Gain
Switching Frequency
ASR Gain SW Freq
ASR Integral Limit
ASR I Limit
Sets the upper limit for the speed control loop (ASR) as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
Sets the filter time constant for the time from the speed loop to the torque command output.
Sets the frequency for switching between Proportional Gain 1, 2 and Integral Time 1, 2.
C5-08
Sets the ASR integral upper limit and rated load as a percentage of the rated torque of the connected motor.
Carrier Frequency
C6-01
C6-02
Drive Duty Selection
Heavy/Normal Duty
Carrier Frequency
Selection
CarrierFreq Sel
Selects Drive’s rated input and output current, overload capacity, carrier frequency, current limit, and maximum output frequency.
See Introduction for details.
0: Heavy Duty (C6-02 = 0 to 1)
1: Normal Duty 1 (C6-02 = 0 to F)
2: Normal Duty 2 (C6-02 = 0 to F)
Selects the number of pulses per second of the output voltage waveform. Setting range determined by C6-01 setting.
0: Low noise
1: Fc = 2.0 kHz
2: Fc = 5.0 kHz
3: Fc = 8.0 kHz
4: Fc = 10.0 kHz
5: Fc = 12.5 kHz
6: Fc = 15.0 kHz
F: Program (Determined by the settings of C6-03 thru C6-05)
C6-03
C6-04
Carrier Frequency Upper
Limit
CarrierFreq Max
Carrier Frequency Lower
Limit
CarrierFreq Min
Maximum carrier frequency allowed when C6-02 = F.
Minimum carrier frequency allowed when C6-02 = F.
C6-05
Carrier Frequency
Proportional Gain
CarrierFreq Gain
Sets the relationship of output frequency to carrier frequency when
C6-02 = F.
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
0.000 to
10.000
0.0 to
20.0
0.000 to
0.500
0.0 to
400.0
0 to 400
0 to 2
Varies by kVA
0.4 to
15.0
kHz
0.4 to
15.0
kHz
0 to 99
0.500 sec
5.0%
0.004 sec
0.0Hz
400%
0
Varies by kVA
Varies by kVA
Varies by kVA
0
-
-
-
-
-
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
A
Q
A
A
A
-
-
-
-
-
A
Q
A
-
-
A
-
-
-
A
A
A
A
Q
A
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 11
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
Preset Reference d1-01 d1-02 d1-03 d1-04 d1-05 d1-06 d1-07 d1-08 d1-09 d1-10 d1-11 d1-12 d1-13 d1-14 d1-15 d1-16
Frequency Reference 1
Reference 1
Frequency Reference 2
Reference 2
Frequency Reference 3
Reference 3
Frequency Reference 4
Reference 4
Frequency Reference 5
Reference 5
Frequency Reference 6
Reference 6
Frequency Reference 7
Reference 7
Frequency Reference 8
Reference 8
Frequency Reference 9
Reference 9
Frequency Reference 10
Reference 10
Frequency Reference 11
Reference 11
Frequency Reference 12
Reference 12
Frequency Reference 13
Reference 13
Frequency Reference 14
Reference 14
Frequency Reference 15
Reference 15
Frequency Reference 16
Reference 16
Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input “Multi-step speed reference 1” is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input “Multi-step speed reference 2” is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input “Multi-step speed reference 1,2” is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input “Multi-step speed reference 3” is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input “Multi-step speed reference 1,3” is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input “Multi-step speed reference 2,3” is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input “Multi-step speed reference 1,2,3” is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input “Multi-step speed reference 4” is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input “Multi-step speed reference 1,4” is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input “Multi-step speed reference 2,4” is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input “Multi-step speed reference 1,2,4” is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input “Multi-step speed reference 3,4” is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input “Multi-step speed reference 1,3,4” is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input “Multi-step speed reference 2,3,4” is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input “Multi-step speed reference 1,2,3,4” is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
d1-17 Jog Frequency Reference
Jog Reference
Frequency reference when:
“Jog frequency reference” is selected via multi-function input terminals. “Jog frequency reference” has priority over “multi-step speed reference 1 to 4”. d1-17 is also the reference for the JOG key on the Digital Operator, and the multi-function inputs “forward jog” and “reverse jog”. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Reference Limits d2-01 d2-02
Frequency Reference Upper
Limit
Ref Upper Limit
Frequency Reference Lower
Limit
Ref Lower Limit
Determines maximum frequency reference, set as a percentage of maximum output frequency (E1-04). If the frequency reference is above this value, actual Drive speed will be limited to this value.
This parameter applies to all frequency reference sources.
Determines minimum frequency reference, set as a percentage of maximum output frequency (E1-04). If frequency reference is below this value, actual Drive speed will be set to this value. This parameter applies to all frequency reference sources.
d2-03
Master Speed Reference
Lower Limit
Ref1 Lower Limit
Determines minimum frequency reference, set as a percentage of maximum output frequency (E1-04). If frequency reference from analog input (A1, A2, and A3) is below this value, actual Drive speed will be set to this value. This parameter applies only to analog inputs A1, A2, and A3.
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
0.00 to
E1-04
Value
0.0 to
110.0
0.0 to
110.0
0.0 to
110.0
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
6.00Hz
100.0%
0.0%
0.0%
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 12
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
Jump Frequencies d3-01 d3-02 d3-03
Jump Frequency 1
Jump Freq 1
Jump Frequency 2
Jump Freq 2
Jump Frequency 3
Jump Freq 3
These parameters allow programming of up to three prohibited frequency reference points for eliminating problems with resonant vibration of the motor / machine. This feature does not actually eliminate the selected frequency values, but will accelerate and decelerate the motor through the prohibited bandwidth.
Varies by
Duty
Rating* d3-04 d4-01 d4-02
Jump Frequency Width
Jump Bandwidth
Frequency Reference Hold
Function Selection
MOP Ref Memory
Trim Control Level
Trim Control Lvl
This parameter determines the width of the deadband around each selected prohibited frequency reference point. A setting of "1.0" will result in a deadband of +/- 1.0Hz.
Sequence (MOP & Trim Control)
This parameter is used to retain the held frequency reference in
U1-01 (d1-01) when power is removed. This function is available when the multi-function inputs “accel/decel ramp hold” or
“up/down” commands are selected (H1-XX = A or 10 and 11).
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Sets the amount of frequency reference to be added or subtracted as a percentage of maximum output frequency (E1-04) when multifunction inputs “trim control increase” and “trim control decrease” are selected (H1-XX = 1C and 1D).
Torque Control
0.0 to
20.0
0 to 1
0 to 100 d5-01 d5-02 d5-03 d5-04 d5-05
Torque Control Selection
Torq Control Sel
Torque Reference Delay Time
Torq Ref Filter
Speed Limit Selection
Speed Limit Sel
Speed Limit
Speed Lmt Value
Speed Limit Bias
Speed Lmt Bias
Selects speed or torque control.
The torque reference is set via analog input A2 or A3 when it is set for “torque reference” (H3-05 or H3-09 = 13). Torque reference is set as a percentage of motor rated torque.
To use this function for switching between speed and torque control, set to 0 and set a multi-function input to “speed/torque control change” (H1-XX = 71).
0: Speed Control (controlled by C5-01 to C5-07)
1: Torque Control
Sets the torque reference delay time in ms units.
This function can be used to correct for noise in the torque control signal or the responsiveness with the host controller. When oscillation occurs during torque control, increase the set value.
Sets the speed limit command method for the torque control method.
1: Analog Input - Limited by the output of the soft starter (b1-01 selection and active acceleration/deceleration and S-curve settings).
2: Program Setting - Limited by d5-04 setting value.
Sets the speed limit during torque control as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
This function is enabled when d5-03 is set to 2. Directions are as follows.
+: run command direction
-: run command opposite direction
Sets the speed limit bias as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04). Bias is given to the specified speed limit. It can be used to adjust the margin for the speed limit.
0 to 1
0 to 1000
1 to 2
-120 to
120
0 to 120 d5-06
Speed/Torque Control
Switchover Timer
Ref Hold Time
Set the delay time from inputting the multi-function input
“speed/torque control change” (from On to OFF or OFF to ON) until the control is actually changed. This function is enabled when the multi-function input “speed/torque control change”
(H1-XX = 71) is set. While in the speed/torque control switching timer, the analog inputs hold the value present when the
“speed/torque control change” is received.
0 to 1000
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
* For Heavy Duty (HD) Rating: Setting Range=0.0 to 300.0. For Normal Duty (ND) Rating: Setting Range=0.0 to 400.0.
0.0Hz
0.0Hz
0.0Hz
1.0Hz
0
10%
0
0ms
1
0%
10%
0ms
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
-
-
-
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
-
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
-
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 13
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F d6-01 d6-02 d6-03 d6-06
Magnetic Field
Weakening Level
Field-Weak Lvl
Magnetic Field Frequency
Field-Weak Freq
Magnetic Field Forcing Function Selection
Field Force Sel
Magnetic Field Forcing Limit
Field Force Limit
Field-Weakening
Sets the Drive output voltage when the multi-function input “field weakening command” is input (H1-XX = 63). Sets as a percentage taking the voltage set in the V/F pattern as 100%.
Sets the lower limit (in Hz) of the frequency range where field weakening control is valid. The field weakening command is valid only at frequencies above this setting and only when output frequency is in agreement with the current output frequency
(speed agree).
Sets the magnetic field forcing function.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Sets the upper limit of the excitation current command during magnetic field forcing. A setting of 100% is equal to motor no-load current, E2-03.
V/F Pattern
0 to 100
Varies by
Duty
Rating*
0 to 1
100 to
400
E1-01
E1-03
Input Voltage Setting
Input Voltage
V/F Pattern Selection
V/F Selection
Set to the nominal voltage of the incoming line. Sets the maximum and base voltage used by preset V/F patterns (E1-03 = 0 to E), adjusts the levels of Drive protective features (e.g. Overvoltage, braking resistor turn-on, stall prevention, etc.).
WARNING
DRIVE INPUT VOLTAGE (NOT MOTOR VOLTAGE)
MUST BE SET IN E1-01 FOR THE PROTECTIVE
FEATURES OF THE DRIVE TO FUNCTION PROPERLY.
FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN EQUIPMENT
DAMAGE AND/OR PERSONAL INJURY.
A:
B:
C:
D:
6:
7:
8:
9:
E:
F:
FF:
Set to the type of motor being used and the type of application.
The Drive operates utilizing a set V/F pattern to determine the appropriate output voltage level for each commanded speed. There are 15 different preset V/F patterns to select from (E1-03 = 0 to E) with varying voltage profiles, base levels (base level = frequency at which maximum voltage is reached), and maximum frequencies.
There are also settings for Custom V/F patterns that will use the settings of parameters E1-04 through E1-13. E1-03 = F selects a cus-
2:
3:
4:
5: tom V/F pattern with an upper voltage limit and E1-03 = FF selects a custom V/F pattern without an upper voltage limit.
0:
1:
50Hz
60Hz Saturation
50Hz Saturation
72Hz (60Hz Base)
50Hz VT1
50Hz VT2
60Hz VT1
60Hz VT2
50Hz HST1
50Hz HST2
60Hz HST1
60Hz HST2
90Hz (60Hz Base)
120Hz (60Hz Base)
180Hz (60Hz Base)
Custom V/F
Custom w/o limit
155.0 to
255.0
(240V)
310.0 to
510.0
(480V)
0 to FF
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
* For Heavy Duty (HD) Rating: Setting Range=0.0 to 300.0. For Normal Duty (ND) Rating: Setting Range=0.0 to 400.0.
80%
0.0Hz
0
400%
230.0V
or
460.0V
F
A
A
-
-
Q
Q
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
A
A
-
-
Q
Q
A
Q
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
A
A
Q
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 14
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
Maximum Output
Frequency
Max Frequency
Maximum Output Voltage
Max Voltage
Base Frequency
Base Frequency
Mid Output Frequency A
Mid Frequency A
Mid Output Voltage A
Mid Voltage A
Minimum Output Frequency
Min Frequency
Minimum Output Voltage
Min Voltage
These parameters are only applicable when V/F Pattern Selection is set to Custom (E1-03 = F or FF). To set V/F characteristics in a straight line, set the same values for E1-07 and E1-09. In this case, the setting for E1-08 will be disregarded. Be sure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner or else an OPE10 fault will occur:
E1-04
≥
E1-11
≥
E1-06 > E1-07
≥
E1-09
Note: Setting parameter E1-01=0 is also acceptable
Output voltage (V)
E1-05
E1-12
E1-13
E1-08
Varies by
Duty
Rating*
0.0 to
255.0
(240V)
0.0 to
510.0
(480V)
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 to
255.0
(240V)
0.0 to
510.0
(480V)
0.0 to
400.0
E1-10
E1-09 E1-07 E1-06 E1-11 E1-04
Frequency (Hz)
0.0 to
255.0
(240V)
0.0 to
510.0
(480V)
60.0Hz
230.0V
or
460.0V
60.0Hz
3.0Hz
12.6
Vac or
25.3
Vac
0.5Hz
2.3
Vac or
4.6
Vac
Q
Q
Q
A
A
Q
A
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
Q
Q
Q
A
A
Q
A
Q
Q
Q
A
A
Q
A
Q
Q
Q
-
-
-
A
E1-11
E1-12
Mid Output Frequency B
Mid Frequency B
Mid Output Voltage B
Mid Voltage B
Set only when the V/F pattern is finely adjusted in the constant power (HP) area above base speed. Adjustment is not normally required.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 to
255.0
(240V)
0.0 to
510.0
(480V)
E1-13
Base Voltage
Base Voltage
Set only when the V/F pattern is finely adjusted in the constant power (HP) area above base speed. Adjustment is not normally required. If E1-13 = 0.0, then value in E1-05 is used for E1-13.
Auto-Tuning sets this value.
0.0 to
255.0
(240V)
0.0 to
510.0
(480V)
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
* For Heavy Duty (HD) Rating: Setting Range=40.0 to 300.0. For Normal Duty (ND) Rating: Setting Range=40.0 to 400.0.
0.0Hz
0.0Vac
0.0Vac
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 15
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
E2-01
Motor Rated Current
Motor Rated FLA
Motor Setup
Set to the motor nameplate full load current in amperes (A). This value is automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Varies by kVA
E2-02
Motor Rated Slip
Motor Rated Slip
Set to the motor rated slip in hertz (Hz).
This value is automatically set during rotational Auto-Tuning.
Varies by kVA
E2-03
E2-04
E2-05
Motor No-Load Current
No-Load Current
Number of Motor Poles
Number of Poles
Motor Line-to-Line
Resistance
Term Resistance
Set to the magnetizing current of the motor as a percentage of full load amps (E2-01). This value is automatically set during rotational
Auto-Tuning.
Set to the number of motor poles.
This value is automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Set to the phase-to-phase motor resistance in ohms (
This value is automatically set by Auto-Tuning.
Ω)
.
E2-06
Motor Leakage Inductance
Leak Inductance
Set to the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of motor rated voltage.
This value is automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
E2-07
E2-08
Motor Iron-core
Saturation Coefficient 1
Saturation Comp 1
Motor Iron-core
Saturation Coefficient 2
Saturation Comp 2
Set to the motor iron saturation coefficient at 50% of magnetic flux.
This value is automatically set during rotational Auto-Tuning.
Set to the motor iron saturation coefficient at 75% of magnetic flux.
This value is automatically set during rotational Auto-Tuning.
E2-09
Motor Mechanical Loss
Mechanical Loss
Set to the motor mechanical loss as a percentage of motor rated power (kW) capacity.
Adjust in the following circumstances:
• When torque loss is large due to motor bearing friction.
• When the torque loss in the load is large.
E2-10
Motor Iron Loss for Torque
Compensation
Tcomp Iron Loss
Set to the motor iron loss in watts (W).
E2-11
Motor Rated Output
Mtr Rated Power
Set to the motor rated power in kilowatts (kW).
This value is automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
1HP = 0.746kW
E2-12
Motor Iron-Core
Saturation Coefficient 3
Saturation Comp 3
Set to the motor iron saturation coefficient at 130% of magnetic flux.
This value is automatically set during rotational Auto-Tuning.
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
Varies by kVA
2 to 48
0.000 to
65.000
0.0 to
40.0%
0.00 to
0.50
0.50 to
0.75
0.0 to
10.0
0 to
65535 W
0.00 to
650.00 kW
0.0 to
1.60
0.50
0.75
0.0%
Varies by kVA
Varies by kVA
1.30
4
Varies by kVA
Varies by kVA
Varies by kVA
Varies by kVA
Varies by kVA
Q
A
A
-
-
A
-
-
-
-
A
Q
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
Q
A
A
Q
A
-
-
-
-
A
Q
-
Q
A
A
-
A
A
A
A
A
-
Q
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
-
Q
A
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 16
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
E3-01
Motor 2 Control Method
Selection
Control Method
V/F Pattern 2
0: V/F control
1: V/F control with PG
2: Open-loop vector control
3: Flux vector control
0 to 3 2
E3-02
E3-03
E3-04
E3-05
E3-06
E3-07
E3-08
Motor 2 Maximum Output
Frequency
Max Frequency
Motor 2 Maximum Output
Voltage
Max Voltage
Motor 2 Base Frequency
Base Frequency
Motor 2 Mid Output
Frequency
Mid Frequency
Motor 2 Mid Output
Voltage VA
Mid Voltage
Motor 2 Minimum Output
Frequency
Min Frequency
Motor 2 Minimum Output
Voltage
Min Voltage
Output voltage (V)
E3-03
E3-06
E3-08
E3-07 E3-05 E3-04 E3-02
Frequency (Hz)
To set V/F characteristics in a straight line, set the same values for
E3-05 and E3-07. In this case, the setting for E3-06 will be disregarded. Be sure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner or else an OPE10 fault will occur:
E3-02
≥
E3-04
≥
E3-05
≥
E3-07
60.0Hz
230.0V
or
460.0V
60.0Hz
3.0Hz
12.6
Vac or
25.3
Vac
0.5Hz
2.3Vac
or
4.6Vac
E4-01
Motor 2 Rated Current
Motor Rated FLA
Motor Setup 2
Set to the motor 2 nameplate full load current in amperes (A).
This value is automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Varies by kVA
E4-02
Motor 2 Rated Slip
Motor Rated Slip
Set to the rated slip of motor 2 in hertz (Hz).
This value is automatically set during rotational Auto-Tuning.
Varies by kVA
E4-03
E4-04
E4-05
E4-06
Motor 2 No-Load Current
No-Load Current
Motor 2 Number of Poles
Number of Poles
Motor 2 Line-to-Line
Resistance
Term Resistance
Motor 2 Leakage
Inductance
Leak Inductance
Set to the magnetizing current of motor 2 in percentage of full load current (E4-01). This value is automatically set during rotational
Auto-Tuning.
Set to the number of poles of motor 2.
This value is automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Set to the phase-to-phase resistance of motor 2 in ohms (
This value is automatically set by the Auto-Tuning.
Ω)
.
Set to the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of rated voltage of motor 2.
This value is automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Varies by kVA
2 to 48
0.000 to
65.000
0.0 to
40.0%
E4-07
Motor 2 Rated Output
Mtr Rated Power
Set to the rated power of motor 2 in kilowatts (kW).
This value is automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
0.00 to
650.00 kW
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
* For Heavy Duty (HD) Rating: Setting Range=40.0 to 300.0. For Normal Duty (ND) Rating: Setting Range=40.0 to 400.0.
Varies by kVA
Varies by kVA
Varies by kVA
4
Varies by kVA
Varies by kVA
Varies by kVA
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 to
255.0
(240V)
0.0 to
510.0
(480V)
0.0 to
400.0
Varies by
Duty
Rating*
0.0 to
255.0
(240V)
0.0 to
510.0
(480V)
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 to
255.0
(240V)
0.0 to
510.0
(480V)
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
A
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
A
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 17
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
E4-08
<3021>
Motor 2 Slip
Compensation Gain
SlpCmp Gain Mtr2
This parameter can help to increase speed precision when working on a load, although normally adjustment is not necessary.
• When speed is less than that desired value, increase the set value.
• When speed is higher than the desired value, decrease the set value.
* This parameter functions as gain suppression when in Flux Vector
Control.
0.0 to 2.5
1.0
*1
A No A
E4-09
<3021>
E4-10
<3021>
Motor 2 ASR Proportional (P)
Gain 1
ASR P Gain Mtr2
Motor 2 ASR Integral (I)
Time 1
ASR I Time Mtr2
Sets the proportional gain of the speed loop (ASR).
Sets the integral time of the speed loop (ASR) in units of 0.1s.
0.00 to
300.00 *2
0.000 to
10.000
20.00 *3
0.500 sec *3
No
N0
A
A
No
No
E4-11
<3021>
Motor 2 Torque
Compensation Gain
TrqCmp Gain Mtr2
Magnifies the torque compensation gain. Normally this parameter does not require change, however, adjustments can be made as follows:
• When the motor cable is long, increase the setting.
• When using a motor with a smaller capacity than the drive (the
largest motor being used), increase this setting.
• If the motor begins to vibrate, adjust the value set so that the
output current does not exceed the drive’s rated output current
when operating at low speeds.
PG Option Setup
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
A A A
F1-01
F1-02
F1-03
F1-04
F1-05
PG Parameter
PG Pulses/Rev
Operation Selection at PG
Open Circuit (PGO)
PG Fdbk Loss Sel
Operation Selection at
Overspeed (OS)
PG Overspeed Sel
Operation Selection at
Deviation
PG Deviation Sel
PG Rotation Selection
PG Rotation Sel
Sets the number of pulses per revolution (PPM) of the encoder
(pulse generator).
Sets stopping method when a PG open circuit fault (PGO) occurs.
See parameter F1-14.
0: Ramp to stop - Decelerate to stop using the active deceleration time.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast - Stop - Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in
C1-09.
3: Alarm Only - Drive continues operation.
Sets the stopping method when an overspeed (OS) fault occurs. See
F1-08 and F1-09.
0: Ramp to stop - Decelerate to stop using the active deceleration time.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast - Stop - Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in
C1-09.
3: Alarm Only - Drive continues operation.
Sets the stopping method when a speed deviation (DEV) fault occurs. See F1-10 and F1-11.
0: Ramp to stop - Decelerate to stop using the active deceleration time.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast - Stop - Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in
C1-09.
3: Alarm Only - Drive continues operation.
0: Fwd=C.C.W. - Phase A leads with forward run command.
(Phase B leads with reverse run command.)
1: Fwd=C.W. - Phase B leads with forward run command. (Phase
A leads with reverse run command.)
0 to
60000
0 to 3
0 to 3
0 to 3
0 to 1
1024
1
1
3
0 -
-
-
-
Q
A
A
A
A -
-
-
-
-
F1-06
PG Division Rate (PG Pulse
Monitor)
PG Output Ratio
Sets the division ratio for the pulse monitor of the PG-B2 encoder feedback option board. This function is not available with the
PG-X2 option board.
Division ratio = (1+ n) /m (n=0 to 1, m=1 to 32)
The first digit of the value of F1-06 stands for n, the second and the third stand for m. (from left to right).
The possible division ratio settings are:
1/32
≤
F1-06
≤
1
1 to 132 1 A -
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running. For Normal Duty (ND) Rating: Setting Range=40.0 to 400.0.
* For Heavy Duty (HD) Rating: Setting Range=40.0 to 300.0.
*1: Default setting changes according to the control mode (E3-01). When E3-01 = 0, E4-08 = 0.0. When E3-01 = 2 or 3, E4-08 = 1.0.
*2: Setting range becomes 1.00 to 300.00 in Flux Vector Control
*3: Default setting changes according to the control mode (E3-01) When E3-01 = 1, E4-09 = 0.20 and E4-10 = 0.200. When E3-01 = 3, E4-09 = 20.00 and E4-10 = 0.500.
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
No
Q
A
A
A
A
A
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 18
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
F1-07
Integral Function During
Accel/Decel Selection
PG Ramp PI/I Sel
Sets integral control during acceleration/deceleration to either enabled or disabled.
0: Disabled - The integral function is not used while accelerating or decelerating.
1: Enabled - The integral function is used at all times.
F1-08
F1-09
F1-10
F1-11
F1-12
F1-13
F1-14
Overspeed Detection Level
PG Overspd Level
Overspeed Detection Delay
Time
PG Overspd Time
Excessive Speed
Deviation Detection Level
PG Deviate Level
Excessive Speed
Deviation Detection Level
PG Deviate Level
Number of PG
Gear Teeth 1
PG # Gear Teeth1
Number of PG
Gear Teeth 2
PG # Gear Teeth2
PG Open-Circuit
Detection Time
PGO Detect Time
PG Constant 2
PG Pulse / Rev 2
Configures the overspeed fault (OS) detection.
OS fault will occur, if the motor speed feedback is greater than the
F1-08 setting for a time longer than F1-09. F1-08 is set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04). See F1-03.
Configures the speed deviation fault (DEV) detection.
DEV fault will occur if the speed deviation is greater than the
F1-10 setting for a time longer than F1-11. F1-10 is set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
Speed deviation is the difference between actual motor speed and the frequency reference command. See F1-04.
Sets the gear ratio between the motor shaft and the encoder (PG).
Input pulses from PG (PPR) x 60
F1-01 x
F1-13
F1-12
A gear ratio of 1 will be used if either of these parameters is set to 0.
This function is not available in flux vector control.
Configures the PG open (PGO) function. PGO will be detected if no
PG pulses are detected for a time longer than F1-14. See F1-02.
F1-21
<3021>
F1-22
<3021>
PG Rotation 2
PG Rotation Sel2
Sets the number of pulses for the encoder (pulse generator) for each full rotation of Motor 2.
Determines the direction of rotation for the encoder (PG) connected to Motor 2.
0: Phase A leads with Forward Run Command.
(Phase B leads with Reverse Run Command.)
1: Phase B leads with Forward Run Command.
(Phase A leads with Reverse Run Command.)
F1-23
<3021>
F1-24
<3021>
Number of PG
Gear Teeth 1
PG Gear Teeth1
Number of PG
Gear Teeth 2
PG Gear Teeth2
Sets the number of gear teeth (deceleration ratio) between Motor 2 and the pulse generator.
Input pulses from PG (PPR) x 60
PG Constant (F1-21) x
F1-24
F1-23
A gear ratio of 1 will be used if either of these constants is set to 0.
F1-25
<3021>
F1-26
<3021>
Hardware Disconnect
Detection Selection CH 1
Hardware PGO ch1
Hardware Disconnect
Detection Selection CH 2
Hardware PGO ch2
Enables or disables the drive from detecting when the PG option on
CH1 has been disconnected.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enabled when using PG-T2 or Z2.
Enables or disables the drive from detecting when the PG option on
CH2 has been disconnected.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enabled when using PG-Z2.
AI-14 Setup
F2-01
AI-14 Input Selection
AI-14 Input Sel
Sets the function for channel 1 to 3 of the AI-14B analog input reference option board.
0: 3-channel individual (Channel 1: terminal A1, Channel 2: terminal A2, Channel 3: terminal A3)
1: 3-channel addition (Summed values of channels 1 to 3 is the frequency reference)
When set to 0, select 1 for b1-01. In this case, the multi-function input “Option/Inverter selection” cannot be used.
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
* Enabled when an option card is connected to the PG encoder 2CH input (F1-21 to F1-24).
0 to 1
0 to 120
0.0 to 2.0
0.0 sec
0 to 50
0.0 to
10.0
0 to 1000
0.0 to
10.0
0 to
60000
0, 1
0 to 1000
0 to 1000
0, 1
0, 1
0 to 1
0
115%
10%
0.5 sec
0
0
2.0 sec
1024
0
0
0
1
1
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
-
A
A
A
A
-
-
A
Q
Q
No
No
A
A
A
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 19
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
F3-01
DI-08 / DI-16H2 Input
Selection
DI Input
DI-08, 16 Setup
Sets the function of the DI-08 or the DI-16H2 digital input option board.
0: BCD 1% unit
1: BCD 0.1% unit
2: BCD 0.01% unit
3: BCD 1Hz unit
4: BCD 0.1Hz unit
5: BCD 0.01Hz unit
6: BCD (5-digit) 0.01Hz unit (only effective when DI-16H2 is used.)
7: Binary input
When o1-03 is set to 2 or higher, the input will be BCD, and the units will change to the o1-03 setting.
AO-08, 12 Setup
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output. (U1-
The following settings cannot be set:
4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 29, 30, 34, 35, 39, 40, 41.
)
F4-01
F4-02
F4-03
F4-04
F4-05
F4-06
AO-08/AO-12 Channel 1
Monitor Selection
AO Ch1 Sel
AO-08/AO-12 Channel 1
Gain
AO Ch1 Gain
AO-08/AO-12 Channel 2
Monitor Selection
AO Ch2 Sel
AO-08/AO-12 Channel 2
Gain
AO Ch2 Gain
AO-08/AO-12 Channel 1 Output Bias
AO Ch1 Bias
AO-08/AO-12 Channel 2 Output Bias
AO Ch2 Bias
AO-12 Channel 1 Signal
Level
AO Opt Level Ch1
AO-12 Channel 2 Signal
Level
AO Opt Level Ch2
Sets the channel 1 gain.
Ex: Set F4-02 = 50% to output 100% at 5.0V output.
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output. (U1-
The following settings cannot be set:
4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 29, 30, 34, 39, 40, 41.
Sets the channel 2 gain.
Ex: Set F4-04 = 50% to output 100% at 5.0V output.
Sets the channel 1 bias (100%/10V).
Ex: Set F4-05 = 50% to output 0% at 5.0V output.
Sets the channel 2 bias (100%/10V).
Ex: Set F4-06 = 50% to output 0% at 5.0V output.
)
F4-07
F4-08
Sets the range of the voltage output.
0: 0 to 10Vdc
1: -10 to +10Vdc
Sets the range of the voltage output.
0: 0 to 10Vdc
1: -10 to +10Vdc
DO-02, 08 Setup
F5-01
F5-02
F5-03
F5-04
DO-02/DO-08 Channel 1 Output Selection
DO Ch1 Select
DO-02/DO-08 Channel 2 Output Selection
DO Ch2 Select
DO-08 Channel 3 Output
Selection
DO Ch3 Select
DO-08 Channel 4 Output
Selection
DO Ch4 Select
Sets the digital output function number for channel 1. See the H2 parameter group for possible selections.
Effective when digital output card DO-02 or DO-08 is used.
Sets the digital output function number for channel 2. See the H2 parameter group for possible selections.
Effective when digital output card DO-02 or DO-08 is used.
Sets the digital output function number for channel 3. See the H2 parameter group for possible selections.
Effective when digital output card DO-02 or DO-08 is used.
Sets the digital output function number for channel 4. See the H2 parameter group for possible selections.
Effective when digital output card DO-02 or DO-08 is used.
F5-05
F5-06
DO-08 Channel 5 Output
Selection
DO Ch5 Select
DO-08 Channel 6 Output
Selection
DO Ch6 Select
Sets the digital output function number for channel 5. See the H2 parameter group for possible selections.
Effective when digital output card DO-02 or DO-08 is used.
Sets the digital output function number for channel 6. See the H2 parameter group for possible selections.
Effective when digital output card DO-02 or DO-08 is used.
F5-07
DO-08 Channel 7 Output
Selection
DO Ch7 Select
Sets the digital output function number for channel 7. See the H2 parameter group for possible selections.
Effective when digital output card DO-02 or DO-08 is used.
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
0 to 7
1 to 45
0.0 to
1000.0
1 to 45
0.0 to
1000.0
-110.0 to
110.0
0.0%
-110.0 to
110.0
0.0%
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 38
0 to 38
0 to 38
0 to 38
0 to 38
0 to 38
0 to 38
0
2
100.0%
3
50.0%
0
0
0
1
2
4
6
37
F
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 20
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
F5-08
F5-09
DO-08 Channel 8 Output
Selection
DO Ch8 Select
DO-08 Output Mode
Selection
DO-08 Selection
Sets the digital output function number for channel 8. See the H2 parameter group for possible selections.
Effective when digital output card DO-02 or DO-08 is used.
Sets the function of the DO-08 digital output option board.
0: 8-channel individual outputs.
1: Binary code output.
2: 8-channel Selected - Output according to F5-01 to F5-08
settings.
Communications Option Setup
F6-01
F6-02
F6-03
Operation Selection after
Communication Error
Comm Bus Flt Sel
Selection of External Fault from Communication Option
Board
EF0 Detection
Stopping Method for
External Fault from
Communication Option Board
EF0 Fault Action
Selects the stopping method for a communication option board fault
(BUS). Active only when a communication option board is installed and b1-01 or b1-02 = 3.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
3: Alarm Only
Selects the condition in which an EF0 fault is detected from a communication option board. Active only when a communication option board is installed and b1-01 or b1-02 = 3.
0: Always detected
1: Detected only during operation
Selects the stopping method for an external fault from a communication option board (EF0). Active only when a communication option board is installed and b1-01 or b1-02 = 3.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
3: Alarm Only
F6-04
Trace Sampling from
Communications Option
Board
Trace Sample Tim
Sets the sample trace for the CP-916 option board.
F6-05
Current Monitor Display Unit
Selection
Current Unit Sel
Selects the current monitor scaling when using a communication option board.
0: Displayed in Amps
1: 100%/8192 (12 bit binary number with 8192=100% Drive’s rated current)
F6-06
Torque Reference/Torque
Limit Selection from
Communications Option
Torq Ref/Lmt Sel
Selects torque reference/limit when using communications option board.
0: Disabled -Torque reference/limit from option board disabled
1: Enabled -Torque reference/limit from option board enabled.
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
0 to 38
0 to 2
0 to 3
0 to 1
0 to 3
0 to
60000
0 to 1
0 to 1
F
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
A A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 21
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
Digital Inputs
Selects the function of terminals S3 to S8.
0: 3-wire control
FWD/REV selection for 3-wire sequence.
1: Local/Remote Selection
Closed = Local, Open = Remote.
2: Option/Inv Selection
Selects source of frequency reference and sequence.
Closed = Option Card, Open = b1-01 & b1-02.
3: Multi-Step Frequency Reference 1
Based on status of Multi-Step Reference 1 to 4 (d1-16).
4: Multi-Step Frequency Reference 2
Based on status of Multi-Step Reference 1 to 4 (d1-16).
5: Multi-Step Frequency Reference 3
Based on status of Multi-Step Reference 1 to 4 (d1-16).
H1-01
Multi-Function Digital Input
Terminal S3
Function Selection
Terminal S3 Sel
H1-02
Multi-Function Digital Input
Terminal S4
Function Selection
Terminal S4 Sel
Closed = frequency reference from d1-17
7: Accel/Decel Time Se1ection 1
Based on status of Accel/Decel Time Selection 1 and 2.
8: External BaseBlock N.O.
Closed = Output transistors forced off.
Open = Normal operation.
9: External BaseBlock N.C.
Closed = Normal operation.
Open = Output transistors forced off.
A: Acc/Dec Ramp Hold
Closed = Acceleration suspended and speed held.
B: External Overheat Alarm (OH2)
Closed = OH2 alarm.
C: Terminal A2 Enable
Closed = Terminal A2 is active.
Open = Terminal A2 is disabled.
D: V/F Control with PG Disabled
Closed = Speed feedback control disabled.
E: ASR Integral Reset
Closed = Integral reset.
F: Terminal Not Used
Terminal closure has no effect.
10: MOP Increase
Closed = frequency reference increases.
Open = frequency reference held.
Must be set in conjunction with MOP Decrease and b1-01 must be set to 1.
11: MOP Decrease
Closed = frequency reference decreases.
Open = frequency reference held.
Must be set in conjunction with MOP Increase and b1-01 must be set to 1.
12: Forward Jog
Closed = Drive runs forward at frequency reference entered into parameter d1-17.
13: Reverse Jog
Closed = Drive runs in reverse at frequency reference entered into parameter d1-17.
14: Fault Reset
Closed = Resets the Drive after the fault and the run command have been removed.
(Continued on following page).
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
0 to 78
0 to 78
24
14
A
A
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
A
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 22
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
H1-03
H1-04
Multi-Function Digital Input
Terminal S5
Function Selection
Terminal S5 Sel
Multi-Function Digital Input
Terminal S6
Function Selection
Terminal S6 Sel
15: Fast-Stop N.O.
Closed = Drive decelerates using C1-09, regardless of run command status.
16: Motor 2 Selection
Closed = Motor 2 (E3-
17: Fast-Stop N.C.
Closed = Normal operation
, E4-
Open = Motor 1 (A1-02, E1-
)
, E2)
Open = Drive decelerates using C1-09, regardless of run command status.
18: Timer Function
Input for independent timer, controlled by b4-01 and b4-02.
Used in conjunction with the multi-function digital output function H2 = 12 “timer output”.
19: PID Disable
Closed = Turns off the PID controller.
1A: Accel / Decel Time Selection 2
Based on status of Accel/Decel Time Selection 1 and 2.
1B: Program Lockout
Closed = All parameter settings can be changed.
Open = Only U1-01 can be changed.
1C: Trim Control Increase
Closed = Increase frequency reference by value in d4-02.
Open = Return to normal frequency reference.
Not effective when Preset References are selected (Multi-step speed digital inputs are closed). Must be used in conjunction with Trim Ctrl Decrease.
1D: Trim Control Decrease
Closed = Decrease frequency reference by value in d4-02
Open = Return to normal frequency reference.
Not effective when Preset References are selected (Multi-step speed digital inputs are closed). Must be used in conjunction with Trim Ctrl Increase.
1E: Reference Sample Hold
Analog frequency reference is sampled then held at time of input closure.
20: External Fault, Normally Open, Always Detected, Ramp To
Stop
21: External Fault, Normally Closed, Always Detected, Ramp To
Stop
22: External Fault, Normally Open, During Run, Ramp To Stop
23: External Fault, Normally Closed, During Run, Ramp To Stop
24: External Fault, Normally Open, Always Detected, Coast To
Stop
25: External Fault, Normally Closed, Always Detected, Coast To
Stop
26: External Fault, Normally Open, During Run, Coast To Stop
27: External Fault, Normally Closed, During Run, Coast To Stop
28: External Fault, Normally Open, Always Detected, Fast-Stop
29: External Fault, Normally Closed, Always Detected, Fast-Stop
2A:External Fault, Normally Open, During Run, Fast-Stop
2B: External Fault, Normally Closed, During Run, Fast-Stop
2C: External Fault, Normally Open, Always Detected, Alarm Only
2D:External Fault, Normally Closed, Always Detected, Alarm
Only
2E: External Fault, Normally Open, During Run, Alarm Only
2F: External Fault, Normally Closed, During Run, Alarm Only
(Continued on following page).
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
0 to 78
0 to 78
3:
2-wire
0:
3-wire
4:
2-wire
3:
3-wire
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 23
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
H1-05
H1-06
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
Multi-Function Digital Input
Terminal S7
Function Selection
Terminal S7 Sel
Multi-Function Digital Input
Terminal S8
Function Selection
Terminal S8 Sel
Digital Inputs
30:PID integral reset
Closed = Set integrator value to 0.
31: PID integral hold
Closed = Hold integrator at its present level.
32: Multi-Step Reference 4
Based on the status of Multi-Step Reference 1 to 4 (d1-16).
34: PID Soft Starter Cancel
Closed = b5-17 is ignored.
35: PID Input (Error) Polarity Change
Closed = PID error signal polarity is reversed (1 to -1 or
-1 to 1).
60: DC Injection Braking
Closed = Apply DC injection current as set in parameter b2-02.
61: Speed Search 1
Closed = While a run command is given, Drive does a speed
search starting at maximum frequency (E1-04). Speed search based on b3-01.
62: Speed Search 2
Closed = While a run command is given, Drive does a speed
search starting at frequency reference. Speed search based on b3-01.
63: Field Weakening Command (Energy Savings)
Closed = Field weakening control set for d6-01 and d6-02.
64: Speed Search 3
Closed = And a run command is given, Drive does a speed search starting at output frequency. Speed search based on b3-01.
65: Kinetic Energy Braking Ride-thru N.C.
Closed = Normal operation
Open = KEB ride-thru is enabled.
66: Kinetic Energy Braking Ride-thru N.O.
Closed = KEB ride-thru is enabled.
67: Communications Test Mode
Used to test Modbus RS-485/422 interface.
68: High Slip Braking
Closed = Drive stops using High Slip Braking regardless of run command status.
69: Jog 2
Closed = Drive runs at frequency reference entered into parameter d1-17. Direction determined by fwd/rev input.
3-wire control Only.
6A: Drive Enable - Closed = Drive will accept run command.
Open = Drive will not run. If running, Drive will stop per b1-03.
71: Speed / Torque Control Selection
Closed = Torque control operation.
Open = Speed control operation.
72: Zero-Servo Command
Closed = Zero-Servo ON
77: ASR Gain Switch
Open = ASR proportional gain is set according to C5-01.
Closed = ASR proportional gain is set according to C5-03.
78: Polarity Reversing Command for External Torque Control
Closed = Reverse polarity.
0 to 78
0 to 78
6:
2-wire
4:
3-wire
8
A
A
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
A
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
Note: Some digital inputs are control method dependent.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 24
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
H2-01
Terminal M1-M2 Function
Selection
Term M1-M2 Sel
Digital Outputs
Selects the function of terminals M1 to M6.
0: During RUN 1
Closed = When a run command is input or the Drive is outputting voltage.
1: Zero Speed
Closed = When Drive output frequency is less than minimum output frequency (E1-09) or less than DC Injection Braking
Start Frequency (b2-01) when in Flux Vector Control Method.
2: Fref/Fout Agree 1
Closed = When Drive output frequency equals the frequency reference +/- the hysteresis of L4-02.
3: Fref/Set Agree 1
Closed = When the Drive output frequency and the frequency reference are equal to the value in L4-01+/- the hysteresis of
L4-02.
4: Frequency Detection 1
Closed = When the Drive output frequency is less than or equal to the value in L4-01 with hysteresis determined by L4-02.
5: Frequency Detection 2
Closed = When the Drive output frequency is greater than or equal to the value in L4-01, with hysteresis determined by
L4-02.
6: Inverter Ready
Closed = When the Drive is powered up, not in a fault state, and in the DRIVE mode.
7: DC Bus Undervoltage
Closed = When the DC bus voltage falls below the UV trip level set in L2-05.
8: Base Block 1 N.O.
Closed = When the Drive is not outputting voltage.
9: Option Reference
Closed = When the frequency reference is coming from the
Digital Operator.
A: LOCAL/REMOTE Operation
Closed = When the run command is coming from the Digital
Operator.
B: Torque Detection 1 N.O.
Closed = When the output current/torque exceeds the torque value set in parameter L6-02 for more time than is set in parameter L6-03.
C: Loss of Reference
Closed = When the Drive has detected a loss of the analog
frequency reference. Frequency reference is considered lost when it drops 90% in 0.4 seconds. Parameter L4-05 determines
Drive reaction to a loss of frequency reference.
D: Braking Resistor Fault
Closed = When braking resistor or transistor is overheating or has faulted. Only active when L8-01 = 1.
E: Fault
Closed = When the Drive experiences a major fault.
F: Not Used
10:Minor Fault - Alarm
Closed = When Drive experiences an alarm.
(Continued on following page)
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
0 to 38 0 A
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
A A A
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 25
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
H2-02
H2-03
Terminal M3-M4 Function
Selection
Term M3-M4 Sel
Terminal M5-M6 Function
Selection
Term M5-M6 Sel
11: Reset Command Active
Closed = When the Drive receives a reset command from a digital input terminal or serial communication.
12: Timer Output
Output for independent timer, controlled by b4-01 and b4-02.
Used in conjunction with the digital input H1 = 18 “timer function”.
13: Fref/Fout Agree 2
Closed = When Drive output frequency equals the frequency reference +/- the hysteresis of L4-04.
14: Fref/Set Agree 2
Closed = When the Drive output frequency and the frequency reference are equal to the value in L4-03 +/- the hysteresis of
L4-04.
15: Frequency Detection 3
Closed = When the Drive output frequency is less than or equal to the value in L4-03 with the hysteresis determined by L4-04.
16: Frequency Detection 4
Closed = When the Drive output speed is greater than or equal to the value in L4-03, with the hysteresis determined by L4-04.
17: Torque Detection 1 N.C.
Open = When the output current/torque exceeds the value set in parameter L6-02 for more time than is set in parameter
L6-03.
18: Torque Detection 2 N.O.
Closed = When the output current/torque exceeds the value set in parameter L6-05 for more time than is set in parameter
L6-06.
19: Torque Detection 2 N.C.
Open = when the output current/torque exceeds the value set in parameter L6-05 for more time than is set in parameter L6-06.
1A: Reverse Direction
Closed = When the Drive is running in the reverse direction.
1B: Baseblock 2 N.C.
Open = When Drive is not outputting voltage.
1C: Motor 2 Selection
Closed = When motor 2 is selected by multi-function input
“motor 2 selection”.
1D: Regenerating
Closed = When in regenerating mode.
1E: Restart Enabled
Closed = When the Drive is performing an automatic restart attempt. Automatic restart is configured by parameter L5-01.
1F: Overload (OL1)
Closed = When OL1 function is at 90% of its trip point or greater.
20: OH Pre-Alarm
Closed = When the Drive’s heatsink temperature exceeds the setting of parameter L8-02.
30: During Torque Limit (when in speed control)
Closed = When in torque limit.
31: During Speed Limit
Closed = When in speed limit.
32: During Speed Limit (when in torque control)
Closed = When motor frequency is at the speed limit value when running in torque control.
33: Zero-Servo Complete
Closed = When Zero Servo is complete within the b9-02 zero servo completion width.
36: Frequency Detection 5 <3021>
Closed = When the Drive output speed is greater than or equal to the value in L4-03, with the hysteresis determined by L4-04.
37: During Run 2
Closed = When Drive is operating (except during baseblock or
DC braking).
38: Drive Enable
Closed = When the Drive enable input is active.
3D: Drive Cooling Fan Fault Detect <3021>
Closed: When drive’s cooling fan fault is detected.
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
Note: Some digital outputs are control method dependent.
0 to 38
0 to 38
1
2
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 26
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Aotewell
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Email: [email protected]
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
Analog Inputs
H3-01
H3-02
H3-03
Terminal A1 Signal Level
Selection
Term A1 Lvl Sel
Terminal A1 Gain Setting
Terminal A1 Gain
Terminal A1 Bias Setting
Terminal A1 Bias
Sets the signal level of terminal A1.
0: 0 to 10Vdc
1: -10 to +10Vdc
Sets the output level when 10V is input, as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
Sets the output level when 0V is input, as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
H3-04
H3-05
Terminal A3 Signal Level
Selection
Term A3 Signal
Terminal A3 Function
Selection
Terminal A3 Sel
Sets the signal level of terminal A3.
0: 0 to 10Vdc
1: -10 to +10Vdc
Selects the function of terminal A3.
0: Frequency Bias (Adds with terminal A1)
100% = Maximum output frequency (E1-04)
1: Frequency Reference Gain (FGAIN)
100% = Frequency reference command value A1
Total gain = Internal gain (H3-02) x FGAIN
2: Aux Frequency Reference 1
Used in conjunction with multi-function inputs “multi-step frequency reference 1-4” (d1-16).
100% = Maximum output frequency (E1-04)
3: Aux Frequency Reference 2
Used in conjunction with multi-function inputs “multi-step frequency reference 1-4” (H1-xx=3,4,5).
100% = Maximum output frequency (E1-04)
4: Output Voltage Bias
100% = Motor rated voltage (E1-05).
Voltage boost after V/F pattern.
5: Accel / Decel Time Coefficient
100% = Active accel / decel time (C1-01 thru C1-08)
6: DC Injection Braking Current
100% = Drive rated current.
Parameter b2-02 is disabled.
7: Overtorque / Undertorque Detection Level
Used for multi-function digital output for
“overtorque/undertorque”.
100% = motor rated torque (OLV, FV) or Drive rated current
(V/F, V/F w/PG).
Internal overtorque detection level (L6-02) disabled.
8: Stall Prevention Level During Run
100% = L3-06.
9: Frequency Reference Lower Limit
100% = Maximum output frequency (E1-04).
Either d2-02 setting or A3 input level, whichever is greater, becomes effective.
A: Jump Frequency 4
100% = Maximum output frequency (E1-04).
B: PID Feedback
100% = Maximum output frequency (E1-04).
C: PID Set Point
100% = Maximum output frequency (E1-04).
Frequency reference no longer acts as a PID setpoint.
D: Frequency Reference Bias 2 (FBIAS2)
100% = Maximum output frequency (E1-04).
Total bias = Internal bias (H3-03) + FBIAS (H3-07) + A3 input level
E: Motor Temperature
See parameters L1-03 & L1-04.
10: FWD Torque Limit (Quadrant 1)
100% = Motor rated torque.
11: REV Torque Limit (Quadrant 3)
100% = Motor rated torque.
12: Regenerative Torque Limit (Quadrants 2 and 4)
100% = Motor rated torque.
13: Torque Reference (in Torque Control); Torque Limit (in Speed
Control) (Quadrants 1, 2, 3, 4)
100% = Motor rated torque.
14: Torque Compensation
100% = Motor rated torque.
15: FWD / REV Torque Limit (Quadrants 1 and 3)
100% = Motor rated torque.
1F: Not Used
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
Note: Some analog inputs are control method dependent.
0 to 1
0.0 to
1000.0
–100.0 to
+100.0
0 to 1
0 to 1F
0
100.0%
0.0%
0
2
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Parameters A - 27
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
H3-06
H3-07
Terminal A3 Gain Setting
Terminal A3 Gain
Terminal A3 Bias Setting
Terminal A3 Bias
Sets the output level when 10V is input.
Sets the frequency reference when 0V is input.
H3-08
Terminal A2 Signal Level
Selection
Term A2 Signal
Selects the signal level of terminal A2.
0: 0 to 10Vdc (switch S1-2 must be in the OFF position).
1: -10 to +10Vdc (switch S1-2 must be in the OFF position).
2: 4 to 20mA (switch S1-2 must be in the ON position)
H3-09
H3-10
H3-11
H3-12
Terminal A2 Function
Selection
Terminal A2 Sel
Terminal A2 Gain Setting
Terminal A2 Gain
Terminal A2 Bias Setting
Terminal A2 Bias
Analog Input Filter Time
Constant
Filter Avg Time
Selects the function of terminal A2.
Same choices as Terminal A3 Function Selection (H3-05).
Sets the output level when 10V is input.
Sets the output level when 0V is input.
This parameter adjusts the filter on all 3 analog inputs. Increase to add stability, decrease to improve response.
Analog Outputs
H4-01
Terminal FM Monitor
Selection
Terminal FM Sel
Selects which monitor will be output on terminals FM and FC.
1: Frequency Reference
100% = Maximum output frequency E1-04.
2: Output Frequency
100% = Maximum output frequency E1-04.
3: Output Current
100% = Drive rated current.
5: Motor Speed
100% = Maximum output frequency E1-04.
6: Output Voltage
100% = 200/400Vac depending on Drive voltage rating.
7: DC Bus Voltage
100% = 400/800Vdc depending on Drive voltage rating.
8: Output kWatts
100% = Drive rated power.
9: Torque Reference
100% = Motor rated torque.
15:Terminal A1 Input Level
100% = 10Vdc
16:Terminal A2 Input Level
100% = 10Vdc or 20mA
17:Terminal A3 Input Level
100% = 10Vdc
18:Motor Secondary Current
100% = Motor rated secondary current.
19:Motor Excitation Current
100% = Motor rated magnetizing current.
20:SFS Output
100% = Maximum output frequency E1-04.
21:ASR Input
100% = Maximum output frequency E1-04.
22:ASR Output
100% = Maximum output frequency E1-04.
24:PID Feedback
100% = Maximum output frequency E1-04.
26:Output Voltage Reference Vq
100% = E1-05, default 240V or 480V.
27:Output Voltage Reference Vd
100% = E1-05, default 240V or 480V.
31:Not Used
32:ACR q Output (100% = Motor rated secondary current)
33:ACR d Output (100% = Motor rated magnetizing current)
36:PID Input
100% = Maximum output frequency E1-04.
37:PID Output
100% = Maximum output frequency E1-04.
38:PID Setpoint
100% = Maximum output frequency E1-04.
44:ASR Output Without Filter
45:Feedforward Control Output
100% = Motor rated secondary current.
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
0.0 to
1000.0
–100.0 to
+100.0
100.0%
0.0%
0 to 2
0 to 1F
0.0 to
1000.0
–100.0 to
+100.0
0.00 to
2.00
100.0%
0.0%
0.03sec
1 to 45
2
0
2
Parameters A - 28
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
A A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Aotewell
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Email: [email protected]
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
H4-02
H4-03
H4-04
H4-05
H4-06
H4-07
H4-08
H5-01
H5-02
H5-03
H5-04
H5-05
H5-06
H5-07
H5-10
<3021>
Terminal FM Gain Setting
Terminal FM Gain
Terminal FM Bias Setting
Terminal FM Bias
Terminal AM Monitor
Selection
Terminal AM Sel
Terminal AM Gain Setting
Terminal AM Gain
Terminal AM Bias Setting
Terminal AM Bias
Terminal FM Signal Level
Selection
FM Level Select 1
Terminal AM Signal Level
Selection
AM Level Select 2
Drive Node Address
Serial Comm Adr
Communication Speed
Selection
Serial Baud Rate
Communication Parity
Selection
Serial Com Sel
Stopping Method After
Communication Error
Serial Fault Sel
Communication Fault
Detection Selection
Serial Flt Dtct
Drive Transmit Wait Time
Transmit WaitTIM
RTS Control Selection
RTS Control Sel
Unit Selection for
MEMOBUS Register 0025H
MEMOBUS 25H UNIT
Sets terminal FM output level when selected monitor is at 100%.
Sets terminal FM output level when selected monitor is at 0%.
Selects which monitor will be the output on terminals AM and FC.
Same function choices as H4-01.
Sets terminal AM output voltage (in percent of 10Vdc) when selected monitor is at 100% output.
Sets terminal AM output voltage (in percent of 10Vdc) when selected monitor is at 0% output.
Selects the signal level of terminal FM.
0: 0 to 10Vdc
1: -10 to +10Vdc
2: 4 to 20mA*
Selects the signal level of terminal AM.
0: 0 to 10Vdc
1: -10 to +10Vdc
2: 4 to 20mA*
Serial Communications Setup
Selects Drive station node number (address) for Modbus terminals
R+, R-, S+, S-. The Drive’s power must be cycled for the setting to take effect.
Selects the baud rate for Modbus terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-. The
Drive’s power must be cycled for the setting to take effect.
0: 1200 bps
1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
Selects the communication parity for Modbus terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-. The Drive’s power must be cycled for the setting to take effect.
0: No Parity
1: Even Parity
2: Odd Parity
Selects the stopping method when a communication timeout fault
(CE) is detected.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
3: Alarm Only
Enables or disables the communications timeout fault (CE).
0: Disabled - A communication loss will not cause a communication fault.
1: Enabled - If communication is lost for more than 2 seconds, a CE fault will occur.
Set the delay time from when the Drive receives data to when the
Drive sends data.
Enables or disables “request to send” (RTS) control:
0: Disabled - RTS is always on
1: Enabled - RTS turns on only when sending
Selects the units used for MEMOBUS registry 0025H (monitors the output voltage reference).
0: 0.1 V units
1: 1 V units
Pulse I/O Setup
H6-01
Terminal RP Pulse Train Input
Function Selection
Pulse Input Sel
Selects the function of pulse train terminal RP.
0: Frequency reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID setpoint value
H6-02
H6-03
Pulse Train Input Scaling
Pulse In Scaling
Pulse Train Input Gain
Pulse Input Gain
Sets the number of pulses (in Hz) that is equal to the maximum output frequency E1-04.
Sets the output level when the pulse train input is at 100% as a percentage of maximum output frequency E1-04.
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
Note: Some digital outputs are control method dependent.
0.0 to
1000.0
–110.0 to
110.0
1 to 45
0.0 to
1000.0
–110.0 to
110.0
0 or 2
0 or 2
0 to 20
Hex
0 to 4
0 to 2
0 to 3
0 to 1
5 to 65
0 to 1
0, 1
0 to 2
1000 to
32000
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0%
0.0%
3
50.0%
0.0%
0
0
1F
3
0
3
1
5ms
1
0
0
1440Hz
100.0%
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Parameters A - 29
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
H6-04
H6-05
H6-06
H6-07
L1-01
L1-02
L1-03
L1-04
L1-05
L2-01
L2-02
L2-03
L2-04
Pulse Train Input Bias
Pulse Input Bias
Pulse Train Input Filter Time
Pulse In Filter
Terminal MP Pulse Train
Monitor Selection
Pulse Moni Sel
Pulse Train Monitor
Scaling
Pulse Moni Scale
Motor Overload
Protection Selection
MOL Fault Select
Sets the output level when the pulse train input is 0Hz as a percentage of maximum output frequency E1-04.
Sets the pulse train input filter time constant in seconds.
Select the pulse train monitor output terminal MP function (value of the part of U1). See Table A2 for the list of U1 monitors.
Sets the number of output pulses when the monitor is 100% (in Hz).
Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to 0, to make the pulse train monitor output synchronous to the output frequency.
Motor Overload
Sets the motor thermal overload protection (OL1) based on the cooling capacity of the motor.
0: Disabled
1: Standard Fan Cooled (< 10:1 motor)
2: Standard Blower Cooled (
≥
10:1 motor)
3: Vector Motor (
≤
1000:1 motor)
Motor Overload
Protection Time
MOL Time Const
Sets the motor thermal overload protection (OL1) time. A larger
L1-02 time will increase the time before an OL1 fault will occur.
Motor Overheat Alarm
Operation Selection
Mtr OH Alarm Sel
Motor Overheat Fault
Operation Selection
Mtr OH Fault Sel
Motor Temperature Input
Filter Time
Mtr Temp Filter
Momentary Power Loss
Detection Selection
PwrL Selection
Sets operation selection when the motor temperature analog input
(H3-09 = E) exceeds the OH3 alarm level (1.17V)
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
3: Alarm Only
Sets stopping method when the motor temperature analog input
(H3-09 = E) exceeds the OH4 fault level (2.34V).
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
This parameter adjusts the filter on the motor temperature analog input (H3-09 = E). Increase to add stability, decrease to improve response.
Power Loss Ridethru
Enables and disables the momentary power loss function.
0: Disabled - Drive trips on (UV1) fault when power is lost.
1: Power Loss Ride Thru Time - Drive will restart if power returns within the time set in L2-02.*
2: CPU Power Active - Drive will restart if power returns prior to control power supply shut down.*
* In order for a restart to occur, the run command must be maintained throughout the ride thru period.
Momentary Power Loss Ridethru Time
PwrL Ridethru t
Sets the power loss ride-thru time. This value is dependent on the capacity of the Drive. Only effective when L2-01 = 1.
Momentary Power Loss
Minimum Base Block Time
PwrL Baseblock t
Sets the minimum time to wait to allow the residual motor voltage to decay before the Drive output turns back on during power loss ride thru. After a power loss, if L2-03 is greater than L2-02, operation resumes after the time set in L2-03.
Momentary Power Loss
Voltage Recovery Ramp Time
PwrL V/F Ramp t
Sets the time it takes the output voltage to return to the preset V/F pattern after speed search (current detection mode) is complete.
L2-05
Undervoltage Detection
Level
PUV Det Level
Sets the Drive's DC Bus undervoltage trip level. If this is set lower than the factory setting, additional AC input reactance or DC bus reactance may be necessary. Consult the factory before changing this parameter setting.
L2-06
L2-07
KEB Deceleration Rate
KEB Decel Time
Momentary Recovery Time
UV Return Time
Sets the time required to decelerate to zero speed when a KEB command is input from a multi-function input.
Set the time (in seconds) to accelerate to the set speed after recovery from a momentary power loss. If setting = 0.0, then active acceleration time is used instead.
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
0.0 to
5.0sec
150 to
210
300 to
420
0.0 to
200.0
0.0 to
25.5
-100.0 to
100.0
0.00 to
2.00
1, 2, 5,
20, 24,
31, 36
0 to
32000
0.0%
0.10sec
2
1440Hz
0 to 3
0.1 to
20.0
0 to 3
0 to 2
0.00 to
10.00
0 to 2
0.0 to
25.5sec
0.1 to
5.0sec
1
8.0min
3
1
0.20sec
0
0.0sec
Varies by kVA
Varies by kVA
Varies by kVA
190 Vdc
(230V)
380 Vdc
(480V)
0.0sec
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
A A A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 30
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
L2-08
Frequency Reduction Gain at
KEB Start
KEB Frequency
Sets the percentage of output frequency reduction at the beginning of deceleration when a KEB command is input from multi-function input.
Reduction = slip frequency before KEB operation
×
L2-08
×
2
Stall Prevention
0 to 300 100% A A
L3-01
Stall Prevention Selection
During Accel
StallP Accel Sel
Selects the stall prevention method used to prevent excessive current during acceleration.
0: Disabled - Motor accelerates at active acceleration rate. The motor may stall if load is too heavy or accel time is too short.
1: General Purpose - When output current exceeds L3-02 level, acceleration stops. Acceleration will continue when the output current level falls below the L3-02 level.
2: Intelligent - The active acceleration rate is ignored. Acceleration is completed in the shortest amount of time without exceeding the current value set in L3-02.
0 to 2 1 A A
L3-02
Stall Prevention Level
During Acceleration
StallP Accel Lvl
This function is enabled when L3-01 is “1” or “2”.
Drive rated current is 100%. Decrease the set value if stalling or excessive current occurs with factory setting.
0 to 200
Varies by
Duty
Rating*
A A
L3-03
L3-04
L3-05
L3-06
L3-11
Stall Prevention Limit During
Acceleration
StallP CHP Lvl
Stall Prevention Selection
During Deceleration
StallP Decel Sel
Stall Prevention Selection
During Running
StallP Run Sel
Stall Prevention Level
During Running
StallP Run Level
OV Suppression Function
Selection
OV Inhibit Sel
Sets the lower limit for stall prevention during acceleration, as a percentage of the Drive’s rated current, when operation is in the frequency range above E1-06 (constant power region).
When using a braking resistor, use setting “0”. Setting “3” is used in specific applications.
0: Disabled - The Drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate. If the load is too large or the deceleration time is too short, an OV fault may occur.
1: General Purpose - The Drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate, but if the main circuit DC bus voltage reaches the stall prevention level (380/760Vdc), deceleration will stop.
Deceleration will continue once the DC bus level drops below the stall prevention level.
2: Intelligent - The active deceleration rate is ignored and the Drive decelerates as fast as possible w/o hitting OV fault level.
Range: C1-02 / 10.
3: Stall Prevention w/ Braking Resistor - Stall prevention during deceleration is enabled in coordination with dynamic braking.
(Not available in Flux Vector)
Selects the stall prevention method to use to prevent Drive faults during run.
0: Disabled - Drive runs a set frequency. A heavy load may cause the Drive to trip on an OC or OL fault.
1: Decel Time 1 - In order to avoid stalling during heavy loading, the Drive will decelerate at Decel time 1 (C1-02) if the output current exceeds the level set by L3-06. Once the current level drops below the L3-06 level, the Drive will accelerate back to its frequency reference at the active acceleration rate.
2: Decel Time 2 - Same as setting 1 except the Drive decelerates at
Decel Time 2 (C1-04).
When output frequency is 6Hz or less, stall prevention during running is disabled regardless of L3-05 setting.
This parameter is enabled when L3-05 is set to “1” or “2”.
Drive rated current is set as 100%.
Decrease the set value if stalling or excessive current occurs with factory setting.
Enables or disables OV suppression function, which allows the
Drive to change the output frequency as the load changes, to prevent OV fault.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 to 100
0 to 3
0 to 2
30 to 200
0 to 1
50%
1
1
Varies by
Duty
Rating*
0
A
Q
A
A
-
A
Q
A
A
-
350 to
390
(240V)
L3-12
OV Suppression Function
Voltage Level
OV Inhbt VoltLvl
Sets the DC bus voltage level at which the OV suppression function is active.
380V or
760V
-
700 to
780
(480V)
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
* For Heavy Duty (HD) Rating: Factory Setting=150%.
For Normal Duty (ND) Rating: Factory Setting=120%. The setting value will change automatically if the carrier frequency is set larger than the default setting.
A
A
A
A
Q
-
-
A
A
Flux
Vector
A
-
-
-
Q
-
-
A
A
Parameters A - 31
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Aotewell
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Email: [email protected]
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
Reference Detection
L4-01
Speed Agreement
Detection Level
Spd Agree Level
These parameters configure the multi-function output (H2settings “Fref/Fout agree 1”, “Fref/Set agree 1”, “Frequency
) detection 1,” and “Frequency detection 2". Parameter L4-01 sets the level while parameter L4-02 sets the hysteresis for the speed detection output function.
Varies by
Duty
Rating*
1
L4-02
Speed Agreement
Detection Width
Spd Agree Width
0.0 to
20.0
L4-03
Speed Agreement
Detection Level (+/-)
Spd Agree Lvl +-
These parameters configure the multi-function output (H2settings “Fref/Fout agree 2”, “Fref/Set agree 2”,
)
“Frequency detection 3,” or “Frequency detection 4". Parameter
L4-03 sets the level while parameter L4-04 sets the hysteresis for the speed detection output function.
Varies by
Duty
Rating*
2
L4-04
Speed Agreement
Detection Width (+/-)
Spd Agree Wdth +-
0.0 to
20.0
L4-05
L4-06
L5-01
Frequency Reference Loss
Detection Selection
Ref Loss Sel
Frequency Reference Level at
Loss Frequency
Fref at Floss
Number of Auto Restart
Attempts
Num of Restarts
Determines how the Drive will react when the frequency reference is lost. The frequency reference is considered lost when reference drops 90% or more of its current value in less than 400ms.
0: Stop - Drive will stop.
1: Run at L4-06 PrevRef - Drive will run at the percentage set in
L4-06 of the frequency reference level at the time frequency
reference was lost.
If the frequency reference loss function is enabled (L4-05=1) and frequency reference is lost, the Drive will run at a reduced frequency reference determined by the following formula:
Fref = Fref at time of loss * L4-06.
Fault Restart
Sets the counter for the number of times the Drive will perform an automatic restart on the following faults: GF, LF, OC, OV, PF, PUF,
RH, RR, OL1, OL2, OL3, OL4, UV1. Auto restart will check to see if the fault has cleared every 5ms. When no fault is present, the
Drive will attempt an auto restart. If the Drive faults after an auto restart attempt, the counter is incremented. When the Drive operates without fault for 10 minutes, the counter will reset to the value set in L5-01.
0 to 1
0 to 100.0
0 to 10
L5-02
Auto Restart Operation Selection
Restart Sel
Determines if the fault contact activates during an automatic restart attempt.
0: No Fault Relay - fault contact will not activate during an automatic restart attempt.
1: Fault Relay Active - fault contact will activate during an automatic restart attempt.
Torque Detection
0 to 1
L6-01
Torque Detection
Selection 1
Torq Det 1 Sel
Determines the Drive's response to an Overtorque/Undertorque condition. Overtorque and Undertorque are determined by the settings in parameters L6-02 and L6-03. The multi-function output settings “B” and “17” in the H2 parameter group are also active if programmed.
0: Disabled
1: OL3 at Speed Agree - Alarm (Overtorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Operation continues after detection).
2: OL3 at RUN - Alarm (Overtorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection).
3: OL3 at Speed Agree - Fault (Overtorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault).
4: OL3 at RUN - Fault (Overtorque Detection is always active and
Drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault).
5: UL3 at Speed Agree - Alarm (Undertorque Detection is only active during Speed Agree and operation continues after
detection).
6: UL3 at RUN - Alarm (Undertorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection).
7: UL3 at Speed Agree - Fault (Undertorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault).
8: UL3 at RUN - Fault (Undertorque Detection is always active and
Drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault).
0 to 8
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
*1 For Heavy Duty (HD) Rating: Setting Range=0.0 to 300.0. For Normal Duty (ND) Rating: Setting Range=0.0 to 400.0.
*2 For Heavy Duty (HD) Rating: Setting Range= -300.0 to 300.0. For Normal Duty (ND) Rating: Setting Range= -400.0 to 400.0.
0.0Hz
2.0Hz
0.0Hz
2.0Hz
0
80.0%
0
0
0
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 32
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
L6-02
L6-03
L6-04
L6-05
L6-06
L7-01
L7-02
L7-03
L7-04
Description
Torque Detection Level 1
Torq Det 1 Lvl
Torque Detection Time 1
Torq Det 1 Time
Torque Detection
Selection 2
Torq Det 2 Sel
Torque Detection Level 2
Torq Det 2 Lvl
Torque Detection Time 2
Torq Det 2 Time
Forward Torque Limit
Torq Limit Fwd
Reverse Torque Limit
Torq Limit Rev
Forward Regenerative Torque
Limit
Torq Lmt Fwd Rgn
Sets the Overtorque/Undertorque detection level as a percentage of
Drive rated current or torque for torque detection 1. Current detection for A1-02 = 0 or 1. Torque detection for A1-02 = 2 or 3.
Sets the length of time an Overtorque/Undertorque condition must exist before torque detection 1 recognized by the Drive.
Determines the Drive's response to an Overtorque/Undertorque condition. Overtorque and Undertorque are determined by the settings in parameters L6-05 and L6-06. The multi-function output settings “18” and “19” in the H2 parameter group are also active if programmed.
0: Disabled
1: OL4 at Speed Agree - Alarm (Overtorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Operation continues after detection).
2: OL4 at RUN - Alarm (Overtorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection).
3: OL4 at Speed Agree - Fault (Overtorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Drive output will shut down on an OL4 fault).
4: OL4 at RUN - Fault (Overtorque Detection is always active and
Drive output will shut down on an OL4 fault).
5: UL4 at Speed Agree - Alarm (Undertorque Detection is only active during Speed Agree and operation continues after detection).
6: UL4 at RUN - Alarm (Undertorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection).
7: UL4 at Speed Agree - Fault (Undertorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Drive output will shut down on an OL4 fault).
8: UL4 at RUN - Fault (Undertorque Detection is always active and
Drive output will shut down on an OL4 fault).
Sets the Overtorque/Undertorque detection level as a percentage of
Drive rated current or torque for torque detection 2. Current detection for A1-02 = 0 or 1. Torque detection for A1-02 = 2 or 3.
Sets the length of time an Overtorque/Undertorque condition must exist before torque detection 2 is recognized by the Drive.
Torque Limit
Sets the torque limit value as a percentage of the motor rated torque.
Four individual quadrants can be set.
Reverse
Output torque
Positive torque
Regen. state
No. of motor rotations
Regen. state
Forward Reverse Regenerative Torque
Limit
Torq Lmt Rev Rgn
Negative torque
0 to 300
0.0 to
10.0
0 to 8
0 to 300
0.0 to
10.0
0 to 300
0 to 300
0 to 300
0 to 300
L8-01
Internal Dynamic Braking
Resistor Protection
Selection
DB Resistor Prot
Hardware Protection
Selects the DB protection only when using 3% duty cycle heatsink mount Yaskawa braking resistor. This parameter does not enable or disable the DB function of the Drive.
0: Not Provided
1: Provided
L8-02
Overheat Alarm Level
OH Pre-Alarm Lvl
When the cooling fin temperature exceeds the value set in this parameter, an overheat alarm (OH) will occur.
L8-03
L8-05
Overheat Pre-Alarm
Operation Selection
OH Pre-Alarm Sel
Input Phase Loss
Protection Selection
Ph Loss In Sel
Selects the Drive operation upon an OH pre-alarm detection.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
3: Alarm Only
Selects the detection of input current phase loss, power supply voltage imbalance, or main circuit electrostatic capacitor deterioration.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
0 to 1
50 to
130
0 to 3
0 to 1
150%
0.1sec
0
150%
0.1sec
200%
200%
200%
200%
0
Varies by kVA
3
1
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
-
A
A
A
A
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
A A A
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Parameters A - 33
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
L8-07
L8-09
L8-10
Output Phase Loss
Protection
Ph Loss Out Sel
Output Ground Fault
Detection Selection
Ground Fault Sel
Heatsink Cooling Fan
Operation Selection
Fan On/Off Sel
Selects the detection of output current open-phase.
When applied motor capacity is too small for Drive capacity, output phase loss may be detected inadvertently. In this case, set to
0.
0: Disabled
1: 1-phase Loss Detection
2: 2/3-phase Loss Detection
Enables and disables the Drive’s output ground fault detection.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Controls the heatsink cooling fan operation.
0: Fan On-Run Mode - Fan will operate only when the Drive is running and for L8-11 seconds after RUN is removed.
1: Fan Always On - Cooling fan operates whenever the Drive is powered up.)
L8-11
L8-12
Heatsink Cooling Fan
Operation Delay Time
Fan Delay Time
Ambient Temperature
Setting
Ambient Temp
This parameter sets the delay time for the cooling fan turn off after the run command is removed when L8-10 = 0.
When the Drive is installed in an ambient temperature exceeding its rating, the Drive overload (OL2) protection level is adjusted.
L8-15
L8-18
OL2 Characteristic
Selection at Low Speeds
OL2 Sel @ L-Spd
Soft CLA Selection
Soft CLA Sel
This parameter assists in protecting the output transistors from overheating when output current is high and output frequency is low (6Hz and less).
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (L8-18 is active)
Enables and disables the software current limit function. Consult the factory before disabling.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
L8-32
<3021>
Cooling Fan OH1
Detection
OH1 Detect Sel
0: Disabled (FAN minor fault detection)
1: Enabled (OH1 major fault detection) n1-01
Hunting Prevention
Selection
Hunt Prev Select
Hunting Prevention
If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded, hunting prevention may reduce the vibration.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled n1-02
Hunting Prevention Gain
Setting
Hunt Prev Gain
Sets the gain for the Hunting Prevention Function.
If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded and n1-01=1, increase the gain by 0.1 until vibration ceases.
If the motor stalls while n1-01=1, decrease the gain by 0.1 until the stalling ceases.
AFR Tuning n2-01
Speed Feedback
Detection Control
(AFR) Gain
AFR Gain
Sets the internal speed feedback detection control gain in the automatic frequency regulator (AFR).
Normally, there is no need to change this setting.
Adjust this parameter as follows:
• If hunting occurs, increase the set value.
• If response is low, decrease the set value.
Adjust the setting by 0.05 units at a time, while checking the response.
n2-02 n2-03
Speed Feedback
Detection Control (AFR)
Time Constant
AFR Time
Speed Feedback
Detection Control (AFR)
Time Constant 2
AFR Time 2
Sets the time constant to control the rate of change in the speed feedback detection control.
Sets the time constant to control the amount of change in the speed at low speed.
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 300
45 to 60
0 to 1
0 to 1
0, 1
0 to 1
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
10.00
0 to 2000
0 to 2000
1
1
0
60sec
45°C
0
1
1
1
1.00
1.00
50ms
750ms
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
-
-
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 34
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector n3-01 n3-02 n3-03 n3-04 o1-01 o1-02
High Slip Braking
Deceleration Frequency
Width
HSB Decel Width
High Slip Braking
Current Limit
HSB Current Ref
High Slip Braking Dwell
Time at Stop
HSB DwelTim@ Stp
High Slip Braking
Overload Time
HSB OL Time
User Monitor Selection
User Monitor Sel
User Monitor Selection After
Power-Up
Power-On Monitor
High Slip Braking
Sets how aggressively the Drive decreases the output frequency as it stops the motor using high slip braking (HSB). If Overvoltage
(OV) faults occur during HSB, this parameter may need to be increased.
Sets the maximum current to be drawn during an HSB stop. Higher n3-02 settings will shorten motor stopping times but cause increased motor current, and therefore increased motor heating.
Sets the amount of time the Drive will dwell at E1-09 (Minimum
Frequency) at the end of deceleration. If this time is set too low, the machine inertia can cause the motor to rotate slightly after the HSB stop is complete and the Drive output is shut off.
Sets the time required for an HSB overload fault (OL7) to occur when the Drive output frequency does not change for some reason during an HSB stop. Normally this does not need to be adjusted.
Monitor Select
Selects which monitor will be displayed in the operation menu upon power-up when o1-02 = 4.
Selects which monitor will be displayed upon power-up.
1: Frequency Reference (U1-01)
2: Output Frequency (U1-02)
3: Output Current (U1-03)
4: User Monitor (set by o1-01) o1-03
Digital Operator Display
Selection
Display Scaling
Sets the units of the Frequency References (d1-01 to d1-17), the Frequency Reference Monitors (U1-01,
U1-02, U1-05), and the Modbus communication frequency reference.
0: Hz
1: % (100% = E1-04)
2 to 39: RPM (Enter the number of motor poles).
40 to 39999: User display.
Set the number desired at maximum output frequency.
4 digit number
Number of digits from the right of the decimal point
Example 1: o1-03 = 12000, will result in frequency reference from 0.0 to 200.0 (200.0 = Fmax).
Example 2: o1-03 = 21234, will result in frequency reference from 0.00 to 12.34 (12.34 = Fmax).
o1-04 o1-05
Setting unit for frequency parameters related to V/F characteristics
Display Units
LCD Brightness
Adjustment
LCD Contrast
Sets the setting units related to V/F pattern frequency related parameters (E1-04, -06, -09, -11)
0: Hertz
1: RPM
Sets the contrast of the Digital Operator LCD. A setting of “1” is the lightest contrast and a setting of “5” is the darkest contrast.
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
1 to 20
100 to
200
0.0 to
10.0
30 to
1200
4 to 45
1 to 4
0 to
39999
0 to 1
0 to 5
5%
150%
1.0sec
40sec
6
1
0
0
3
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
A
-
-
-
-
A
A
A
-
A
-
-
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 35
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
Key Selections o2-01 o2-02 o2-03 o2-04 o2-05 o2-06
Local/Remote Key
Function
Selection
Local/Remote Key
STOP Key Function
Selection
Oper STOP Key
User Parameter Default Value
User Defaults
Drive/kVA Selection
Inverter Model #
Frequency Reference
Setting Method Selection
Operator M.O.P.
Operation Selection when
Digital Operator is
Disconnected
Oper Detection
Determines if the Digital Operator Local/Remote key is functional.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Determines if the STOP key on the Digital Operator will stop the
Drive when Drive is operating from external terminals or serial communication.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Allows storing of parameter settings as a User Initialization
Selection.
0: No Change
1: Set Defaults - Saves current parameter settings as user initialization. A1-03 now allows selecting <1110> for user initialization and returns o2-03 to zero.
2: Clear All - Clears the currently saved user initialization. A1-03 no longer allows selecting <1110> and returns o2-03 to zero.
Sets the kVA of the Drive. Enter the number based on Drive model number. Use the last four digits of the model number.
CIMR-F7U .
This parameter only needs to be set when installing a new control board. Do not change for any other reason. Refer to Table B.1.
Determines if the Data/Enter key must be used to input a frequency reference from the Digital Operator.
0: Disabled - Data/Enter key must be pressed to enter a frequency reference.
1: Enabled - Data/Enter key is not required. The frequency reference is adjusted by the up and down arrow keys on the
Digital Operator without having to press the data/enter key.
Determines if the Drive will stop when the Digital Operator is removed when in LOCAL mode or b1-02=0.
0: Disabled - The Drive will not stop when the Digital Operator is removed.
1: Enabled - The Drive will fault (OPR) and coast to stop when the
Digital Operator is removed.
o2-07
Cumulative Operation Time
Setting
Elapsed Time Set
Sets the initial value of the elapsed operation timer U1-13.
o2-08
Cumulative Operation Time
Selection
Elapsed Time Run
Sets how time is accumulated for the elapsed operation timer
U1-13.
0: Power-On Time - Time accumulates when the Drive is powered.
1: Running Time - Time accumulates only when the Drive is running.
Determines parameter default values after a Drive initialization
(A1-03) is executed. This should always be set to "1" for North
American installations.
1: American spec o2-09
Initialization Specification
Selection
Init Mode Sel
WARNING
Possible damage to equipment or injury may occur if this setting is changed from “1: American Spec.” O2-09 is a macro parameter that can change the default values of terminal I/O and many other parameters in the drive. Consult the Yaskawa factory for details if adjustment is required.
o2-10 o2-12
Cumulative Cooling Fan
Operation Time Setting
Fan ON Time Set
Fault Trace/Fault History
Clear Function
FLT Trace Init
Sets the initial value of the heatsink fan operation time monitor
U1-40.
Clears the fault memory contained in the U2 and U3 monitors.
0: Disabled - no effect
1: Enabled - resets U2 and U3 monitors, and returns o2-12 to zero.
o2-14 kWh User Monitor
Initialization kWH MonitorClear
Used to reset the kilowatt-hour monitor U1-29 to zero.
0: Disabled - no change
1: Enabled - Resets U1-29 to zero and returns o2-14 to zero.
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 2
0 to FF
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to
65535
0 to 1
1
0 to
65535
0 to 1
0 to 1
1
1
0
Varies by kVA
0
1
0H
0
1
0H
0
0
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 36
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Table A.1 F7 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F o3-01
Copy Function Selection
Copy Function Sel
COPY Function
This parameter controls the copying of parameters to and from the
Digital Operator.
0: COPY SELECT (no function)
1: INV -> OP READ - All parameters are copied from the
Drive to the Digital Operator.
2: OP -> INV WRITE - All parameters are copied from the
Digital Operator to the Drive.
3: OP<-->INV VERIFY - Parameter settings in the Drive are compared to those in the Digital Operator.
0 to 3 o3-02
T1-00
T1-01
Copy Allowed Selection
Read Allowable
Motor Selection 1 / 2
Select Motor
Auto-Tuning mode selection
Tuning Mode Sel
NOTE: When using the copy function, the Drive model number
(o2-04), software number (U1-14), and control method
(A1-02) must match or an error will occur.
Enables and disables the Digital Operator copy functions.
0: Disabled - No Digital Operator copy functions are allowed.
1: Enabled - Copying allowed.
Auto-Tuning
Selects which set of motor parameters are to be used and set during
Auto-Tuning. If Motor 2 selection (H1-XX=16) is not selected, this parameter will not be displayed.
1: 1st Motor - E1 to E2
2: 2nd Motor - E3 to E4
Selects the Auto-Tuning mode.
0: Rotational Auto-Tuning (A1-02 = 2 or 3)
1: Stationary Auto-Tuning (A1-02 = 2 or 3)
2: Terminal resistance only, (stationary) Auto-Tuning
(A1-02 = 0, 1, 2, or 3)
Set the motor rated power in kilowatts (kW).
NOTE:If motor power is given in horsepower, power in kW can be calculated using the following formula: kW = Hp * 0.746
0 to 1
1, 2
0 to 2
T1-02
Motor Rated Power
Mtr Rated Power
0.00 to
650.00 kW
0.0 to
255.0
(240V)
T1-03
Motor rated voltage
Rated Voltage
Set the motor rated voltage in Volts (V).
T1-04
Motor Rated Current
Rated Current
Set the motor rated current in Amperes (A).
0.0 to
510.0
(480V)
Varies by kVA
T1-05
Motor Base Frequency
Rated Frequency
Set the base frequency of the motor in Hertz (Hz).
Varies by
Duty
Rating*
T1-06
T1-07
Number of Motor Poles
Number of Poles
Motor Base Speed
Rated Speed
Set the number of motor poles.
Set the base speed of the motor in revolutions per minute (RPM).
2 to 48
T1-08
Number of PG Pulses
PG Pulses / Rev
Set the number of pulses per revolution (PPR) for the encoder
(pulse generator) being used without any multiplication factor.
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running.
* For Heavy Duty (HD) Rating: Setting Range=0.0 to 300.0. For Normal Duty (ND) Rating: Setting Range=0.0 to 400.0.
0 to
24000
0 to
60000
0
0
1
0
Varies by kVA
230Vac or
460Vac
Varies by kVA
60.0Hz
4 poles
1750
RPM
1024
PPR
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
-
-
A
Control Method
V/F w/PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
-
A
-
-
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 37
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
F7 Monitor List
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Parameter
No.
U1-01
U1-02
U1-03
U1-04
U1-05
U1-06
U1-07
U1-08
U1-09
U1-10
U1-11
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Frequency Reference
Frequency Ref
Output Frequency
Output Freq
Output Current
Output Current
Control Method
Control Method
Motor Speed
Motor Speed
Output Voltage
Output Voltage
DC Bus Voltage
DC Bus Voltage
Output Power
Output kWatts
Torque Reference
Torque Reference
Input Terminal Status
Input Term Sts
Output Terminal Status
Output Term Sts
Table A.2 F7 Monitor List
Description
Monitor
Frequency reference (speed command) monitor when in
REMOTE mode, frequency reference (speed command) setting location when in local mode or b1-01 = 0.
Output frequency
Output current
Control method set in A1-02.
0 = V/F without PG
1 = V/F with PG
2 = Open Loop Vector
3 = Flux Vector
Motor speed feedback
Output voltage
DC Bus Voltage
Output power
Torque reference
Input terminal status
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1: FWD. run
(Terminal S1) is ON.
1: REV. run
(Terminal S2) is ON.
1: Multi-function input 1
(Terminal S3) is ON.
1: Multi-function input 2
(Terminal S4) is ON.
1: Multi-function input 3
(Terminal S5) is ON.
1: Multi-function input 4
(Terminal S6) is ON.
1: Multi-function input 5
(Terminal S7) is ON.
1: Multi-function input 6
(Terminal S8) is ON.
Output terminal status.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1: Multi-function Output 1
(Terminal M1-M2) is ON.
1: Multi-function Output 2
(Terminal M3-M4) is ON.
1: Multi-function Output 3
(Terminal M5-M6) is ON.
0: Not used
1: Fault output
(Terminal MA-MB-MC) is
ON.
Display Units
Set by o1-03.
Set by o1-03.
0.01A
Set by o1-03.
0.1Vac
1Vdc
0.1kW
0.1%
-
-
-
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 38
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
U1-30
U1-32
U1-33
U1-34
U1-26
U1-27
U1-28
U1-29
U1-35
U1-36
U1-37
U1-13
U1-14
U1-15
U1-16
U1-17
U1-18
U1-19
U1-20
U1-21
U1-22
U1-24
Parameter
No.
U1-12
U1-25
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Drive Operation Status
Int Ctl Sts 1
Table A.2 F7 Monitor List (Continued)
Description
Internal Drive status
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1: During running
1: During zero speed
1: During reverse
1: During reset signal input
1: During speed agree
1: Drive operation ready
1: During fault detection
(Minor fault)
1: During fault detection
(Major fault)
Cumulative Operation Time
Elapsed Time
Software Number
FLASH ID
Terminal A1 Input Voltage
Term A1 Level
Terminal A2 Input Voltage
Term A2 level
Terminal A3 Input Voltage
Term A3 level
Motor Secondary Current (I q
)
Mot SEC Current
Motor Excitation Current (I d
)
Mot EXC Current
Output Frequency After Soft Start
SFS Output
ASR Input
ASR Input
ASR Output with Filter
ASR Output w Fil
PI Feedback Value
PID Feedback
Total operating or power-on time of the Drive.
Last 5 digits of the Drive's software number.
Current being used by the motor to produce torque (I q
).
Current being used by the motor for excitation (I d
).
Frequency reference (speed command) after the accel and decel ramps and S-curve.
Input error to the speed control loop (ASR).
The maximum output frequency E1-04 corresponds to 100%.
Output from the speed control loop (ASR).
The motor rated secondary current corresponds to 100%.
DI-16H2 Input Status
DI-16 Reference
Output voltage reference (Vq)
Voltage Ref (Vq)
Output voltage reference (Vd)
Voltage Ref (Vd)
CPU Number
CPU ID kWh kWh Lo 4 Digits
MWh kWh Hi 5 Digits
ACR output of q axis
ACR(q) Output
ACR output of d axis
ACR(d) Output
First Parameter Causing an OPE
OPE Detected
Zero Servo Pulse Count
Zero Servo Pulse
PID Input
PID Input
PID Output
PID Output
Input voltage on Terminal A1, as a percentage of
Displays the input current (or voltage) on Terminal A2, as a percentage of ± 10Vdc.
Input voltage on Terminal A3, as a percentage of
± 10Vdc.
± 10Vdc.
Feedback signal level when PID control is used.
Reference value from a DI-16H2 Digital Reference Card.
The value will be displayed in binary or BCD depending on user constant F3-01.
Internal voltage reference for motor secondary current control.
Internal voltage reference for motor excitation current control.
Control board hardware revision.
Accumulated kilowatt-hours.
Accumulated megawatt-hours.
Current control output value for the motor secondary current.
Current control output value for the motor excitation current.
Parameter number causing an "OPE" fault.
Number of PG pulses times 4 for the movement range when stopped at zero servo.
Input error to the PID regulator
(PID Setpoint - PID Feedback).
Output of the PID regulator as a percentage of maximum frequency (E1-04).
Display Units
-
Set by F3-01
0.1Vac
0.1Vac
-
0.1kWh
1MWh
0.1%
0.1%
-
1 pulse
0.01%
0.01%
1hr
-
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
0.01Hz
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 39
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Parameter
No.
U1-38
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
PID Setpoint
PID Setpoint
U1-39
Modbus Communication Error
Code
Transmit Err
Table A.2 F7 Monitor List (Continued)
Description
Setpoint of the PID regulator (PID reference + PID bias).
Modbus serial communication error codes.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1: CRC error
1: Data length error
0: Not used. Always 0.
1: Parity error
1: Overrun error
1: Framing error
1: Timeout
0: Not used. Always 0.
U1-40
U1-44
U1-45
Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation
Time
FAN Elapsed Time
ASR output without filter
ASR out w/o Fil
Feed forward control output
FF Cont Output
Total operating time of the heatsink cooling fan.
Output from the speed control loop (ASR) before the ASR primary delay filter (C5-06). 100% is displayed for rated secondary current of the motor.
Output from feed forward control. 100% is displayed for rated secondary current of the motor.
Display Units
0.01%
-
1hr
0.01%
0.01%
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 40
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
F7 Fault Trace List
Table A.3 F7 Fault Trace List
Fault Trace
U2-01
U2-02
U2-03
U2-04
U2-05
U2-06
U2-07
U2-08
Current Fault.
Current Fault
Previous Fault.
Last Fault
Frequency Reference at Previous Fault.
Frequency Ref
Output Frequency at Previous Fault.
Output Freq
Output Current at Previous Fault.
Output Current
Motor Speed at Previous Fault.
Motor Speed
Output Voltage at Previous Fault.
Output Voltage
DC Bus Voltage at Previous Fault.
DC Bus Voltage
U2-09
U2-10
U2-11
U2-12
Output Power at Previous Fault.
Output kWatts
Torque Reference at Previous Fault.
Torque Reference
Input Terminal Status at Previous Fault.
The format is the same as for U1-10.
Input Term Sts
Output Terminal Status at Previous Fault.
The format is the same as for U1-11.
Output Term Sts
U2-13
Drive Operation Status at Previous Fault.
The format is the same as for U1-12.
Inverter Status
U2-14
Cumulative Operation Time at Previous Fault.
Elapsed time
Note: Fault trace is not executed at CPF00, CPF01,
CPF03, UV1, and UV2.
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
F7 Fault History List
Table A.4 F7 Fault History List
Fault History
U3-01
U3-02
U3-03
U3-04
U3-05
U3-06
U3-07
U3-08
U3-09
U3-10
U3-11
U3-12
U3-13
U3-14
U3-15
U3-16
U3-17
Most Recent Fault
Last Fault
2 nd
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 2
3 rd
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 3
4 th
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 4
Cumulative Operation Time at Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 1
Cumulative Operation Time at 2 nd
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 2
Cumulative Operation Time at 3 rd
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 3
Cumulative Operation Time at 4 th
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 4
5 th
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 5
6 th
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 6
7 th
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 7
8 th
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 8
9 th
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 9
10 th
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 10
Cumulative Operation Time at 5 th
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 5
Cumulative Operation Time at 6 th
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 6
Cumulative Operation Time at 7 th
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 7
U3-18
U3-19
Cumulative Operation Time at 8 th
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 8
Cumulative Operation Time at 9 th
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 9
U3-20
Cumulative Operation Time at 10 th
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 10
Note: Faults such as CPF00, CPF01, CPF02, CPF03, UV1, and UV2 are not stored in fault history.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 41
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Notes:
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Parameters A - 42
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Appendix B
Capacity Related Parameters
This appendix lists the parameters affected by the Drive Capacity setting of o2-04.
Drive Capacity Selection..................................................... B-2
Parameters Affected by Drive Capacity Setting.................. B-3
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Capacity Related Parameters B - 1
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Drive Capacity Selection
Parameter o2-04 sets the Drive capacity according to the model number. Parameter o2-04 needs to be adjusted only when replacing a control board. Do not change the o2-04 setting for any other reason.
If the Drive’s control board is replaced, the next time the Drive is powered up, parameter o2-04 must be set to the appropriate value listed in Table B.1 for the Drive model number. This will automatically program the values of all other parameters listed in Table B.2 to the factory settings for that particular Drive rating.
Voltage
208-240Vac
208-230Vac
480Vac
Table B.1 Drive Capacity Selection
F7 Model Number o2-04 Setting
CIMR-F7U20P4
CIMR-F7U20P7
CIMR-F7U21P5
CIMR-F7U22P2
CIMR-F7U23P7
CIMR-F7U25P5
CIMR-F7U27P5
CIMR-F7U2011
CIMR-F7U2015
CIMR-F7U2018
CIMR-F7U2022
CIMR-F7U2030
CIMR-F7U2037
CIMR-F7U2045
CIMR-F7U2055
CIMR-F7U2075
CIMR-F7U2090
CIMR-F7U2110
CIMR-F7U40P4
CIMR-F7U40P7
CIMR-F7U41P5
CIMR-F7U42P2
CIMR-F7U43P7
CIMR-F7U44P0
CIMR-F7U45P5
CIMR-F7U47P5
CIMR-F7U4011
CIMR-F7U4015
CIMR-F7U4018
CIMR-F7U4022
CIMR-F7U4030
CIMR-F7U4037
CIMR-F7U4045
CIMR-F7U4055
CIMR-F7U4075
CIMR-F7U4090
CIMR-F7U4110
CIMR-F7U4132
CIMR-F7U4160
CIMR-F7U4185
CIMR-F7U4220
CIMR-F7U4300
2A
2B
2C
2D
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
10
11
20
21
32
33
34
35
2E
2F
30
31
36
37
C
D
E
F
A
B
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Capacity Related Parameters B - 2
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Parameters Affected by Drive Capacity Setting
The factory setting of the parameters in Table B.2 may change when the Drive capacity is changed via parameter o2-04. See
Table B.3 and B.4 for a complete list.
Parameter
Number b8-03 b8-04
C6-01
E2-01
E2-02
E2-03
E2-05
E2-06
E2-10
E2-11
E4-01
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Energy Saving Control Filter Time Constant
Energy Saving F.T
Energy Saving Coefficient Value
Energy Save COEF
Carrier Frequency Duty
Heavy/Normal Duty
Motor Rated Current
Motor Rated FLA
Motor Rated Slip
Table B.2 Parameters Affected by o2-04
Motor Rated Slip
Motor No-load Current
No-load Current
Motor Line-to-Line Resistance
Term Resistance
Motor Leakage Inductance
Leakage Inductance
Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation
Tcomp Iron Loss
Motor Rated Output
Motor Rated KW
Motor 2 Rated Current
Motor Rated FLA
Parameter
Number
E4-02
E4-03
E4-05
E4-06
E4-07
L2-02
L2-03
L2-04
L8-02 o2-04
-
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Motor 2 Rated Slip
Motor Rated Slip
Motor 2 No-Load Current
No-Load Current
Motor 2 Line-to-Line Resistance
Term Resistance
Motor 2 Leakage Inductance
Leakage Inductance
Motor 2 Rated Output
Motor 2 Rated KW
Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru Time
PwrL Ridethru t
Momentary Power Loss Minimum Base Block Time
PwrL Baseblock t
Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time
PwrL V/F Ramp t
Overheat Pre-Alarm Level
OH Pre-Alarm Lvl
Drive/kVA Selection
Inverter Model #
-
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Capacity Related Parameters B - 3
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
b8-03 b8-04
C6-01
C6-03
E2-01 / E4-01
E2-02 / E4-02
E2-03 / E4-03
E2-05 / E4-05
E2-06 / E4-06
E2-10
E2-11 / E4-07
L2-02
L2-03
L2-04
L8-02 o2-04
Parameter
20P4
0.50
288.20
0
2, *10
1.90
2.90
1.20
9.842
18.2
14
0.4
0.1
0.1
0.3
95
0
20P7
0.50
223.70
0
2, *10
3.30
2.50
1.80
5.156
13.8
26
0.75
0.2
0.2
0.3
95
1
Table B.3 Parameter Defaults 208-240V
208-240V: Model Number CIMR-F7U-
21P5 22P2 23P7 25P5
0.50
169.40
0
2, *10
0.50
156.80
0
2, *8
0.50
122.90
0
2, *10
0.50
94.75
0
2, *15
6.20
2.60
2.80
1.997
18.5
53
1.5
0.3
0.3
0.3
95
2
8.50
2.90
3.00
1.601
18.4
77
2.2
0.5
0.4
0.3
100
3
14.00
2.73
4.50
0.771
19.6
112
3.7
1.0
0.5
0.3
95
4
19.60
1.50
5.10
0.399
18.2
172
5.5
1.0
0.6
0.3
95
5
* Default and maximum carrier frequency value when C6-01=2 (Normal Duty 2)
8.00
0.288
15.5
262
7.5
1.0
0.7
0.3
95
6
27P5
0.50
72.69
0
2, *15
26.60
1.30
11.2
0.230
19.5
245
11
2.0
0.8
0.3
95
7
2011
0.50
70.44
0
2, *8
39.7
1.70
15.2
0.138
17.2
272
15
2.0
0.9
0.6
90
8
2015
0.50
63.13
0
2, *10
53.0
1.60
Parameter b8-03 b8-04
C6-01
C6-03
E2-01 / E4-01
E2-02 / E4-02
E2-03 / E4-03
E2-05 / E4-05
E2-06 / E4-06
E2-10
E2-11 / E4-07
L2-02
L2-03
L2-04
L8-02 o2-04
2018
0.50
57.87
0
2, *10
65.8
1.67
15.7
0.101
20.1
505
18.5
2.0
1.0
0.6
100
9
1.70
18.5
0.079
19.5
538
22
2.0
1.0
2022
0.50
Table B.3 Parameter Defaults 208-240V (continued)
208-240V: Model Number CIMR-F7U-
2030
0.50
2037
0.50
2045
0.50
2055
2.00
51.79
0
2, *10
77.2
46.27
0
2, *10
105.0
38.16
0
2, *5
131.0
35.78
0
2, *5
160.0
31.35
0
2, *8
190.0
0.6
90
A
1.80
21.9
0.064
20.8
699
30
2.0
1.1
0.6
90
B
1.33
38.2
0.039
18.8
823
37
2.0
1.1
0.6
95
C
1.60
44.0
0.030
20.2
852
45
2.0
1.2
0.6
100
D
1.43
45.6
0.022
20.5
960
55
2.0
1.2
1.0
105
E
* Default and maximum carrier frequency value when C6-01=2 (Normal Duty 2)
0.023
20.0
1200
75
2.0
1.3
1.0
110
F
2075
2.00
23.10
0
2, *2
260.0
1.39
72.0
0.023
20.0
1200
90
2.0
1.5
1.0
100
10
2090
2.00
20.65
0
2, *2
260.0
1.39
72.0
0.023
20.0
1200
110
2.0
1.7
1.0
95
11
2110
2.00
18.12
1
2, *2
260.0
1.39
72.0
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Capacity Related Parameters B - 4
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Parameter b8-03 b8-04
C6-01
C6-03
E2-01 / E4-01
E2-02 / E4-02
E2-03 / E4-03
E2-05 / E4-05
E2-06 / E4-06
E2-10
E2-11 / E4-07
L2-02
L2-03
L2-04
L8-02 o2-04
40P4
0.50
576.40
0
2, *2
1.00
2.90
0.60
38.198
18.2
14
0.4
0.1
0.1
0.3
95
20
40P7
0.50
447.40
0
2, *2
1.60
2.60
0.80
22.459
14.3
26
0.75
0.1
0.2
0.3
95
21
2.50
1.40
10.100
18.3
53
1.5
0.2
0.3
Table B.4 Parameter Defaults 480V
Model Number CIMR-F7U-
41P5
0.50
42P2
0.50
43P7
0.50
44P0
0.50
338.80
0
2, *15
3.10
313.60
0
2, *15
4.20
245.80
0
2, *15
7.00
236.44
0
2, *15
7.00
0.3
95
22
3.00
1.50
6.495
18.7
77
2.2
0.3
0.4
0.3
95
23
2.70
2.30
3.333
19.3
130
3.7
0.5
0.5
0.3
95
24
0.3
95
25
2.70
2.30
3.333
19.3
130
4.0
0.5
0.6
* Default and maximum carrier frequency value when C6-01=2 (Normal Duty 2)
1.595
18.2
193
5.5
0.8
0.6
0.3
95
26
45P5
0.50
189.50
0
2, *15
9.80
1.50
2.60
1.152
15.5
263
7.5
0.8
0.7
0.3
95
27
47P5
0.50
145.38
0
2, *15
13.30
1.30
4.00
0.922
19.6
385
11
1.0
0.8
0.3
95
28
4011
0.50
140.88
0
2, *8
19.9
1.70
5.6
b8-03 b8-04
C6-01
C6-03
E2-01 / E4-01
E2-02 / E4-02
E2-03 / E4-03
E2-05 / E4-05
E2-06 / E4-06
E2-10
E2-11 / E4-07
L2-02
L2-03
L2-04
L8-02 o2-04
Parameter
7.6
0.550
17.2
440
15
2.0
0.9
0.3
95
29
4015
0.50
126.26
0
2, *10
26.5
1.60
4018
0.50
115.74
Table B.4 Parameter Defaults 480V (continued)
Model Number CIMR-F7U-
4022 4030 4037 4045
0.50
103.58
0.50
92.54
0.50
76.32
0.50
71.56
0
2, *10
32.9
1.67
7.8
0.403
20.1
508
18.5
2.0
1.0
0.6
98
2A
0
2, *10
38.6
1.70
9.2
0.316
23.5
586
22
2.0
1.0
0.6
78
2B
0
2, *8
52.3
1.80
10.9
0.269
20.7
750
30
2.0
1.1
0.6
85
2C
0
2, *8
65.6
1.33
19.1
0.155
18.8
925
37
2.0
1.1
0.6
85
2D
* Default and maximum carrier frequency value when C6-01=2 (Normal Duty 2)
0
2, *8
79.7
1.60
22.0
0.122
19.9
1125
45
2.0
1.2
0.6
90
2E
24.0
0.088
20.0
1260
55
2.0
1.2
1.0
90
2F
4055
2.00
67.20
0
2, *5
95.0
1.46
36.0
0.092
20.0
1600
75
2.0
1.3
1.0
98
30
4075
2.00
46.20
0
2, *5
130.0
1.39
40.0
0.056
20.0
1760
90
2.0
1.5
1.0
108
31
4090
2.00
38.91
0
2, *8
156.0
1.40
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Capacity Related Parameters B - 5
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Parameter b8-03 b8-04
C6-01
C6-03
E2-01 / E4-01
E2-02 / E4-02
E2-03 / E4-03
E2-05 / E4-05
E2-06 / E4-06
E2-10
E2-11 / E4-07
L2-02
L2-03
L2-04
L8-02 o2-04
4110
2.00
36.23
0
2, *5
190.0
1.40
49.0
0.046
20.0
2150
110
2.0
1.7
1.0
100
32
Table B.4 Parameter Defaults 480V (continued)
Model Number CIMR-F7U-
4132
2.00
4160
2.00
4185
2.00
32.79
0
2, *5
223.0
30.13
0
2, *5
270.0
30.57
0
2, *2
310.0
1.38
58.0
0.035
20.0
2350
132
2.0
1.7
1.0
110
33
1.35
70.0
0.029
20.0
2850
160
2.0
1.8
1.0
108
34
1.0
95
35
1.30
81.0
0.025
20.0
3200
185
2.0
1.9
* Default and maximum carrier frequency value when C6-01=2 (Normal Duty 2)
0.020
20.0
3700
220
2.0
2.0
1.0
100
36
4220
2.00
27.13
1
2, *2
370.0
1.30
96.0
0.014
20.0
4700
300
2.1
2.1
1.0
95
37
4300
2.00
21.76
1
2, *2
500.0
1.25
130.0
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Capacity Related Parameters B - 6
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Appendix C
Specifications
This appendix details the standard Drive specifications.
Standard Drive Specifications ............................................C-2
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Specifications C - 1
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
Standard Drive Specifications
The standard Drive specifications are listed in the following tables.
Email: [email protected]
208-240Vac
Table C.1 208-240Vac Drive Specifications
208-240Vac Drives 208-230Vac Drives
Model Number CIMR-
F7U
Rated output capacity (kVA)
Horsepower
*2
Rated output
current (A)
Overload capacity
*3
(% of rated output current for 60 sec)
Current limit (% of rated output current)
Carrier frequency *5,*7
Maximum output frequency
Rated output capacity (kVA)
Horsepower
*2
Rated output current (A)
Overload capacity
*3
(% of rated output current for 60 sec.)
Current limit (% of rated output current)
Carrier frequency
(kHz)
*6
Maximum output frequency
Maximum output voltage
Rated voltage
Rated frequency
Rated input current -
Heavy Duty
*1
(A)
Rated input current -
Normal Duty
*1
(A)
Allowable voltage fluctuation
Allowable frequency fluctuation
20P4
1.2
20P7 21P5 22P2 23P7 25P5 27P5 2011 2015 2018 2022 2030 2037 2045 2055
1.6
0.5/0.75
1
3.2
1.4
4.2
1.8
0.5/0.75
1
3.6
107
10
3.8
4.3
4.6
107
10
4.9
5.5
2.7
2
7.0
3.0
2
7.8
108
10
8.4
9.4
3.7
3
9.6
4.1
3
10.8
107
8
11.5
13
5.7
5
15.2
6.4
5
16.8
107
10
18
20
8.8
7.5
23.0
8.8
7.5
23.0
120
15
24
24
12.0
10
31.0
12.0
10
31.0
120
15
17.0
15
45.0
18.0
15
46.2
117
8
3-phase; 200, 208, 220, 230, or 240Vac
37
37
(Proportional to input voltage)
52
53
22.0
20
58.0
150
150
23.0
20
59.4
117
10
3-phase, 200/208/220/230/240Vac, 50/60Hz
68
70
27.0
25
71
2kHz
300.0Hz
29.0
25
74.8
120
114
10
400.0Hz
+ 10%, - 15%
±5%
84
89
32.0
30
85.0
34.0
30
88.0
116
10
94
98
44.0
40
115.0
44.0
40
115.0
120
10
120
120
55.0
50
62.0
50/60
107
5
160
69.0
60
145.0 180.0
73.0
75
162.0 192.0
113
5
82.0
75
215
82.0
-
215
120
8
2075
110.0
100
283.0
120.0
100/125
312.0
109
2
2090
130.0 140.0
125
2110
*5
150
346.0 360.0
138
138
*3
*3
140.0 160.0
150
3-phase, 200/208/220/230Vac, 50/60Hz
180
198
212
237
237
317
350
-
360.0 415.0
115
2
381
396
120
2
396
457
Measures for power supply harmonics
DC
Reactor
12-Pulse
Rectification
Optional
Not possible
Built-in
Possible
*4
*1 The difference between Heavy Duty ratings and the Normal Duty ratings for the Drive are the rated input and output current, overload capacity, carrier frequency, current limit, and maximum output frequency. Parameter C6-01 must be set to value of “0” for Heavy Duty ratings and “2” for Normal Duty ratings. Factory default is Heavy Duty (C6-01=0).
*2 Horsepower ratings are based on 230V or 460V NEC Table 430.150. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole motor. When selecting the actual motor and Drive, be sure that the Drive's rated output current is appropriate for the motor's rated current.
*3 Model 2110 has an overload rating of 138% of rated output current for 60 seconds and a current limit rating of 138%. Models 4220 and 4300 have an overload rating of 150% of rated output current for 45 seconds and a current limit rating of 150%.
*4 When setting the carrier frequency above the factory default, the Drive must be derated.
*5 Heavy Duty ratings for models 2110, 4220 and 4300 are effective in software version VSF103021 and higher.
*6 Each value shown is the Maximum carrier frequency and default carrier frequency.
*7 The carrier frequency for Heavy Duty is default to 2 kHz. Software version VSF103021 and higher may allow the carrier frequency to be increased above 2 kHz with a reduction in continuous rated output current. Refer to C6-02 in Chapter 5 for further details.
Specifications C - 2
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
480Vac
Table C.2 480Vac Drive Specifications
Model Number CIMR-F7U 40P4 40P7 41P5 42P2 43P7 44P0 45P5 47P5 4011 4015 4018 4022
Rated output capacity (kVA)
Horsepower
*2
Rated output current (A)
Overload capacity
*3
(% of rated output current for 60 sec)
Current limit (% of rated output current)
Carrier frequency *4
Maximum output frequency
Rated output capacity (kVA)
Horsepower
*2
Rated output current (A)
Overload capacity *3
(% of rated output current for 60 sec)
Current limit
(
% of rated output current)
Carrier frequency (kHz)
*5
Maximum output frequency
Maximum output voltage
Rated voltage
Rated frequency
Rated input current -
Heavy Duty
*1
(A)
Rated input current -
Normal Duty
*1
(A)
Allowable voltage fluctuation
Allowable frequency fluctuation
1.4
0.5/0.75
1.8
1.4
0.5/0.75
1.8
120
15
2.2
2.2
1.6
1
2.1
1.6
1
2.1
120
15
2.5
2.5
2.8
2
3.7
2.8
2
3.7
120
15
3-phase; 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480Vac (Proportional to input voltage.)
4.4
4.4
4.0
3
5.3
4.0
3
5.3
120
15
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480Vac, 50/60Hz
6.4
6.4
5.8
5
7.6
5.8
5
7.6
120
15
9.0
9.0
6.6
-
8.7
6.6
-
8.7
300.0Hz
120
15
400.0Hz
10.4
10.4
150
150
2kHz
120
9.5
7.5
12.5
9.5
7.5
12.5
120
15
15
15
+ 10%, - 15%
±5%
13.0
10
17.0
13.0
10
17.0
120
15
20
20
18.0
15
24.0
21.0
15/20
27.0
107
8
29
33
24.0
20
31.0
26.0
25
34.0
109
10
37
40
30.0
25
39.0
30.0
30
40.0
117
10
47
48
34.0
30
45.0
38.0
-
50.4
107
10
50
55
Measures for power supply harmonics
DC Reactor Optional
12-pulse
Rectification
Not possible
*1 The difference between Heavy Duty ratings and the Normal Duty ratings for the Drive are the rated input and output current, overload capacity, carrier frequency, current limit, and maximum output frequency. Parameter C6-01 must be set to value of “0” for Heavy Duty ratings and “2” for Normal Duty ratings. Factory default is Heavy Duty (C6-01=0).
*2 Horsepower ratings are based on 230V or 460V NEC Table 430.150. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole motor. When selecting the actual motor and Drive, be sure that the Drive's rated output current is appropriate for the motor's rated current.
*3 Model 2110 has an overload rating of 138% of rated output current for 60 seconds and a current limit rating of 138%. Models 4220 and 4300 have an overload rating of 150% of rated output current for 45 seconds and a current limit rating of 150%.
*4 When setting the carrier frequency above the factory default, the Drive must be derated.
*5 Heavy Duty ratings for models 2110, 4220 and 4300 are effective in software version VSF103021 and higher.
*6 Each value shown is the Maximum carrier frequency and default carrier frequency.
*7 The carrier frequency for Heavy Duty is default to 2 kHz. Software version VSF103021 and higher may allow the carrier frequency to be increased above 2 kHz with a reduction in continuous rated output current. Refer to C6-02 in Chapter 5 for further details.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Specifications C - 3
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Common Specifications
Table C.2 480Vac Drive Specifications (Continued)
Model Number CIMR-F7U 4030 4037 4045 4055 4075 4090 4110 4132 4160 4185 4220
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Horsepower
*2
Rated output current (A)
Overload capacity
*3
(% of rated output current for 60 sec)
Current limit (% of rated output current)
Carrier frequency
*5
Maximum output frequency
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Horsepower *2
Rated output current (A)
Overload capacity
*3
(% of rated output current for 60 sec.)
Current limit (% of rated output current)
Carrier frequency (kHz)
*6
Maximum output frequency
Maximum output voltage
46.0
40
60.0
51.0
40/50
67.2
107
8
57.0
50
75.0
59.0
60
77.0
117
8
69.0
60
91.0
73.0
75
96.0
114
8
85.0
75
112.0
95.0
100
125.0
108
5
110.0
140.0
100 125/150
150.0
180.0
120.0
125
156.0
115
5
150
150
140.0
150
180.0
120
8
160.0
-
216.0
2kHz
300.0Hz
180.0
200
240.0
120
108
5
400.0Hz
200.0
200
260.0
200.0
-
260.0
120
5
230.0
250
304.0
230.0
250
304.0
120
5
280.0
300
370.0
315.0
300/350 400/450
414.0
515.0
107
2
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480Vac (Proportional to input voltage)
315.0
350
414.0
150
*3
150
*3
390.0
118
2
Rated voltage
Rated frequency
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480Vac, 50/60Hz
Rated input current -
Heavy Duty
*1
(A)
Rated input current -
Normal Duty
*1
(A)
66
74
83
85
100
106
120
134
165
172
198
198
238
264
286
286
334
334
407
456
457
567
Allowable voltage fluctuation + 10%, - 15%
Allowable frequency fluctuation
±5%
4300
450.0
500
590.0
150
*3
150
*3
510.0
500+
675.0
120
2
649
743
Measures for power supply harmonics
DC Reactor
12-Pulse
Rectification
Built-in
Possible
*4
*1 The difference between Heavy Duty ratings and the Normal Duty ratings for the Drive are the rated input and output current, overload capacity, carrier frequency, current limit, and maximum output frequency. Parameter C6-01 must be set to value of “0” for Heavy Duty ratings and “2” for Normal Duty ratings. Factory default is Heavy Duty (C6-01=0).
and Drive, be sure that the Drive's rated output current is appropriate for the motor's rated current.
*3 Model 2110 has an overload rating of 138% of rated output current for 60 seconds and a current limit rating of 138%. Models 4220 and 4300 have an overload rating of 150% of rated output current for 45 seconds and a current limit rating of 150%.
*4 When setting the carrier frequency above the factory default, the Drive must be derated.
*5 Heavy Duty ratings for models 2110, 4220 and 4300 are effective in software version VSF103021 and higher.
*6 Each value shown is the Maximum carrier frequency and default carrier frequency.
*7 The carrier frequency for Heavy Duty is default to 2 kHz. Software version VSF103021 and higher may allow the carrier frequency to be increased above 2 kHz with a reduction in continuous rated output current. Refer to C6-02 in Chapter 5 for further details.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Specifications C - 4
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
The following specifications apply to both 200Vac and 400Vac Class Drives.
Table C.3 Common F7 Drive Specifications
Email: [email protected]
Model Number
CIMR-F7U
Specification
Control method
Speed control range
Speed control accuracy
Speed response
Torque limit
Torque accuracy
Torque response
Frequency control range
Frequency accuracy
(temperature characteristics)
Frequency setting resolution
Output frequency resolution
Analog setting signal
Acceleration/Deceleration time
Internal braking torque
Main control functions
Sine wave PWM
V/F control, V/F control with PG, Open Loop Vector control, Flux Vector Control
100:1 (1000:1 with PG)
±0.2% (±0.02% with PG) (77
°
F ± 50
°
F) (25
°
C ± 10
°
C)
5Hz (30Hz with PG)
Can be set by parameter, analog input, or serial communication: 4 quadrant control
±5%
20Hz (40Hz with PG)
0.01 to 400.00Hz
Digital references: ± 0.01% (14
°
F to 104
°
F) (-10
°
C to +40
°
C)
Analog references: ±0.1% (77
°
F ± 50
°
F) (25
°
C ±10
°
C)
Digital references: 0.01Hz
Analog references: 0.03 @60Hz (10 bit with sign)
0.001Hz
-10 to +10Vdc, 0 to +10Vdc, 4 to 20mA
0.0 to 6000.0 sec (4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings)
Approximately 20%
Restarting from momentary power loss, bi-directional speed search, Overtorque/Undertorque detection, 17 preset speeds, acceleration/deceleration time changes, S-curve acceleration, 3-wire sequence, Auto-Tuning, cooling fan ON/
OFF control, torque compensation, speed control/torque control switch, jump frequencies, upper and lower limits for frequency references, DC braking for starting and stopping, high-slip braking, PID control (with sleep function), energy-saving control, Modbus communications (RS-485/422, 19.2 kbps maximum), fault reset, and copy function.
UL recognized electronic thermal overload relay (I
2
T) Motor protection
Instantaneous overcurrent protection
Main circuit protection
Stops at approximately 200% of rated output current
Overload protection
Overvoltage protection
Undervoltage protection
Fuse in DC bus circuit
Normal Duty (C6-01 = 2) - Approximately 110% of rated output current for 60 seconds
Heavy Duty (C6-01 = 0) - 150% of rated output current for 60 seconds
Model 2110 - 138% of rated output for 60 seconds
Models 4220/4300 - 150% of rated output for 45 seconds
208-240Vac: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 410Vdc
480Vac: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 820Vdc
208-240Vac: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 190Vdc
480Vac: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 380Vdc
Momentary power loss ride-thru
Heatsink over-temperature
Stall prevention
Ground fault protection
DC bus charge
Two selectable methods: 1. Time base for up to 2 seconds. 2. Until control power is active.
Enclosure Type
Ambient operating temperature
Ambient operating humidity
Storage temperature
Mounting location
Altitude
Vibration
Protection by thermistor
Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration, and running
Protection by electronic circuit (50% of inverter rated current)
Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approximately 50Vdc or more
Enclosed wall-mounted type (NEMA 1): CIMR-F7U20P4 thru 2018 and 40P4 thru 4018
Open chassis type (IP00): CIMR-F7U2022 thru 2110 and 4030 thru 4300
14
°
F to 104
°
F (-10
°
C to 40
°
C) NEMA 1 type
14
°
F to 113
°
F (–10
°
C to 45
°
C) Open chassis type
95% max. (with no condensation)
-4
°
F to 140
°
F (- 20
°
C to + 60
°
C) short-term temperature during transportation
Indoor (no corrosive gas, dust, etc.)
3300 feet (1000 m) (higher altitudes by derate)
10 to 20Hz, 32 ft/sec
2
(9.8 m/s
2
) max.; 20 to 50Hz, 6.5 ft/sec
2
(2 m/s
2
) max.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Specifications C - 5
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Notes:
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Specifications C - 6
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Appendix D
Communications
This appendix details the specifications, connections, and programming of the Drive for Modbus communication.
Using Modbus Communication...........................................D-2
Modbus Function Code Details ..........................................D-8
Modbus Data Tables ........................................................D-10
Modbus Self-Diagnosis.....................................................D-18
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Communications D - 1
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
Using Modbus Communication
Email: [email protected]
Serial communication can be performed with Program Logic Controllers (PLCs) or similar master devices using the Modbus protocol.
Modbus Communication Configuration
Modbus communication is configured using 1 master (PLC) and a maximum of 31 slaves. Serial communication between master and slave is normally initiated by the master and responded to by the slaves.
The master performs serial communication with one slave at a time. Consequently, the slave address of each slave must be initially set, so that the master can perform serial communication using that address. Slaves receiving commands from the master perform the specified functions, and send a response back to the master.
Master
Slaves
F7 F7 F7
Fig D.1 Example of Connections between Master and Drive
Communication Specifications
The Modbus communication specifications are shown below:
Interface
Item
Communications Cycle
Table D.1 Modbus Communication Specifications
Specifications
RS-422, RS-485
Communications Parameters
Asynchronous (Start-stop synchronization)
Baud rate: Select from 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200 bps.
Data length: 8 bits fixed
Parity: Select from even, odd, or none.
Communications Protocol
Number of Connectable Units
Stop bits:
Modbus RTU
1 bit selected
31 units maximum
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Communications D - 2
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Communication Connection Terminal
Modbus communication uses the following terminals: S+, S-, R+, and R-. The terminating resistor must be turned ON only if the Drive is at the very end of the serial communication chain. Set the terminating resistor by turning ON pin 1 of switch S1.
RS-422A or RS-485
Switch
O
F
F
S1
1
1
2
DIP Switch S1 located on terminal board.
Terminating resistor
Terminating resistor (1/2W, 110 Ohms)
Fig D.2 Communication Connection Terminals and Terminating Resistor
IMPORTANT
1. Separate the communication cables from the main circuit cables and control circuit wiring.
2. Use shielded cables for the communication cable, and use proper shield clamps. Shield at one end only.
3. When using RS-485 communication, connect S+ to R+, and S- to R-, on the control circuit terminal board. See Fig D.3 below.
Fig D.3 RS-485 Communication Connection
Procedure for Setting Up Communication
Use the following procedure to perform communication with the PLC.
1. Turn OFF the input to the Drive power and connect the communication cable between the PLC (or other master device) and the Drive.
2. Turn ON the input power to the Drive.
3. Set the required communication parameters (H5-01 to H5-07) using the Digital Operator.
4. Turn OFF the input to the Drive power, and check that the Digital Operator display has completely extinguished.
5. Turn ON the input power to the Drive once again.
6. Perform communication with the master device.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Communications D - 3
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Related Parameters
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display b1-01 b1-02
H5-01
H5-02
H5-03
H5-04
H5-05
H5-06
H5-07
Frequency Reference
Selection
Reference Source
Run Command Selection
Run Source
Drive Node Address
Serial Comm Adr
Communication Speed
Selection
Serial Baud Rate
Communication Parity
Selection
Serial Com Sel
Stopping Method After
Communication Error
Serial Fault Sel
Communication Fault
Detection Selection
Serial Flt Dtct
Drive Transmit Wait Time
Transmit WaitTIM
RTS Control Selection
RTS Control Sel
Table D.2 Serial Communication Related Parameters
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
V/F
Control Method
V/F w/
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
Selects the frequency reference input source.
0: Operator - Digital preset speed U1-01 or d1-01 to d1-17.
1: Terminals - Analog input terminal A1 (or terminal A2 based on parameter H3-13).
2: Serial Com - Modbus RS-422/485 terminals R+, R-, S+, and S-.
3: Option PCB - Option board connected to 2CN.
4: Pulse Input (Terminal RP)
Selects the run command input source.
0: Operator - RUN and STOP keys on Digital Operator.
1: Terminals - Contact closure on terminals S1 or S2.
2: Serial Com - Modbus RS-422/485 terminals R+, R-, S+, and S-.
3: Option PCB - Option board connected to 2CN.
Selects Drive station node number (address) for Modbus terminals
R+, R-, S+, S-. The Drive’s power must be cycled for the setting to take effect. Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Drive responses to Modbus communications.
Selects the baud rate for Modbus terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-. The
Drive’s power must be cycled for the setting to take effect.
0: 1200 bps
1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
Selects the communication parity for Modbus terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-. The Drive’s power must be cycled for the setting to take effect.
0: No Parity
1: Even Parity
2: Odd Parity
Selects the stopping method when a communication timeout fault
(CE) is detected.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
3: Alarm Only
4: Run at d1-04
Enables or disables the communications timeout fault (CE).
0: Disabled - A communication loss will not cause a
communication fault.
1: Enabled - If communication is lost for more than 2 seconds, a
CE fault will occur.
Set the delay time from when the Drive receives data to when the
Drive sends data.
Enables or disables “request to send” (RTS) control:
0: Disabled (RTS is always on)
1: Enabled (RTS turns on only when sending)
0 to 4
0 to 3
0 to 20
Hex
0 to 4
0 to 2
0 to 3
0 to 10
5 to 65
0 to 1
1
1
1F
3
0
3
1
5ms
1
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Modbus communication can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in b1-01 and b1-02:
1. Monitor the operation status of the Drive.
2. Set and read Drive parameters.
3. Reset faults.
4. Input multi-function digital input commands.
5. Control multi-function digital and analog outputs.
IMPORTANT
An OR operation is performed between the multi-function command input from the master device and the command input from multi-function digital input terminals S3 to S8.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Communications D - 4
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Message Format
In Modbus communication, the master sends commands to the slave, and the slave responds. The message format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below. The length of the data packet is controlled by the command
(function) contents.
Slave address
Function code
Data
Error check
Fig D.4 Message Format
The space between messages must support the following:
PLC to Drive
Command message
Drive to PLC
Response message
PLC to Drive
Command message
Time (Seconds)
24 bits long
H5-06 setting
24 bits long 5ms min.
Fig D.5 Message Spacing
Slave Address
Set the Drive address from 0 to 20 Hex. If 0 is selected, commands from the master will be broadcast (i.e., the Drive will not return a response message).
Function Code
The function code specifies command type. There are four function codes, as shown below.
Function Code
(Hexadecimal)
Table D.3 Modbus Function Codes
Command Message
Function Min.
(Bytes)
Max.
(Bytes)
03H
06H
08H
10H
Reading/Holding Register Contents
Write In Single Holding Register
Loopback Test
Write In Several Holding Registers
8
8
8
11
* Minimum bytes for a normal Response Message (error response message is always 5 bytes).
8
8
8
41
Response Message
Min.*
(Bytes)
Max.
(Bytes)
8
8
7
8
21
8
8
8
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Communications D - 5
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Data
Configure consecutive data by combining the storage register address (test code for a loopback address) and the data the register contains. The data length changes depending on the command details.
Error Check
Errors are detected during communication using CRC-16. Perform calculations using the following method:
1. The factory setting for CRC-16 communication is typically zero, but when using the Modbus system, set the factory setting to one (e.g., set all 16 bits to 1).
2. Calculate CRC-16 using MSB as slave address LSB, and LSB as the MSB of the final data.
3. Calculate CRC-16 for response messages from the slaves and compare them to the CRC-16 in the response messages.
CRC-16
At the end of the message, the data for CRC error checking is sent in order to detect errors in signal transmission. In Modbus
RTU, the error check is conducted in the form of a CRC-16 (Cyclical Redundancy Check). The CRC field checks the contents of the entire message. It is applied regardless of any parity check method used for the individual characters of the message.
The CRC field is two bytes, containing 16-bit binary value. The CRC value is calculated by the transmitting device, which appends the CRC to the message. The receiving device recalculates a CRC during receipt of the message, and compares the calculated value to the actual value it received in the CRC field. If the two values are not equal, an error results.
The CRC is started by first preloading a 16-bit register to all 1’s. Then, a process begins of applying successive 8-bit bytes of the message to the current contents of the register. Start and stop bits and the parity bit (if one is used) do not apply to the CRC.
During generation of the CRC, each 8-bit character is exclusive OR’ed with the register contents. Then the result is shifted in the direction of the least significant bit (LSB), with a zero filled into the most significant bit (MSB) position. The LSB is extracted and examined. If the LSB is a 1, the register is then exclusive OR’ed with a preset, fixed balue (A001h). If the LSB is a 0, no exclusive OR takes place.
This process is repeated until eight shifts have been performed. After the last (eighth) shift, the next 8-bit byte is exclusive
OR’ed with the register’s current value, and the process repeats for eight more shifts as described above. The final contents of the register, after all the bytes of the message have been applied, is the CRC value.
For applications using a host computer, detailed examples of a CRC generation using Quick Basic and in C are shown on the following pages.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Communications D - 6
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Typical CRC-16 Calculation Program in Quick Basic crcsum# = &HFFFF& crcshift# = &H0& crcconst# = &HA001&
CLS
PRINT ”*********************************************”
PRINT “ CRC-16 Calculator “
PRINT ”*********************************************”
PRINT “If entering data in hex, precede the data with ‘&H’”
PRINT “ Example: 32decimal = 20hex = &H20”
PRINT ”*********************************************”
INPUT “Enter the number of bytes in the message: “, maxbyte
FOR bytenum = 1 TO maxbyte STEP 1
PRINT “Enter byte “; bytenum; “:”:
INPUT byte&
byte& = byte& AND &HFF&
crcsum# = (crcsum# XOR byte7) AND &HFFFF&
FOR shift = 1 TO 8 STEP 1
crcshift# = (INT(crcsum# / 2)) AND &H7FFF&
IF crcsum# AND &H1& THEN
crcsum# = crcshift# XOR crcconst#
ELSE
crcsum# = crcshift#
END IF
NEXT shift
NEXT bytenum lower& = crcsum# AND &HFF& upper& = (INT(crcsum# / 256)) AND &HFF&
PRINT “Lower byte (1st) = “, HEX$(lower&)
PRINT “Upper byte (2nd) = “, HEX$(upper&)
Typical CRC-16 Calculation Program in C
// *buf pointer to character array that contains the characters used to calculate CRC
// bufLen number of characters to calculate CRC for
// *crc pointer to the array that contains the calculated CRC void getMBCRC(cahr *buf, int bufLen, char *crc) {
unsigned long crc_0 = 0xffff; // Declare and initialize variables unsigned long crc_1 = 0x0000; int i,j;
for (i=0; i<bufLen; i++) { // Loop through characters of input array
crc_0 ^= ((unsigned long)buf[i] & 0x0ff); // XOR current character with 0x00ff
for (j=0;j<8;j++){ // Loop through character bits
crc_1 = (crc_0 >> 1) & 0x7fff; // Shift result right one place and store
if (crc_0 & 0x0001) // if pre-shifted value bit 0 is set
crc_0 = (crc_1 ^ 0xa001); // XOR the shifted value with 0xa001
else // if pre-shifted value bit 0 is not set
crc_0 = crc_1; // set the pre-shifted value equal to the shifted value
}
}
crc[0] = (unsigned char)((crc_0/256) & 0x00ff); // Hi byte
crc[1] = (unsigned char)((crc_0 & 0x00ff); // Lo byte return;
}
No Response Message
The Drive disregards the command message and does not return the response message in the following cases:
1. In simultaneous broadcasting of data (slave address field is 0), all slaves execute but do not respond.
2. When a communication error (overrun, framing, parity, or CRC-16) is detected in the command message.
3. When the slave address in the command message does not coincide with the address set in the slave.
4. When the command message data length is not proper.
Communications D - 7
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
Modbus Function Code Details
Email: [email protected]
Reading/Holding Register Contents (03H)
Read the contents of the storage register only for specified quantities. The addresses must be consecutive, starting from a specified address. The data content of the storage register are separated into higher 8 bits and lower 8 bits.
The following table shows message examples when reading status signals, error details, data link status, and frequency references from the slave 2 Drive.
Command Message
Slave Address
Function Code
Start
Address
Higher
Lower
Higher
Quantity
Lower
Higher
CRC-16
Lower
02H
03H
00H
20H
00H
04H
45H
F0H
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Slave Address 02H
Function Code
Data quantity
1st storage register
Higher
Lower
03H
08H
00H
65H
Next storage register
Next storage register
Next storage register
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
00H
00H
00H
00H
01H
F4H
AFH
82H
Fig D.6 Function Code 03H Message Example
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave Address 02H
Function Code
Error code
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
83H
03H
F1H
31H
Write In Single Holding Register (06H)
Command Message
Slave address
Function code
Register
Address
Setting
Data
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
01H
06H
00H
01H
00H
03H
98H
0BH
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Slave address
Function code
01H
06H
Register
Address
Setting
Data
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
00H
01H
00H
03H
98H
0BH
Fig D.7 Function Code 06H Message Example
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave address
80H + Function code
01H
86H
Error Code
Higher
CRC-16
Lower
21H
82H
78H
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Communications D - 8
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Loopback Test (08H)
The loopback test returns the command message directly as the response message without changing the contents to check the communications between the master and slave. Set user-defined test code and data values.
The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave 1 Drive.
Command Message
Slave address
Function code
Test Code
Data
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
01H
08H
00H
00H
A5H
37H
DAH
8DH
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Slave address
Function code
01H
08H
Test Code
Data
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
00H
00H
A5H
37H
DAH
8DH
Fig D.8 Function Code 08H Message Example
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave address
Function code
01H
88H
Error Code
Higher
CRC-16
Lower
01H
86H
50H
Write In Several Holding Registers (10H)
Write the specified data to the registers from the specified addresses. The written data must be consecutive, starting from the specified address in the command message: Higher 8 bits, then lower 8 bits, in storage register address order. The following table shows an example of a message when a forward run command and a speed command of 60.0Hz has been set in slave 1 by the PLC.
IMPORTANT
Set the number of data specified using command messages as quantity of specified messages x 2. Handle response messages in the same way.
Command Message
Slave Address
Function Code
Start
Address
Higher
Lower
Quantity
Higher
Lower
No. of data
Higher
Lead data
Lower
Higher
Next data
Lower
Higher
CRC-16
Lower
01H
10H
00H
01H
00H
02H
04H
00H
01H
02H
58H
63H
39H
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Slave Address
Function Code
Start
Address
Quantity
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
01H
10H
00H
01H
00H
02H
10H
08H
Fig D.9 Function Code 10H Message Example
Response Message
CRC-16
(During Error)
Slave Address
Function Code
Error code
Higher
Lower
* No. of data = 2 x (quantity)
01H
90H
02H
CDH
C1H
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Communications D - 9
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Modbus Data Tables
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
The data tables are shown below. The types of data are as follows: Reference data, monitor data, broadcast data, and parameter data.
Reference Data
The reference data table is shown below. Reference data can be read and written to.
Register No.
0000H
0001H
Reserved
Input terminal status
Table D.4 Reference Data
Contents
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Run Forward command
Run Reverse command
External fault:
Fault reset:
Run = 1 Stop = 0
Run = 1 Stop = 0
Fault (EFO) = 1
Reset command = 1
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit A
Bit B
ComNet
ComCtrl
Multi-function digital input command 3 (terminal S3)
Multi-function digital input command 4 (terminal S4)
Multi-function digital input command 5 (terminal S5)
Multi-function digital input command 6 (terminal S6)
Multi-function digital input command 7 (terminal S7)
Multi-function digital input command 8 (terminal S8)
0002H
Bits C to F Not used
Frequency reference (Set units using parameter o1-03)
0003H to 0005H Not used
0006H
0007H
0008H
PID Setpoint
Analog output 1 (terminal FM) setting (-11V = 726 to 11V = 726)
→
10V = 660
Analog output 2 (terminal AM) setting (-11V = 726 to 11V = 726)
→
10V = 660
Multi-function contact output settings
Bit 0 Digital output 1 (terminal M1-M2): ON = 1 OFF = 0
0009H
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 7
Digital output 2 (terminal M3-M4):
Digital output 3 (terminal M5-M6):
Fault contact (terminal MA-MC):
Bits 8 to F Not used
ON = 1
ON = 1
OFF = 0
OFF = 0
Bits 3 to 5 Not used
Bit 6 Set Fault contact (terminal MA-MC) output using bit 7: ON = 1 OFF = 0
ON = 1OFF = 0
000AH to 000EH Not used
Reference selection settings
Bit 0
Bit 1
Not used
Input PID setpoint 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
000FH
Bits 3 to B Not used
C Broadcast data terminal S5 input: Enabled = 1 Disabled = 0
D
E
Broadcast data terminal S6 input: Enabled = 1 Disabled = 0
Broadcast data terminal S7 input: Enabled = 1 Disabled = 0
F Broadcast data terminal S8 input: Enabled = 1 Disabled = 0
000CH to 000FH Refer to Table D.6, broadcast data, when using bits 000CH through 000FH
Note:Write 0 to all unused bits. Do not write data to reserved or “Not Used” registers and bits.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Communications D - 10
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
Monitor Data
The following table shows the monitor data. Monitor data can only be read.
Email: [email protected]
Register No.
Table D.5 Monitor Data
Contents
0010H
Status signal
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bits 8 to D
Bit E
Bit F
Fault details
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Run command
At zero speed
Reverse operation
Fault reset signal
Speed agree
Drive ready
Alarm
Fault
Not used
ComRef
ComCtrl
0011H
OPE error
Err error
Program mode
0012H
0013H
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5 to F oPE details
Not used
Fault content 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
1CN status
Not used oPE error code (OPE01=1, OPE02=2, OPE03=3, OPE06=6, OPE10=10, OPE11=11)
0014H
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Fuse blown (FU)
DC bus undervoltage (UV1)
Control power supply undervoltage (UV2)
Main circuit answerback (UV3)
Not used
Ground fault (GF)
Overcurrent (OC)
Overvoltage (OV)
Bit A
Bit B
Bit C
Bit D
Heatsink overtemperature (OH)
Drive overheat (OH1)
Motor overload (OL1)
Drive overload (OL2)
Overtorque 1 (OL3)
Overtorque 2 (OL4)
Bit E
Bit F
Dynamic Braking Transistor (RR)
Dynamic Braking Resistor (RH)
Note: Write 0 to all unused bits. Do not write data to reserved or “Not Used” registers and bits.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Communications D - 11
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
Register No.
Table D.5 Monitor Data (Continued)
Contents
0015H
0016H
0017H
0018H
Fault content 2
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit A
Bit B
Bit C
Bit D
Bit E
Bit F
Fault content 3
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bits 7 to F
CPF content 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bits 7 to F
CPF content 2
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bits 4 to F
External fault 3 (EF3)
External fault 4 (EF4)
External fault 5 (EF5)
External fault 6 (EF6)
External fault 7 (EF7)
External fault 8 (EF8)
Not used
Overspeed (OS)
Speed deviation (DEV)
PG open (PGO)
Input phase loss (PF)
Output phase loss (LF)
DCCT fault (CF)
Operator disconnect (OPR)
EEPROM write-in fault (ERR)
Not used
Modbus communication error (CE)
Bus error (BUS)
E-15, SI-F/G communications error (E-15)
E-10, SI-F/G fail
Control fault (CF)
Zero servo fault (SVE)
External fault (EF0)
Not used
Not used
Not used
CPF02 fault
CPF03 fault
CPF04 fault
CPF05 fault
CPF06 fault
Not used
CPF20 fault
CPF21 fault
CPF22 fault
CPF23 fault
Not used
Note: Write 0 to all unused bits. Do not write data to reserved or “Not Used” registers and bits.
Email: [email protected]
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Communications D - 12
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Register No.
Table D.5 Monitor Data (Continued)
Contents
Alarm content 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Undervoltage (UV)
Overvoltage (OV)
Heatsink overtemperature (OH)
Drive overheat fault (OH1) Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Overtorque 1 detection (OL3)
Overtorque 2 detection (OL4)
2-wire sequence input (EF)
External Baseblock (BB) 0019H Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit A
External fault 3 (EF3)
External fault 4 (EF4)
External fault 5 (EF5)
External fault 6 (EF6) Bit B
Bit C
Bit D
Bit E
External fault 7 (EF7)
External fault 8 (EF8)
Cooling fan (FAN)
Overspeed (OS)
001AH
Bit F
Alarm content 2
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Speed deviation (DEV)
PG open (PGO)
Operator disconnected (OPR)
Modbus communication (CE)
Bus error (BUS)
Waiting for transmission (CALL)
Motor overload (OL1)
Drive overload (OL2)
SI-R/G alarm (E-15)
External fault (EF0)
Not used
001BH
001CH
001DH
001FH
Bits A to F
Not used
Not used
Not used
0020H
Not used
Drive status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Operation: Operating = 1 Stopped = 0
Reverse operation: Reverse operation 0: Forward operation
Drive start-up complete: Completed = 1 Not completed = 0
Fault: Fault = 1
Data setting error: Error = 1
Multi-function digital output 1 (terminal M1 - M2): ON = 1 OFF = 0
Multi-function digital output 2 (terminal M3 - M4): ON = 1 OFF = 0
Multi-function digital output 3 (terminal M5 - M6): ON = 1 OFF = 0
Bits 8 to F Not used
Note: Communication error details are stored until an error reset is input (errors can be reset while the Drive is operating).
Note: Write 0 to all unused bits. Do not write data to reserved or “Not Used” registers and bits.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Communications D - 13
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Register No.
Table D.5 Monitor Data (Continued)
Contents
Fault details
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Overcurrent (OC) or Ground fault (GF)
Main circuit overvoltage (OV)
Drive overload (OL2)
Drive overheat (OH1, OH2)
Not used
Fuse blown (PUF)
PID feedback reference lost (FbL)
0021H
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit A
Bit B
Bit C
External error (EF, EFO)
Hardware error (CPF)
Motor overload (OL1) or Overtorque 1 (OL3) detected
PG open detected (PGO), Overspeed (OS) or Speed deviation (DEV)
Main circuit undervoltage (UV) alarm
Main circuit undervoltage (UV1), control power supply error (UV2),
Soft charge circuit error (UV3)
0022H
Bit D
Bit E
Bit F
Data link status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Output phase loss (LF)
Modbus communication error (CE)
Operator disconnected (OPR)
Writing data
Not used
Not used
Upper and lower limit errors
0023H
0024H
0025H
0026H
0027H
0028H
0029H
002AH
Bit 4
Bits 5 to F
Frequency reference
Output frequency
Data integrity error
Not used
U1-01
U1-02
Output voltage reference U1-06
Output current U1-03
Output power
Torque reference
Not used
Not used
U1-08
U1-09
002BH
Sequence input status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bits 8 to F
Input terminal S1: ON = 1 OFF = 0
Input terminal S2: ON = 1 OFF = 0
Multi-function digital input terminal S3: ON = 1 OFF = 0
Multi-function digital input terminal S4: ON = 1 OFF = 0
Multi-function digital input terminal S5: ON = 1 OFF = 0
Multi-function digital input terminal S6: ON = 1 OFF = 0
Multi-function digital input terminal S7: ON = 1 OFF = 0
Multi-function digital input terminal S8: ON = 1 OFF = 0
Not used
Note: Write 0 to all unused bits. Do not write data to reserved or “Not Used” registers and bits.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Communications D - 14
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Register No.
Table D.5 Monitor Data (Continued)
Contents
002CH
002DH
Drive status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit A
Bit B
Bit C
Bit D
Bit E
Bit F
Operation:
Zero speed:
Frequency agree:
Desired frequency agree:
Frequency detection 1:
Frequency detection 2:
Drive start-up completed:
Low voltage detection:
Baseblock:
Frequency reference mode:
Run command mode:
Overtorque detection:
Frequency reference lost:
Retrying error:
Operating = 1
Zero speed = 1
Matched = 1
Matched = 1
Output frequency
≤
L4-01 = 1
Output frequency
≥
L4-01 = 1
Start-up completed = 1
Detected = 1
Drive output baseblock = 1
Not communication = 1 Communication = 0
Not communication = 1 Communication = 0
Detected = 1
Lost = 1
Retrying = 1
Error (including Modbus communications time-out): Error occurred = 1
Modbus communications time-out Timed out = 0
Multi-function digital output status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Multi-function digital output 1 (terminal M1-M2): ON = 1 OFF = 0
Multi-function digital output 2 (terminal M3-M4): ON = 1 OFF = 0
Bit 2
Bits 3 to F
002EH - 0030H Not used
0031H Main circuit DC voltage
Multi-function digital output 3 (terminal M5-M6): ON = 1 OFF = 0
Not used
0032H - 0037H Not used
0038H PID feedback level (Input equivalent to 100%/Max. output frequency; 10/1%; without sign)
0039H
003AH
PID input level (±100%/±Max. output frequency; 10/1%; with sign)
PID output level (±100%/±Max. output frequency; 10/1%; with sign)
003BH
003CH
CPU software number
Flash software number
Communication error details
Bit 0 CRC error
003DH
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Invalid data length
Not used
Parity error
Overrun error
Bit 5
Bit 6
Framing error
Time-out
003EH
003FH
Bits 7 to F kVA setting
Control method
Not used
Note: Communication error details are stored until an error reset is input (errors can be reset while the Drive is operating).
Note: Write 0 to all unused bits. Do not write data to reserved or “Not Used” registers and bits.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Communications D - 15
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Broadcast Data
The following table shows the broadcast data.
Table D.6 Broadcast Data
Register
Address
Contents
0001H
Operation signal
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bits 2 and 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bits 6 to B
Bit C
Run command: Running = 1 Stopped = 0
Run direction: Reverse = 1 Forward = 0
Not used
External fault (set using H1-01): Fault = 1
Fault reset (set using H1-02): Reset = 1
Not used
Multi-function digital input terminal S5 input
Bit D
Bit E
Bit F
Multi-function digital input terminal S6 input
Multi-function digital input terminal S7 input
Multi-function digital input terminal S8 input
0002H Frequency reference 30000/100%
Note: Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use local node data signals continuously.
Note: Refer to register 000FH, bits 000CH through 000FH, in Table D.4 when using bits 000CH through
000FH of broadcast data register 0001H.
Enter Command
When writing parameters to the Drive from the master using Modbus communication, the parameters are temporarily stored in the constant data area in the Drive, and they will be lost if power to the Drive is shut OFF. To enable these parameters in the parameter data area, which is retained when power is removed, use the Enter command.
There are two types of Enter commands:
1. Enter command that enables parameter data in RAM.
2. Enter command that writes data to EEPROM (non-volatile memory) in the Drive and also enables data in RAM.
The following table shows the Enter command registers. Enter command registers can only be written.
The Enter command is enabled by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0910H.
Register No.
0900H
0910H
Table D.7 Enter Command
Contents
Write parameter data to EEPROM.
Parameter data is not written to EEPROM, but refreshed in RAM only.
IMPORTANT
The maximum number of times you can write to EEPROM using the Drive is 100,000. Do not frequently execute Enter command (0900H) written to EEPROM.
The Enter command registers are write-only. Consequently, if reading these registers, the register address will become invalid (Error code: 02H).
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Communications D - 16
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Error Codes
The following table shows Modbus communication error codes.
Table D.8 Error Codes
Error
Code
Contents
01H
02H
03H
21H
22H
23H
24H
Function code error
A function code other than 03H, 08H, or 10H has been set by the master.
Invalid register number error
• The register address you are attempting to access is not recorded anywhere.
• With broadcast sending, a start address other than 0000H, 0001H, or 0002H has been set.
Invalid quantity error
• The number of data packets being read or written is outside the range of 1 to 16.
• In write mode, the number of data packets in the message is not No. of packets x 2.
Data setting error
• Upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing parameters.
• When writing parameters, the parameter setting is invalid.
Write mode error
• Attempting to write parameters to the Drive during run.
• Attempting to write via Enter commands during run.
• Attempting to write parameters other than A1-00 to A1-05, E1-03, or 02-04 when a
CPF03 (defective EEPROM) fault has occurred.
• Attempting to write read-only data.
Writing during main circuit undervoltage (UV) fault
• Writing parameters to the Drive during UV (main circuit undervoltage) alarm.
• Writing via Enter commands during UV (main circuit undervoltage) alarm.
Writing error during parameters processing
Attempting to write parameters while processing parameters in the Drive.
Slave Not Responding
In the following cases, the slave will ignore the write function.
• When a communication error (overrun, framing, parity, or CRC-16) is detected in the command message.
• When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the Drive do not agree.
• When the data that configures the message and the data time length exceed 24 bits.
• When the command message data length is invalid.
IMPORTANT
If the slave address specified in the command message is 0, all slaves execute the write function, but do not return response messages to the master.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Communications D - 17
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Modbus Self-Diagnosis
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
The Drive has a built-in function for self-diagnosing the operations of the serial communication interface circuits. The self-diagnosis function tests the serial communications hardware of the Drive by jumpers the send and receive terminals to receive the same message as the Drive sends.
Perform the self-diagnosis function using the following procedure.
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Drive, and set parameter H1-05 (Terminal S7 function selection) to 67 (communication test mode).
2. Turn OFF the power supply to the Drive.
3. Jumper the following terminals while the power supply is turned OFF (see diagram below):
Connect S+ to R+.
Connect S- to R-.
Connect S7 to SN.
4. Turn ON the terminating resistor. (Turn ON pin 1 on DIP switch 1).
5. Turn ON the power supply to the Drive again.
E(G)
SN SC SP A1 A2 +V AC -V A3 MP AC RP R+ R-
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 FM AC AM IG S+ S-
M5 M6 MA MB MC
M3 M4 M1 M2 E(G)
Fig D.10 Communication Terminal Connection for Self -Diagnosis Function
6. During normal self-diagnostic operation, the Digital Operator displays the frequency reference value. If an error occurs, a
CE (Modbus communication error) alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator, the fault contact output will be turned
ON, and the Drive operation ready signal will be turned OFF.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Communications D - 18
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Appendix E
Peripheral Devices
This appendix describes recommended branch short circuit protection and peripheral devices.
Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection............................... E-2
Branch Circuit Overload Protection.................................... E-5
Peripheral Devices ............................................................. E-6
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Peripheral Devices E - 1
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection
The following peripheral devices may be required between the AC main circuit power supply and the Drive input terminals
L1(R), L2(S), and L3(T). Refer to applicable codes to determine the devices necessary for a given installation. Use Table E.1 or E.2 when selecting fuses and circuit breakers per the NEC. When selecting semiconductor fuses to provide Drive input I
2 t protection and comply with UL, CSA, NEC, and CEC branch circuit short circuit protection requirements, select one of the fuses in Table E.3 or E.4.
Fuse Type: UL designated Time-Delay or Non-Time-Delay Fuse
Class: CC, J, T, RK1 or RK5
Designators (typical): KTK, FNQ, FRS, LPJ, LPS, JKS, JJN, or JJS
Voltage Rating: 250V for Drives with 208-240V input
600V for Drives with 480V input
Circuit Breaker Type: Inverse Time (MCCB) or Instantaneous Trip (MCP)
Voltage Rating: 600V
Model
CIMR-F7U
Table E.1 Recommended Fuse and Circuit Breaker Ratings per NEC (208-240Vac Input)
Input Output Fuse Circuit Breaker
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria
Hp
Amps
*1
(Continuous
Rating)
Amps
*1
(Continuous
Rating)
Maximum
Time-Delay
Fuse Rating (A)
Maximum
Non-Time-Delay
Fuse Rating (A)
Maximum CB
Rating (A)
0.5/0.75
4.3
3.6
6 12 15
25P5
27P5
2011
2015
2018
2022
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
1
1.5/2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
5.5
9.4
13
20
24
37
53
70
89
98
4.6
7.8
10.8
16.8
23
31
46.2
59.4
74.8
88
8
15
20
30
40
60
80
110
125
150
12
15
20
30
50
80
80
125
150
150
2030
2037
2045
2055
40
50
60
75
120
180
212
237
115
162
192
215
200
250
300
350
200
250
300
350
225
300
350
450
2075
2090
75/100
125
350
396
312
360
450
600
450
600
600
700
2110 150 457 415 700 700 900
*1 Input and Output Amps are based on the Normal Duty (ND) current rating. Consult the Specification section for details on the Heavy Duty (HD) and Normal Duty (ND) ratings.
45
80
100
15
15
20
35
125
150
175
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Peripheral Devices E - 2
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Model
CIMR-F7U
Table E.2 Recommended Fuse and Circuit Breaker Ratings per NEC (480Vac Input)
Hp
Input
Amps
*1
(Continuous
Rating)
Output
Amps
*1
(Continuous
Rating)
Fuse
Selection Criteria
Maximum
Time-Delay
Fuse Rating (A)
Maximum
Non-Time-Delay
Fuse Rating (A)
Circuit Breaker
Selection Criteria
Maximum CB
Rating (A)
0.5/0.75
2.2
1.8
4 10 15
47P5
4011
4015
4018
4022
4030
4037
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P7
44P0
45P5
1
1.5/2
3
5
-
7.5
10
15/20
25
30
-
40/50
60
2.5
4.4
6.4
9
10.4
15
20
33
40
48
55
74
85
2.1
3.7
5.3
7.6
8.7
12.5
17
27
34
40
50.4
67.2
77
4
8
10
15
15
25
30
45
60
70
80
100
125
10
12
15
20
30
30
30
50
70
80
80
100
125
4045
4055
4075
4090
4110
4132
75
100
125
150
200
-
106
134
172
198
264
286
96
125
156
180
240
260
150
200
250
300
350
400
150
200
250
300
350
400
4160
4185
250
300/350
334
456
304
414
450
600
450
600
700
800
4220 400/450 567 515 700 700 1000
4300 500+ 743 675 900 900 1200
*1 Input and Output Amps are based on the Normal Duty (ND) current rating. Consult the Specification section for details on the Heavy Duty (HD) and Normal Duty (ND) ratings.
200
225
300
400
450
600
90
100
125
150
40
60
80
20
20
30
15
15
15
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Peripheral Devices E - 3
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
23P7
25P5
27P5
2011
2015
2018
2022
2030
Table E.3 Semiconductor Fuses for Drive I
2 t Protection and Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection (200V Series)
Recommended Alternate 1 Alternate 2
Drive
Model No.
CIMR-F7*
Fuse
Mfr.
Model No.
Rating Fuse Mfr.
Model No.
Rating Fuse Mfr.
Model No.
Rating
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
A60Q12-2
A60Q12-2
A60Q15-2
A60Q20-2
600V, 12A
600V, 12A
600V, 15A
600V, 20A
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
A070GRB006T13
A070GRB006T13
A70QS25-22F
6,900CPGRC14.51/25
700V, 6A
700V, 6A
700A, 25A
690V, 25A
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
FWH-20A14F
FWH-20A14F
FWH-20A14F
FWH-25A14F
500V, 20A
500V, 20A
500V, 20A
500V, 25A
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
A60Q30-2
A50P50-4
A50P80-4
A50P80-4
600V, 30A
500V, 50A
500V, 80A
500V, 80A
Ferraz A50P125-4 500V, 125A
Ferraz A50P150-4 500V, 150A
Ferraz A50P150-4 500V, 150A
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz A50P200-4 500V, 200A Bussmann
A70QS32-14F
A70QS50-14F
A50QS70-4
A50QS100-4
A50QS150-4
A50QS175-4
A50QS200-4
FWH-200B
700A, 32A
700V, 50A
500V, 70A
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
500V, 100A Bussmann
500V, 150A Bussmann
500V, 175A Bussmann
500V, 200A Bussmann
500V, 200A Bussmann
FWH-45B
FWH-80B
FWH-80B
FWH-100B
FWH-175B
FWH-200B
FWH-200B
FWH-225B
500V, 45A
500V, 80A
500V, 80A
500V, 100A
500V, 175A
500V, 200A
500V, 200A
500V, 225A
2037
2045
2055
2075
Ferraz A50P250-4 500V, 250A Ferraz
Ferraz A50P300-4 500V, 300A Ferraz
Ferraz A50P350-4 500V, 350A Bussmann
Ferraz A50P450-4 500V, 450A Ferraz
2090
2110
Ferraz A50P600-4 500V, 600A
Ferraz A50P600-4 500V, 600A
* Denotes letter A through Z
Ferraz
Ferraz
A30QS275-4
A30QS350-4
300V, 275A Bussmann 170M4610 690V, 315A
300V, 350A Bussmann FWH-350A 500V, 350A
FWH-400A 500V, 400A Bussmann FWH-450A 500V, 450A
A070URD33KI0550 700V, 550A Bussmann FWH-500A 500V, 500A
A70P600-4
A70P700-4
700V, 600A Bussmann FWH-600A 500V, 600A
700V, 700A Bussmann FWH-700A 500V, 700A
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Peripheral Devices E - 4
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
4022
4030
4037
4045
4055
4075
4090
4110
Table E.4 Semiconductor Fuses for Drive I
2 t Protection and Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection (400V Series)
Recommended Alternate 1 Alternate 2
Drive
Model No.
CIMR-F7*
Fuse
Mfr.
Model No.
Rating Fuse Mfr.
Model No.
Rating Fuse Mfr.
Model No.
Rating
40P4
40P7
41P5
Ferraz A60Q10-2 600V, 10A
Ferraz A60Q10-2 600V, 10A
Ferraz A60Q12-2 600V, 12A
Ferraz
Ferraz
A070GRB006T13
A070GRB006T13
700V, 6A
700V, 6A
Ferraz 6,900CPGRC14.51/25 690V, 25A
Ferraz A70QS16-14F 690V, 16A
Ferraz A70QS16-14F 690V, 16A
Ferraz A70QS20-14F 690V, 20A
42P2
43P7
44P0
45P5
47P5
4011
4015
4018
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
A60Q15-2
A60Q20-2
A60Q30-2
A60Q30-2
A60Q30-2
A70P50-4
A70P70-4
A70P80-4
600V, 15A
600V, 20A
600V, 30A
600V, 30A
600V, 30A
700V, 50A
700V, 70A
700V, 80A
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
A70QS25-22F
A70QS20-14F
A70QS32-14F
A70QS32-14F
A70QS40-14F
A50QS50-4
A50QS80-4
A50QS100-4
700V, 25A
700V, 20A
700V, 32A
700V, 32A
700V, 40A
500V, 50A
500V, 80A
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
-
Bussmann
Bussmann
500V, 100A Bussmann
A70QS20-14F
A70QS25-14F
A70QS40-14F
A70QS40-14F
-
FWH-80B
FWH-100B
FWH-125B
690V, 20A
690V, 25A
690V, 40A
690V, 40A
-
500V, 80A
500V, 100A
500V, 125A
4132
4160
4185
4220
Ferraz A70P80-4 700V, 80A Ferraz
Ferraz A70P100-4 700V, 100A Ferraz
Ferraz A70P125-4 700V, 125A Ferraz
Ferraz A70P150-4 700V, 150A Ferraz
Ferraz A70P200-4 700V, 200A Ferraz
Ferraz A70P250-4 700V, 250A Ferraz
Ferraz A70P300-4 700V, 300A Ferraz
Ferraz A70P350-4 700V, 350A Ferraz
Ferraz A70P400-4 700V, 400A
Ferraz A70P450-4 700V, 450A
Ferraz A70P600-4 700V, 600A
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz A70P700-4 700V, 700A Bussmann
4300 Ferraz A70P900-4 700V, 900A Bussmann
* Denotes letter A through Z
A50QS100-4
A50QS125-4
A50QS125-4
A50QS150-4
A70QS200-4
A50QS250-4
A50QS300-4
A50P350-4
A70P500-4
A70QS700-4
A70QS700-4
FWH-800A
FWH-1000A
500V, 100A Bussmann FWH-125B 500V, 125A
500V, 125A Bussmann FWH-125B 500V, 125A
500V, 125A Bussmann FWH-150B 500V, 150A
500V, 150A Bussmann FWH-175B 500V, 175A
700V, 200A Bussmann FWH-200B 500V, 200A
500V, 250A Bussmann FWH-250A 500V, 250A
500V, 300A Bussmann 170M4611 690V, 350A
500V, 350A Bussmann 170M4611 690V, 350A
700V, 500A Bussmann
700V, 700A Bussmann
700V, 700A Bussmann
500V, 800A Bussmann
500V, 1000A Bussmann
170M5610
FWH-600A
FWH-700A
FWH-1000A
FWH-1200A
690V, 500A
500V, 600A
500V, 700A
500V, 1000A
500V, 1200A
Branch Circuit Overload Protection
All models have built-in UL evaluated motor overload protection. Motor overload protection is also provided in accordance with the NEC and CEC. Additional branch circuit overload protection is not required for single motor applications.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Peripheral Devices E - 5
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Peripheral Devices
The following peripheral devices may be required to be mounted between the AC main circuit power supply and the Drive input terminals R/LI, S/L2, and T/L3.
CAUTION
Never connect a general LC/RC noise filter to the Drive output circuit.
Never connect a phase-advancing capacitor to the input or output sides, or a surge suppressor to the output side of the Drive. When magnetic contactor is installed between the Drive and the motor, never turn it on or off during operation.
For more details on peripheral devices, contact the manufacturer.
Magnetic Contactor
Mount a surge protector on the coil. When using a magnetic contactor to start and stop the Drive, do not exceed one start per hour.
AC and DC reactor
When using models F7U20P4 thru F7U2018 and F7U40P4 thru F7U4018 on a power supply transformer with a capacity of
600kVA or more, install an AC or DC reactor. The reactor improves the input power factor and provides protection to the rectifier circuit within the Drive.
Noise Filter
Use a noise filter exclusively for the Drive if radio noise generated from the Drive causes other control devices to malfunction.
See Chapter 2.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Peripheral Devices E - 6
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Appendix F
Spare Parts
This appendix lists the primary spare parts that may be needed to maintain or service the Drive.
F7 Primary Spare Parts - 208/230/240Vac......................... F-2
F7 Primary Spare Parts - 480Vac....................................... F-3
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Spare Parts F - 1
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
F7 Primary Spare Parts - 208/230/240Vac
Drive Model
CIMR-F7U
2015
2018
2022
2030
2037
2045
2055
2075
2090
2110
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
25P5
27P5
2011
Hp
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
75/100
125
150
0.5/0.75
1
1.5/2
3
5
7.5
10
15
Power PCB
(3PCB)
Table F.1 208-240Vac F7 Primary Spare Parts
Gate Drive PCB
(3PCB)
Control PCB
(1PCB)
Terminal PCB
(2PCB)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
ETP617012
ETP617012
ETP617022
ETP617032
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
ETP617042
ETP617052
N/A
N/A
ETP617062 N/A
ETP617422 N/A
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC617032 ETC618390-S3020
ETC617042 ETC618390-S3020
ETC617053
ETC617063
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC617073
ETC617083
ETC617093
ETC617103
ETC617113
ETC617531
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
Diode Module
Inside the Power Module
Inside the Power Module
Inside the Power Module
Inside the Power Module
Inside the Power Module
Inside the Power Module
Inside the Power Module
SID003113 (D1)
SID003114 (D1,D2)
SID003113 (D1,D2)
SID003130 (D1,D2)
SID003115 (D1,D2)
SID003115 (D1,D2)
SID003116 (D1-D6)
SID003116 (D1-D6)
SID003108 (D1-D12)
Drive Model
CIMR-F7U
20P4
2018
2022
2030
2037
2045
2055
2075
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
25P5
27P5
2011
2015
2090
2110
Hp
20
25
30
40
50
60
0.5/0.75
1
1.5/2
3
5
7.5
10
15
75
75/100
125
150
Table F.1 208-240Vac F7 Primary Spare Parts (Continued)
Power Module
STR001297 (Q1)
STR001297 (Q1)
STR001299 (Q1)
STR001301 (Q1)
STR001303 (Q1)
STR001304 (Q1)
STR001278 (Q1)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Transistor Module
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
STR001315 (Q1)
STR001315 (Q1)
STR001320 (Q1)
STR001314 (Q1)
STR001323 (Q1)
STR001293 (Q1-Q3)
STR001335 (Q1-Q3)
STR001335 (Q1-Q3)
STR001349 (Q1-Q6)
STR001338 (Q1-Q6)
STR001351 (Q1-Q12)
DC Bus Fuse
FU-002029 (F1)
FU-002029 (F1)
FU-002029 (F1)
FU-002030 (F1)
FU-002031 (F1)
FU-002099 (F1)
FU-002107 (F1)
FU-002108 (F1)
FU-002108 (F1)
FU-002109 (F1)
FU-002110 (F1)
FU-002110 (F1)
FU-002102 (F1)
FU-000925 (F1)
FU-000938 (F1)
FU-000926 (F1)
FU-002105 (F1)
FU-002106 (F1)
Heat Sink Fan
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
FAN001066 (B1)
FAN001066 (B1)
FAN001066 (B1,B2)
FAN001066 (B1,B2)
FAN001065 (B1,B2)
FAN001065 (B1,B2)
FAN001039 (B1,B2)
FAN001039 (B1,B2)
FAN001049 (B1,B2)
FAN001049 (B1,B2)
FAN001052 (B1,B2)
FAN001056 (B1,B2)
FAN001056 (B1,B2)
FAN001056 (B1,B2)
Internal Fan
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
FAN001043 (B3)
N/A
FAN001043 (B3)
N/A
N/A
FAN001053 (B4)
FAN001053 (B4)
FAN001054 (B4)
FAN001054 (B4)
FAN001054 (B4)
FAN001054 (B4)
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Spare Parts F - 2
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell
F7 Primary Spare Parts - 480Vac
Email: [email protected]
Drive Model
CIMR-F7U
4011
4015
4018
4022
4030
4037
4045
4055
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P7
44P0
45P5
47P5
4075
4090
4110
4132
4160
4185
4220
4300
Hp
40
50
60
75
15
20
25
30
0.5/0.75
1
1.5/2
3
5
-
7.5
10
100
125/150
-
200
250
300
350/400
450/500+
Table F.2 480Vac F7 Primary Spare Parts
Power PCB
(3PCB)
Gate Drive PCB
(3PCB)
ETP617082
ETP617082
ETP617092
ETP617102
ETP617112
ETP617122
ETP617132
ETP617142
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
ETP617152 N/A
ETP617162 N/A
ETP617172 N/A
N/A ETC617141
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
ETC617151
ETC617161
ETC617171
ETC617181
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
ETC617190
ETC617200
ETC617210
ETC617220
Control PCB
(1PCB)
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
Terminal PCB
(2PCB)
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
ETC617230
ETC617240
ETC617250
ETC617260
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618390-S3020
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
ETC618410
Hp
40
50
60
75
15
20
25
30
0.5/0.75
1
1.5/2
3
5
-
7.5
10
100
125/150
-
200
250
300
350/400
450/500+
Drive Model
CIMR-F7U
4011
4015
4018
4022
4030
4037
4045
4055
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P7
44P0
45P5
47P5
4075
4090
4110
4132
4160
4185
4220
4300
Table F.2 480Vac F7 Primary Spare Parts (Continued)
Power Module Transistor Module DC Bus Fuse Heat Sink Fan
STR001298 (Q1)
STR001298 (Q1)
STR001298 (Q1)
STR001298 (Q1)
STR001300 (Q1)
N/A
STR001302 (Q1)
STR001279 (Q1)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
STR001280 (Q1)
STR001318 (Q1)
STR001318 (Q1)
STR001324 (Q1)
STR001324 (Q1)
STR001316 (Q1-Q3)
STR001317 (Q1-Q3)
STR001317 (Q1-Q3)
STR001294 (Q1-Q3)
STR001336 (Q1-Q6)
STR001336 (Q1-Q6)
STR001322 (Q1-Q6)
STR001322 (Q1-Q3)
STR001339 (Q1-Q12)
STR001341 (Q1-Q12)
STR001342 (Q1-Q12)
FU-002029 (F1)
FU-002029 (F1)
FU-002029 (F1)
FU-002029 (F1)
FU-002031 (F1)
FU-002031 (F1)
FU-002031 (F1)
FU-002032 (F1)
FU-002037 (F1)
FU-002038 (F1)
FU-002038 (F1)
FU-002038 (F1)
FU-002039 (F1)
FU-002040 (F1)
FU-002040 (F1)
FU-002101 (F1)
FU-002112 (F1)
FU-002113 (F1)
FU-002114 (F1)
FU-000894 (F1)
FU-000895 (F1)
FU-000895 (F1)
FU-002116 (F1)
FU-002117 (F1)
N/A
N/A
N/A
FAN001066 (B1)
FAN001066 (B1)
FAN001066 (B1)
FAN001066 (B1)
FAN001066 (B1,B2)
FAN001066 (B1,B2)
FAN001065 (B1,B2)
FAN001065 (B1,B2)
FAN001039 (B1,B2)
FAN001039 (B1,B2)
FAN001044 (B1,B2)
FAN001044 (B1,B2)
FAN001044 (B1,B2)
FAN001052 (B1,B2)
FAN001052 (B1,B2)
FAN001056 (B1,B2)
FAN001056 (B1,B2)
FAN001056 (B1,B2)
FAN001056 (B1-B4)
FAN001056 (B1-B4)
FAN001082 (B1-B5)
Spare Parts F - 3
Diode Module
Inside the Power Module
Inside the Power Module
Inside the Power Module
Inside the Power Module
Inside the Power Module
Inside the Power Module
Inside the Power Module
Inside the Power Module
Inside the Power Module
SID003112 (D1,D2)
SID003112 (D1,D2)
SID000605 (D1,D2)
SID000605 (D1,D2)
SID003117 (D1,D2)
SID003117 (D1,D2)
SID003109 (D1-D6)
SID003118 (D1-D6)
SID003119 (D1-D6)
SID003119 (D1-D6)
SID003131 (D1-D6)
SID003119(D1-D12)
Internal Fan
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
FAN001043 (B3)
N/A
FAN001043 (B3)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
FAN001054 (B4)
FAN001054 (B4)
FAN001054 (B4)
FAN001054 (B4)
FAN001054 (B4)
FAN001054 (B6,B7)
FAN001054 (B6,B7)
FAN001054 (B6,B7)
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Notes:
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
A
AC and DC Reactor ..........................................................E-6
Accel/Decel ...................................................................... 5-8
Accel/Decel Time
C1-01 Acceleration Time 1 ..............................4-12, 5-8
C1-02 Deceleration Time 1 ..............................4-12, 5-8
Alarm Detection ............................................................. 6-10
Alarm Displays and Processing .............................. 6-10
Ambient Temperature ..................................................... 1-11
Analog Output Gain ....................................................... 5-21
H4-02 Terminal FM Gain ....................................... 5-21
H4-05 Terminal AM Gain ....................................... 5-21
Auto-Tuning ................................................................... 4-10
No Rotate Tuning .................................................... 4-11
Standard Tuning ...................................................... 4-10
Terminal Resistance Tuning ................................... 4-11
Auto-Tuning Faults ........................................................ 6-17
Auto-Tuning Fault Displays and Processing ............ 6-17
Auto-Tuning Menu (-A.TUNE-) .................................... 3-13
T1-01 Tuning Mode Selection ................................. 3-14
T1-02 Motor Rated Power ....................................... 3-14
T1-03 Rated Voltage ................................................ 3-14
T1-04 Rated Current ................................................ 3-14
T1-05 Rated Frequency............................................ 3-14
T1-06 Number of Poles ............................................ 3-14
T1-07 Rated Speed ................................................... 3-14
T1-08 PG Pulses/Rev ............................................... 3-14
B
Base Frequency .............................................................. 4-13
Base Voltage ................................................................... 4-13
Braking Transistor Unit(s)
Installation ............................................................... 2-15
Adjustments ..................................................... 2-18
Operation Check .............................................. 2-18
Branch Circuit Overload Protection .................................E-5
Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection ...........................E-2
Control Circuit ........................................................................
..... 1-13, 2-20, 2-21, 2-24, 2-37, 4-3, 4-4, 6-2, 6-3, 6-9, 6-14
Preventive Maintenance ............................................7-3
Terminal Functions ..................................................2-20
+15Vdc power output .......................................2-20
-15Vdc power output ........................................2-20
Add to terminal A1 ...........................................2-20
Analog common ..................................... 2-20, 2-21
Analog input or speed command ......................2-20
Aux. frequency reference 1 ..............................2-20
Digital input photocoupler ...............................2-20
Digital input supply +24Vdc ............................2-20
Digital input supply common ...........................2-20
During run (N.O. contact) ................................2-20
External baseblock N.O. ...................................2-20
External fault input ...........................................2-20
Fault output signal (SPDT) ..............................2-20
Fault reset .........................................................2-20
Forward run/stop command .............................2-20
Frequency agree (N.O. contact) .......................2-20
Jog frequency reference ...................................2-20
Modbus communication input ..........................2-21
Modbus communication output ........................2-21
Multi-step speed reference 1 ............................2-20
Multi-step speed reference 2 ............................2-20
Output current ..................................................2-21
Output frequency ..............................................2-21
Pulse input ........................................................2-21
Pulse monitor ....................................................2-21
Remote/auto operation (N.O. contact) .............2-20
Reverse run/stop command ..............................2-20
Shield wire, optional ground line connection point ........................................2-20
Signal common .................................................2-21
Terminals ........................................................... 1-5, 2-2
Terminal Layout ................................................ 1-5, 2-2
Wire Sizes ................................................................2-24
Wiring Precautions ..................................................2-24
Control circuit failure/damage ..........................................6-3
Control circuit fault ...........................................................6-9
Control Method .................................................................5-2
Control Method Selection ...............................................4-12
Control Wiring ................................................................2-20
C
Capacity Related Parameters ........................................... B-1
Carrier Frequency ............................................................. 5-9
Carrier Frequency Selection .............................4-12, 5-9
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site ................ 1-11
Coast to stop ..................................................................... 5-6
Communication Connection Terminal ............................ D-3
Communication Specifications ........................................ D-2
Communications .............................................................. D-1
Component Names ............................................ 1-5, 1-6, 3-2
Index 1
D
Deceleration Time 1 .......................................................4-12
Delivery
Confirmation ..............................................................1-3
Receiving Checks ......................................................1-3
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting ........................................6-1
Digital Operator ................1-5, 1-6, 1-16, 3-1, 4-7, 4-15, 5-3
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Alarm Detection ...................................................... 6-10
Attaching ................................................................. 1-14
Auto-Tuning Faults ........................................... 6-17, 18
Connection Fault ....................................................... 6-7
Contrast .................................................................. A-35
COPY Function ...................................................... A-37
COPY Function Faults ............................................ 6-19
Display .............................................................3-2, 3-15
Display Scaling ...................................................... A-35
Fault Detection .......................................................... 6-2
Keys ........................................................................... 3-3
Mounting ................................................................. 1-15
Operating Programming Errors (OPE) .................... 6-15
Parameter List .......................................................... A-3
Preventive Maintenance ............................................ 7-3
Removing ................................................................ 1-14
RUN Key ................................................................... 5-4
STOP Key ................................................................. 5-4
Troubleshooting ...................................................... 6-20
DIP Switch S1 ................................................................ 2-22
Drive Capacity Setting
Selection ................................................................... B-2
Parameters Affected ................................................. B-3
Drive Date Stamp Information ....................................... 6-31
Drive Enclosure and Revision Code ................................ 1-4
Drive Main Circuit Configurations ................................ 2-10
Drive Main Menus ............................................................ 3-6
Auto-Tuning .............................................................. 3-6
Modified Constants ................................................... 3-6
Operation ................................................................... 3-6
Programming ............................................................. 3-6
Quick Setting ............................................................. 3-6
Drive Mode Indicators ...................................................... 3-4
Drive Model Numbers ...................................................... 1-4
Drive Rating ............................................................. 1-4, B-2
Drive Start-Up Preparation ............................................... 4-2
Drive Start-Up Procedures ............................................... 4-5
Auto-Tuning ............................................................ 4-10
Flux Vector Start-Up ................................................. 4-9
Open Loop Vector Start-Up ...................................... 4-8
V/F Start-Up .............................................................. 4-6
V/F w/ PG Start-Up ................................................... 4-7
Dynamic Braking (DB) .................................................. 2-12
Dynamic Braking Connections
General .................................................................... 2-12
Installation ............................................................... 2-12
E
Electrical Installation ........................................................2-1
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ...........................2-26
Cable Installation .....................................................2-26
EMC Directive ................................................................2-26
Recommended EMC Filters ....................................2-28
Enclosure type ..........................................................1-4, C-5
Example of Changing a Parameter .................................3-15
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions ..................................1-7
F
F7 Basic Programming Parameters
Control Method .........................................................5-2
Description of Parameter Tables ...............................5-2
Fault Detection ..................................................................6-2
Fault Displays and Processing ...................................6-2
Fault History List ...........................................................A-41
Fault Trace List ..............................................................A-41
Field Wiring Diagram .....................................................2-25
Frequency Reference ........................................................3-8
Frequency Reference 1 ...................................................4-12
Frequency Reference 2 ...................................................4-12
Frequency Reference 3 ...................................................4-12
Frequency Reference 4 ...................................................4-12
Frequency Reference Selection ......................................4-12
Front cover ................................................................ 1-5, 1-6
Removing/Attaching ................................................1-14
Function Code ..................................................................D-5
Modbus .....................................................................D-5
G
Ground Wiring ................................................................2-11
H
Heat Sink .............................................................. 2-12, 6-31
Die-cast ......................................................................1-5
Heat Sink Mount Dynamic Braking Resistor .................2-12
Heat Sink Mount Resistor (ERF) ....................................2-12
Installation ...............................................................2-13
Heatsink Cooling Fan Replacement .................................7-5
Installing the Heatsink Cooling Fan ..........................7-5
Mounting the Heatsink Cooling Fan Assembly ............7-6
Removing the Heatsink Cooling Fan ........................7-5
Removing the Heatsink Cooling Fan Assembly ............7-5
High Frequency (HF) ......................................................2-26
High Speed Operation .....................................................5-14
High Starting Torque ............................................ 5-12, 5-14
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Index 2
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
I
Input Voltage Setting..............................................4-13, 5-12
E1-01 Input Voltage Setting .................................... 5-12
Installation Orientation and Clearances ......................... 1-12
Installation Site
Checking and Controlling ....................................... 1-11
Specifications .......................................................... 1-11
Installing and Wiring Option Boards ............................. 2-30
Installation ............................................................... 2-31
Option Board Models and Specifications ............... 2-30
PG (Encoder) Feedback Board Terminal
Specifications and Wiring Examples ....................... 2-32
PG-A2 .............................................................. 2-32
PG-B2 .............................................................. 2-34
PG-D2 .............................................................. 2-36
PG-W2 ............................................................. 2-38
PG-X2 .............................................................. 2-37
J
Jog Frequency Reference ............................................... 4-12
Jumper CN15 .................................................................. 2-22
Enter Command ......................................................D-16
Error Codes .............................................................D-17
Monitor Data ..........................................................D-11
Reference Data .......................................................D-10
Slave Not Responding ............................................D-17
Modbus Function Code Details
Loopback Test (08H) ................................................D-9
Reading/Holding Register Contents (03H) ..............D-8
Write In Several Holding Registers (10H) ...............D-9
Write In Single Holding Register (06H) ..................D-8
Modbus Function Code Details .......................................D-8
Modbus Function Code ....................................................D-5
Modbus Self-Diagnosis .................................................D-18
Modified Constants Menu (-VERIFY-) ..........................3-13
Monitor List ...................................................................A-38
Motor Overload Fault .....................................................5-22
L1-01 Motor Overload Fault Selection ...................5-22
Motor Overload Protection Selection .............................4-14
Motor Rated Current .......................................................4-13
Motor Rated Output ........................................................4-13
Motor Setup ....................................................................5-20
E2-01 Motor Rated Current .....................................5-20
E2-04 Number of Motor Poles ................................5-20
E2-11 Motor Rated Power .......................................5-20
Mounting hole ........................................................... 1-5, 7-4
Multiple Braking Transistor Units ........................ 2-15, 2-17
L
Low Frequency (LF) ...................................................... 2-26
M N
Magnetic Contactor ..........................................................E-6
Main Circuit Configurations ............................................ 2-9
Main Circuit Terminal Functions ..................................... 2-9
Main Circuit Terminals
Wiring ....................................................................... 2-3
Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop
Connectors ......................................................... 2-3
Recommended Connectors for
Terminal Connections ........................................ 2-8
Main Circuit Test Procedure
Flowchart ................................................................. 6-28
Main Circuit Test Procedure .......................................... 6-28
Main Menu Structure ........................................................ 3-7
Maintenance ..................................................................... 7-1
Maximum Output Frequency ......................................... 4-13
Maximum Output Voltage .............................................. 4-13
Message Format .............................................................. D-5
Minimum Output Frequency .......................................... 4-13
Modbus Communication ................................................. D-2
Configuration ........................................................... D-2
Modbus Data Tables ...................................................... D-10
Broadcast Data ....................................................... D-16
Nameplate
Information ................................................................1-3
Nameplate .............................................................. 1-3, A-16
No Response Message .....................................................D-7
Noise Filter ...................................................................... E-6
Number of Motor Poles ..................................................4-13
O
Open Chassis Type ...................................................1-4, C-5
Operation Menu (-DRIVE-)
U1 Monitor List ..........................................................3-8
U1-01 Frequency Reference ...............................3-8
U1-02 Output Frequency ....................................3-8
U1-03 Output Current ........................................3-8
U1-04 Control Method .......................................3-8
U1-05 Motor Speed ............................................3-8
U1-06 Output Voltage ........................................3-8
U1-07 DC Bus Voltage ......................................3-8
U1-08 Output Power ..........................................3-8
U1-09 Torque Reference ....................................3-8
U1-10 Input Terminal Status ..............................3-8
U1-11 Output Terminal Status ...........................3-8
Index 3
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
U1-12 Drive Operation Status ...........................3-8
U1-13 Cumulative Operation Time ...................3-8
U1-14 Software Number ....................................3-8
U1-15 Terminal A1 Input Voltage .....................3-8
U1-16 Terminal A2 Input Voltage......................3-8
U1-17 Terminal A3 Input Voltage .....................3-8
U1-18 Motor Secondary Current ......................3-8
U1-19 Motor Excitation Current ........................3-8
U1-20 Output Frequency after Soft-Start ..........3-8
U1-21 ASR Input ...............................................3-8
U1-22 ASR Output ............................................3-8
U1-24 PI Feedback Value ..................................3-8
U1-25 DI-16 H2 Input Status .............................3-8
U1-26 Output Voltage Reference (Vq) ..............3-8
U1-27 Output Voltage Reference (Vd) ..............3-8
U1-28 CPU Number ..........................................3-8
U1-29 kWh (Lower 4 digits) .............................3-8
U1-30 MWh (Upper 5 digits) ............................3-8
U1-32 ACR(q) Output .......................................3-8
U1-33 ACR(d) Output .......................................3-8
U1-34 OPE Detected .........................................3-8
U1-35 Zero Servo Pulse Count ..........................3-8
U1-36 PID Input ................................................3-8
U1-37 PID Output ..............................................3-8
U1-38 PID Setpoint ...........................................3-8
U1-39 Modbus Error Code ................................3-8
U1-40 Cooling Fan Elapsed Time .....................3-8
U1-44 ASR Output with or without Filter ...........3-8
U1-45 Feed Forward Control Output .................3-8
U2 Fault Trace List ...................................................3-9
U2-01 Current Fault ...........................................3-9
U2-02 Previous Fault .........................................3-9
U2-03 Frequency Reference at Fault .................3-9
U2-04 Output Frequency at Fault ......................3-9
U2-05 Output Current at Fault ...........................3-9
U2-06 Motor Speed at Fault ..............................3-9
U2-07 Output Voltage at Fault ..........................3-9
U2-08 DC Bus Voltage at Fault .........................3-9
U2-09 Output Power at Fault .............................3-9
U2-10 Torque Reference at Fault ......................3-9
U2-11 Input Terminal Status at Fault ................3-9
U2-12 Output Terminal Status at Fault ..............3-9
U2-13 Drive Operation Status at Fault ..............3-9
U2-14 Cumulative Operation Time at Fault ..........3-9
U3 Fault History List ..............................................3-10
U3-01 Last Fault ..............................................3-10
U3-02 Fault Message 2 ....................................3-10
U3-03 Fault Message 3 ....................................3-10
U3-04 Fault Message 4 ....................................3-10
U3-05 Elapsed Time 1 .....................................3-10
U3-06 Elapsed Time 2 ..................................... 3-10
U3-07 Elapsed Time 3 ..................................... 3-10
U3-08 Elapsed Time 4 ..................................... 3-10
U3-09 Fault Message 5 .................................... 3-10
U3-10 Fault Message 6 .................................... 3-10
U3-11 Fault Message 7 .................................... 3-10
U3-12 Fault Message 8 .................................... 3-10
U3-13 Fault Message 9 .................................... 3-10
U3-14 Fault Message 10 .................................. 3-10
U3-15 Elapsed Time 5 ..................................... 3-10
U3-16 Elapsed Time 6 ..................................... 3-10
U3-17 Elapsed Time 7 ..................................... 3-10
U3-18 Elapsed Time 8 ..................................... 3-10
U3-19 Elapsed Time 9 ..................................... 3-10
U3-20 Elapsed Time 20 ................................... 3-10
Operation Menu (-DRIVE-) ............................................. 3-8
Operator Programming Errors (OPE) ............................ 6-15
OPE Error Displays ................................................ 6-15
P
Parameter
Affected by Drive Capacity Setting ......................... B-3
Basic Programming .................................................. 5-2
Copy .......................................................................... 3-2
Description of Parameter Tables .............................. 5-2
Group List ............................................................... 3-12
Motor Parameters .................................................... 3-13
Parameter List .......................................................... A-3
Serial Communication ............................................. D-4
Set/read modified .................................................... 3-13
Setting ..................................................................... 3-12
Part Replacement Guidelines ........................................... 7-4
Periodic Inspection ........................................................... 7-2
Periodic Inspections With no Power Applied ........... 7-2
Periodic Inspections With Power Applied ................ 7-2
Periodic Maintenance of Parts ......................................... 7-4
Peripheral Devices ...........................................................E-6
AC and DC reactor ...................................................E-6
Magnetic Contactor ..................................................E-6
Noise Filter ...............................................................E-6
PG (Encoder) Feedback Board Terminal
Specifications and Wiring Examples ............................. 2-32
PG Option ...................................................................... 5-20
F1-01 PG Pulses / Revolution ................................. 5-20
PG Parameter ................................................................. 4-13
Preset Reference ............................................................. 5-11 d1-01 Frequency Reference 1 ................................. 5-11 d1-02 Frequency Reference 2 ................................. 5-11 d1-03 Frequency Reference 3 ................................. 5-11
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Index 4
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
d1-04 Frequency Reference 4 ................................. 5-11 d1-17 Jog Reference ................................................ 5-11
Preventive Maintenance ................................................... 7-3
Flowchart ................................................................... 7-3
Procedure for Setting Up Communication ...................... D-3
Programming Menu (-ADV-) ......................................... 3-12
A1 Initialization ...................................................... 3-12
A2 User Parameters ................................................. 3-12 b1 Sequence ............................................................ 3-12 b2 DC Injection Braking ......................................... 3-12 b3 Speed Search ...................................................... 3-12 b4 Delay Timers ...................................................... 3-12 b5 PID Control ........................................................ 3-12 b6 Reference Hold ................................................... 3-12 b7 Droop control ..................................................... 3-12 b8 Energy Saving .................................................... 3-12 b9 Zero Servo .......................................................... 3-12
C1 Accel/Decel ....................................................... 3-12
C2 S-Curve Accel/Decel ......................................... 3-12
C3 Motor-Slip Compensation ................................. 3-12
C4 Torque Compensation ....................................... 3-12
C5 ASR Tuning ....................................................... 3-12
C6 Carrier Frequency .............................................. 3-12 d1 Preset Reference ................................................. 3-12 d2 Reference Limits ................................................ 3-12 d3 Jump Frequencies ............................................... 3-12 d4 Sequence (MOP & Trim Control) ...................... 3-12 d5 Torque Control ................................................... 3-12 d6 Field-Weakening ................................................ 3-12
E1 V/F Pattern ......................................................... 3-12
E2 Motor Setup ....................................................... 3-12
E3 V/F Pattern 2 ...................................................... 3-12
E4 Motor Setup 2 .................................................... 3-12
F1 PG Option Setup ................................................ 3-12
F2 AI-14 Setup ........................................................ 3-12
F3 DI-08, 16 Setup .................................................. 3-12
F4 AO-08, 12 Setup ................................................ 3-12
F5 DO-02, 08 Setup ................................................ 3-12
F6 Communications Option Setup ........................... 3-12
H1 Digital Inputs ..................................................... 3-12
H2 Digital Outputs .................................................. 3-12
H3 Analog Inputs .................................................... 3-12
H4 Analog Outputs ................................................. 3-12
H5 Serial Communications Setup ........................... 3-12
H6 Pulse I/O Setup .................................................. 3-12
L1 Motor Overload ................................................. 3-12
L2 Power Loss Ridethru .......................................... 3-12
L3 Stall Prevention .................................................. 3-12
L4 Reference Detection ........................................... 3-12
L5 Fault Restart ....................................................... 3-12
L6 Torque Detection ............................................... 3-12
L7 Torque Limit ......................................................3-12
L8 Hardware Protection ..........................................3-12 n1 Hunting Prevention .............................................3-12 n2 AFR Tuning ........................................................3-12 n3 High Slip Braking ...............................................3-12 n5 Feed Forward ......................................................3-12 o1 Monitor Select ....................................................3-12 o2 Key Selections ....................................................3-12 o3 COPY Function ..................................................3-12
T1 Auto-Tuning .......................................................3-12
Protecting the Drive from Foreign Matter ......................1-11
Q
Quick Setting Menu (-QUICK-) .....................................3-11
A1-02 Control Method Selection ............................3-11 b1-01 Frequency Reference Selection .....................3-11 b1-02 Run Command Selection ...............................3-11 b1-03 Stopping Method Selection ...........................3-11
C1-01 Acceleration Time 1 .....................................3-11
C1-02 Deceleration Time 1 .....................................3-11
C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection .........................3-11 d1-01 Frequency Reference 1 ..................................3-11 d1-02 Frequency Reference 2 ..................................3-11 d1-03 Frequency Reference 3 ..................................3-11 d1-04 Frequency Reference 4 ..................................3-11 d1-17 Jog Reference ................................................3-11
E1-01 Input Voltage Setting ....................................3-11
E1-03 V/F Pattern Selection ....................................3-11
E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency ........................3-11
E1-05 Maximum Output Voltage ............................3-11
E1-06 Base Frequency .............................................3-11
E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency ........................3-11
E1-13 Base Voltage .................................................3-11
E2-01 Motor Rated Current .....................................3-11
E2-04 Number of Motor Poles ................................3-11
E2-11 Motor Rated Output ......................................3-11
F1-01 PG Pulses / Revolution .................................3-11
F1-21 PG Pulse / Revolution 2 ................................3-11
F1-22 PG Rotation Selection ...................................3-11
H4-02 Terminal FM Gain Setting ...........................3-11
H4-05 Terminal AM Gain Setting ...........................3-11
L1-01 Motor Overload Protection Selection .............3-11
L3-04 Stall Prevention Selection During Decel ............3-11
Quick Setting Parameters ...............................................4-12
Index 5
R
Remote Mount Resistor Unit
Installation Using Internal Braking Transistor............2-14
Remote Mount Resistor Unit(s)
Installation ...............................................................2-15
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
REMOTE Reference (REF) Indicator .............................. 3-5
REMOTE Sequence (SEQ) Indicator ............................... 3-4
Revision Code .................................................................. 1-4
Run Command Source ...................................................... 5-4 b1-02 Run Source Selection ...................................... 5-4
2-Wire Control ................................................... 5-4
3-Wire Control ................................................... 5-4
Run Command Selection ................................................ 4-12
Run Indicator .................................................................... 3-5
S
Serial Communication
Parameters ................................................................ D-4
Sinking/Sourcing Mode .................................................. 2-23
Slave Address .................................................................. D-5
Spare Parts ........................................................................F-1
Primary Spare Parts ...................................................F-2
SPEC number ................................................................... 1-4
Specifications .................................................................. C-1
Common ................................................................... C-5
Speed Command Source .................................................. 5-3 b1-01 Reference Source Selection ............................ 5-3
Stall Prevention .............................................................. 5-23
L3-04 Stall Prevention During
Deceleration Selection ............................................ 5-23
Stall Prevention Selection During Decel ........................ 4-14
Standard Drive Specifications ......................................... C-2
Stop Indicator ................................................................... 3-5
Stopping Method .............................................................. 5-5 b1-03 Stopping Method Selection ............................. 5-5
Stopping Method Selection .....................................4-12, 5-5
Coast to Stop ............................................................. 5-6
Coast to Stop with Timer .......................................... 5-7
DC Injection to Stop .................................................. 5-7
Ramp to Stop ............................................................. 5-5
T
Terminal AM Gain Setting ............................................. 4-14
Terminal Arrangement ..............................................1-5, 1-6
Terminal Block Configuration ......................................... 2-2
Terminal Card ................................................................... 7-7
Mounting the Terminal Card ..................................... 7-7
Removing the Terminal Card .................................... 7-7
Terminal Connections
Recommended Connectors ........................................ 2-8
Terminal Connections .................................................... 2-19
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Terminal cover ..................................................................1-6
Attaching .................................................................1-13
Removing ................................................................1-13
Removing and Attaching .........................................1-13
Terminal FM Gain Setting ..............................................4-14
Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes .................................2-21
Top protective cover .........................................................1-5
Trial Run .........................................................................4-15
Troubleshooting ..............................................................6-20
V
V/F Pattern ......................................................................5-12
E1-03 V/F Pattern Selection ....................................5-12
E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency ........................5-15
E1-05 Maximum Output Voltage ............................5-15
E1-06 Base Frequency .............................................5-15
E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency ........................5-15
E1-13 Base Voltage .................................................5-15
V/F Pattern Selection ......................................................5-12
V/F Pattern Voltage Upper Limit ...................................5-13
W
Wire Size for Remote Mount Resistor
Unit and Braking Transistor Unit ...................................2-15
Wire Sizes and Connector Specifications .........................2-3
Wiring Checks ................................................................2-24
Wiring Diagram ..............................................................2-25
Wiring Terminal Blocks .................................................2-40
Wire Sizes (Same for All Models) ..........................2-40
Wiring Method and Precautions ..............................2-40
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182
Index 6
Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
Drives Technical Support in USA and Canada
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
Technical Support for Inverters and Drives is available by phone as follows:
Normal: Monday through Friday during the hours of 8 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. C.S.T.
Emergency: After normal hours, 7 days a week including weekends and holidays
To contact Drives Technical Support, please call 1-800-YASKAWA (927-5292).
From the menu, dial 2 for Technical Assistance, then 1 for Technical Assistance on Variable Frequency Drives.
Drives Technical Support can also be reached by e-mail at [email protected].
Support information, such as technical manuals, FAQs, instruction sheets and software downloads are available at our website, www.yaskawa.com.
When calling for technical support, please have the following materials available:
• The appropriate Technical Manual in hand because the support associate may refer to this
• Complete nameplate information from the drive and the motor.
(Confirm that Drive Nameplate Output amps is equal to or greater than Motor Nameplate amps)
• A list with your parameter settings
• A sketch of the electrical power train, from AC line to motor, including filters and disconnects
Field Service, Start Up Assistance, Factory Repair, Replacement Parts, and Other Support
Contact Drives Technical Support for help with any of these needs.
Technical Training
Training is conducted at Yaskawa training centers, at customer sites, and via the internet.
For information, visit www.yaskawa.com or call 1-800-YASKAWA (927-5292).
From the phone menu, dial 4 for Product Training, then 1 for Product Training.
Support in Other Countries
Yaskawa is a multi-national company with offices and service representation around the world.
To obtain support, always contact the local distributor first for guidance and assistance.
Contact the closest Yaskawa office listed for further assistance.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
http://www.aotewell.com
F7 Drive
YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.
Drives Division
16555 W. Ryerson Rd., New Berlin, WI 53151, U.S.A.
Phone: (800) YASKAWA (800-927-5292) Fax: (847) 887-7310
Internet: http://www.yaskawa.com
YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.
Chicago-Corporate Headquarters
2121 Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.
Phone: (800) YASKAWA (800-927-5292) Fax: (847) 887-7310
Internet: http://www.yaskawa.com
MOTOMAN INC.
805 Liberty Lane, West Carrollton, OH 45449, U.S.A.
Phone: (937) 847-6200 Fax: (937) 847-6277
Internet: http://www.motoman.com
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
New Pier Takeshiba South Tower, 1-16-1, Kaigan, Minatoku, Tokyo, 105-0022, Japan
Phone: 81-3-5402-4511 Fax: 81-3-5402-4580
Internet: http://www.yaskawa.co.jp
YASKAWA ELETRICO DO BRASIL COMERCIO LTDA.
Avenida Fagundes Filho, 620 Bairro Saude Sao Paolo-SP, Brasil CEP: 04304-000
Phone: 55-11-5071-2552 Fax: 55-11-5581-8795
Internet: http://www.yaskawa.com.br
YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH
Am Kronberger Hang 2, 65824 Schwalbach, Germany
Phone: 49-6196-569-300 Fax: 49-6196-888-301
MOTOMAN ROBOTICS AB
Box 504 S38525, Torsas, Sweden
Phone: 46-486-48800 Fax: 46-486-41410
MOTOMAN ROBOTEC GmbH
Kammerfeldstrabe 1, 85391 Allershausen, Germany
Phone: 49-8166-900 Fax: 49-8166-9039
YASKAWA ELECTRIC UK LTD.
1 Hunt Hill Orchardton Woods Cumbernauld, G68 9LF, Scotland, United Kingdom
Phone: 44-12-3673-5000 Fax: 44-12-3645-8182
Aotewell Email: [email protected]
YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION
Paik Nam Bldg. 901 188-3, 1-Ga Euljiro, Joong-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Phone: 82-2-776-7844 Fax: 82-2-753-2639
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.
Head Office: 151 Lorong Chuan, #04-01, New Tech Park Singapore 556741, Singapore
Phone: 65-282-3003 Fax: 65-289-3003
TAIPEI OFFICE (AND YATEC ENGINEERING CORPORATION)
10F 146 Sung Chiang Road, Taipei, Taiwan
Phone: 886-2-2563-0010 Fax: 886-2-2567-4677
YASKAWA JASON (HK) COMPANY LIMITED
Rm. 2909-10, Hong Kong Plaza, 186-191 Connaught Road West, Hong Kong
Phone: 852-2803-2385 Fax: 852-2547-5773
BEIJING OFFICE
Room No. 301 Office Building of Beijing International Club,
21 Jianguomanwai Avenue, Beijing 100020, China
Phone: 86-10-6532-1850 Fax: 86-10-6532-1851
SHANGHAI OFFICE
27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China
Phone: 86-21-6553-6600 Fax: 86-21-6531-4242
SHANGHAI YASKAWA-TONJI M & E CO., LTD.
27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China
Phone: 86-21-6533-2828 Fax: 86-21-6553-6677
BEIJING YASKAWA BEIKE AUTOMATION ENGINEERING CO., LTD.
30 Xue Yuan Road, Haidian, Beijing 100083 China
Phone: 86-10-6232-9943 Fax: 86-10-6234-5002
SHOUGANG MOTOMAN ROBOT CO., LTD.
7, Yongchang-North Street, Beijing Economic & Technological Development Area,
Beijing 100076 China
Phone: 86-10-6788-0551 Fax: 86-10-6788-2878
YEA, TAICHUNG OFFICE IN TAIWAIN
B1, 6F, No.51, Section 2, Kung-Yi Road, Taichung City, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Phone: 886-4-2320-2227 Fax:886-4-2320-2239
YEA Document Number: TM.F7.01 08/1/08 Rev: 08-08
Data subject to change without notice. Yaskawa Electric America, Inc.
Tel: +(86) 755 8660 6182 Aotewell http://www.aotewell.com
Download
Offentligt link opdateret
Det offentlige link til din chat er blevet opdateret. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Dokument offentligt link
Annonce